2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M

Cadillac ATS Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 10/5/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-43 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-49 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-50
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-75
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-18
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Cadillac Premium Care OnStar Additional
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language manual can be
due to changes subsequent to the obtained from your dealer, at
printing of this owner manual. www.helminc.com, or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, the CADILLAC substitute the name “General
Crest and Wreath, and CADILLAC Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for Attention: Customer Service
ATS are trademarks and/or service Cadillac Motor Car Division
marks of General Motors LLC, its 47911 Halyard Drive
wherever it appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20931542 B Second Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart H : Flammable

Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light (: Heated Steering Wheel
# : Air Conditioning j: LATCH System Child
G : Air Conditioning Restraints
Refrigerant Oil * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) : : Oil Pressure
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls O : Power
or OnStar®
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
$ : Brake System Warning Light > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Certified Technician 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
" : Charging System d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
I : Cruise Control M : Windshield Washer Fluid
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Steering Wheel Rear Vision

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Active Emergency Braking
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Universal Remote System . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Vehicle Features
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Performance and Maintenance
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Traction Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Tire Sealant and
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Driver Information Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-24
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Driving for Better Fuel
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Passenger Sensing Lane Departure Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8‑10. 7. Infotainment Display. 15. Electric Parking Brake (If
2. Exterior Lamp Controls on Infotainment System. See the Equipped, Automatic
page 6‑1. infotainment manual. Transmission). See Parking
Brake (Electric) on page 9‑30
Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and 8. Light Sensor. See Automatic or Parking Brake (Manual) on
Lane-Change Signals on Headlamp System on page 6‑5. page 9‑33.
page 6‑6. 9. Dual Automatic Climate Control 16. Head-Up Display (HUD) on
3. Cruise Control on page 9‑39. System (Base) on page 8‑1 or page 5‑29 (If Equipped).
Adaptive Cruise Control on Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Uplevel) on page 8‑5. 17. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 9‑42 (If Equipped). page 5‑2.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) 10. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑7. 18. Horn on page 5‑4.
System on page 9‑55 (If
Equipped). 11. Hood Release (Out of View). 19. Engine START/STOP Button.
See Hood on page 10‑5. See Ignition Positions on
Heated Steering Wheel on page 9‑16.
page 5‑3. 12. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction 20. Heated Front Seats on
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3‑8 (If Equipped).
page 5‑2. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑16.
13. Parking Assist Button. See 21. Storage Bin. See Instrument
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. Panel Storage on page 4‑1.
Driver Assistance Systems on
Driver Information Center (DIC) page 9‑50. 22. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Display. See Driver Information Transmission on page 9‑25 or
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26. Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) on page 9‑62. Manual Transmission on
5. Steering Wheel Controls on page 9‑28 (If Equipped).
page 5‑2. 14. Tap Shift Controls (If
Equipped). See Manual Mode
6. Windshield Wiper/Washer on on page 9‑26.
page 5‑4.
1-4 In Brief
23. Traction Control System (TCS) Initial Drive Press and hold L for
on page 9‑34. three seconds to sound the panic
StabiliTrak® System on
Information alarm.
page 9‑36. This section provides a brief
Press L again or start the vehicle
Electric Parking Brake overview about some of the
important features that may or may to cancel the panic alarm.
(If Equipped, Manual
Transmission). See Parking not be on your specific vehicle. | : Press and hold until the trunk
Brake (Electric) on page 9‑30 begins to move to open the trunk.
For more detailed information, refer
or Parking Brake (Manual) on to each of the features which can be
page 9‑33. found later in this owner manual.
24. MODE Button. See Driver
Mode Control on page 9‑37. Remote Keyless Entry
25. Instrument Panel Storage on (RKE) System
page 4‑1. The RKE transmitter may be used
26. Hazard Warning Flashers on to lock and unlock the doors from up
page 6‑6. to 60 m (195 ft) away from the
vehicle.
Q: Press to lock all doors.
K: Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors, depending on the Press the key release button near
vehicle personalization settings. the bottom of the transmitter to
See Vehicle Personalization on remove the key. The key can be
page 5‑43. used for the driver door and the
glove box.
L : Press and release one time to
initiate vehicle locator.
In Brief 1-5
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks
Keyless Entry (RKE) System lamps will turn on and remain on as
Operation on page 2‑3. long as the engine is running. The To lock or unlock a door manually:
doors will be locked and the climate . From the outside, if the vehicle
Remote Vehicle Start control system may come on. is equipped with keyless access,
The engine will continue to run for press the button on the door
With this feature the engine can be
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a handle and pull the handle when
started from outside of the vehicle.
10-minute time extension. Remote the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Starting the Vehicle start can be extended only once. transmitter is within range. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Press and release Q on the Canceling a Remote Start System Operation on page 2‑3.
RKE transmitter.
To cancel a remote start, do any of . Use the key in the front doors.
2. Immediately press and hold / the following: The key cylinder is covered by a
for at least two seconds or until cap. See Door Locks on
. Press and hold / until the page 2‑11.
the turn signal lamps flash.
parking lamps turn off.
3. Press the brake pedal and select . From the inside, to lock a rear
. Turn on the hazard warning door push down on the door lock
the ON/RUN/START ignition
flashers. knob on top of the door. To
mode to drive the vehicle.
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. unlock a door, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and
See Remote Vehicle Start on
again to open it.
page 2‑9.
1-6 In Brief
Power Door Locks Trunk Windows

From the outside, press Q or K on
the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
To open the trunk, press | from The power windows only operate
inside the vehicle or on the Remote with the ignition in ACC/
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
or push the touch pad on the rear of or when Retained Accessory Power
the trunk above the license plate. (RAP) is active. See Retained
From the inside, press Q or K. The Accessory Power (RAP) on
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
indicator light in the switch will page 9‑21.
System Operation on page 2‑3 and
illuminate when activated. See
Trunk on page 2‑14.
Power Door Locks on page 2‑12.
In Brief 1-7
The power window switches on the Seat Adjustment See Power Seat Adjustment on
driver door control all the windows. page 3‑3.
Each passenger door has a switch Power Seats
that controls only that window. Lumbar Adjustment
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to raise
it. See Power Windows on
page 2‑21.
To adjust the seat:

To adjust the lumbar and bolster
. Move the seat forward or support:
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
. Press and hold the control
forward or rearward to increase
. Raise or lower the seat by or decrease lumbar support.
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
. Press and hold the control up or
down to increase or decrease
. If available, raise or lower the seatback bolster support,
front part of the seat cushion by if available.
moving the front of the control
up or down.
1-8 In Brief
See Lumbar Adjustment on Memory Features Second Row Seats

page 3‑4.
On some models, the rear
Reclining Seatbacks seatbacks can be folded down to
increase cargo space.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑9.
Heated Seats
If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and

B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
To adjust the seatback: are used to manually save and
recall memory settings for the driver
. Tilt the top of the control seat and outside mirrors.
rearward to recline.
See Memory Seats on page 3‑6 and
. Tilt the top of the control forward Vehicle Personalization on Uplevel Buttons Shown, Base
to raise. page 5‑43. Buttons Similar
See Reclining Seatbacks on If available, the buttons are near the
page 3‑5. climate controls on the center stack.
To operate, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN/START.
In Brief 1-9
Press M /J or L /z to heat the Head Restraint Safety Belts

driver or passenger seat cushion Adjustment
and seatback.
Do not drive until the head restraints
Press the button once for the for all occupants are installed and
highest setting. With each press of adjusted properly.
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to To achieve a comfortable seating
the off setting. The indicator lights position, change the seatback
next to the buttons indicate three for recline angle as little as necessary
the highest setting and one for the while keeping the seat and the head
lowest. If the heated seats are on restraint height in the proper
high, the level may automatically be position.
lowered after approximately See Head Restraints on page 3‑2
30 minutes. and Power Seat Adjustment on
See Heated Front Seats on page 3‑3. Refer to the following sections for
page 3‑8. important information on how to use
safety belts properly:
. Safety Belts on page 3‑11.
. How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑12.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑13.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑41.
1-10 In Brief
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status 3. Move the selector switch to ) to
indicator lights on the overhead deselect the mirror.
System console when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status The vehicle has manual folding
Indicator on page 5‑14. mirrors. See Folding Mirrors on
page 2‑20.
Mirror Adjustment Interior Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors Adjustment
United States Hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.
Manual Rearview Mirror
For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
Canada and Mexico use to avoid glare from the
The passenger sensing system headlamps from behind. See
will turn off the front outboard Manual Rearview Mirror on
passenger frontal airbag and knee page 2‑20.
airbag under certain conditions. No Automatic Dimming Rearview
other airbag is affected by the 1. Move the selector switch to
L (Left) or R (Right) to choose Mirror
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on the driver or passenger mirror. For vehicles with an automatic
page 3‑27. 2. Press one of the four arrows to dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
move the mirror. will automatically reduce the glare
from the headlamps from behind.
In Brief 1-11
The dimming feature comes on 4. Pull the lever up to lock the DOOR: The lamp comes on when
when the vehicle is started. See steering wheel in place. a door is opened.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Do not adjust the steering wheel ON: Turns the lamp on.
on page 2‑20. while driving.
Reading Lamps
Steering Wheel Interior Lighting There are reading lamps on the
Adjustment overhead console and over the rear
Dome Lamp passenger doors. These lamps
The dome lamp is in the overhead come on when any door is opened.
console. To manually turn the reading lamps
on or off:
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up To change the dome lamp settings,
or down. press the following: Press m or n next to each
3. Pull or push the steering wheel OFF: Turns the lamp off, even overhead console reading lamp.
closer or away from you. when a door is open.
1-12 In Brief
Press the lamp lens to turn the rear to O again to reactivate the AUTO Windshield Wiper/Washer
passenger reading lamps on or off. mode. In Canada, the headlamps
For more information on interior will automatically reactivate when
lighting, see Instrument Panel the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)
Illumination Control on page 6‑7. on automatic transmission vehicles,
and when the parking brake is
Exterior Lighting released on manual transmission
vehicles.
AUTO: Automatically turns the With the ignition in ACC/
exterior lamps on and off, ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
depending on outside lighting. move the lever to select the wiper
; : Turns on the parking lamps, speed.
together with the sidemarker lamps, HI: Use for fast wipes.
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights. LO: Use for slow wipes.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
The exterior lamp control is on the together with the parking lamps,
end of the turn and lane change sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
lever. plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
There are four positions:
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
O: Turns off the exterior lamps. page 6‑1 and Daytime Running
The knob returns to the AUTO Lamps (DRL) on page 6‑4.
position after it is released. Turn
In Brief 1-13
INT: Move the lever up to INT for Climate Controls

intermittent wipes, then turn
the x INT band up for more For vehicles with one of these systems, it controls the heating, cooling, and
frequent wipes or down for less ventilation.
frequent wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
8: For a single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. For several wipes,
hold the lever down.
nL: Pull the lever toward you to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
Base
1. Driver and Passenger 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

Temperature Controls Seats (If Equipped)
2. Fan Control 8. AC (Air Conditioning)
3. AUTO (Automatic Operation) 9. Defrost
4. Air Delivery Mode Control 10. Rear Window Defogger
5. OFF (Fan) 11. Recirculation
6. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature)
1-14 In Brief
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC) or Tap
Shift
Vehicles equipped with DSC allow
shifting an automatic transmission
similar to a manual transmission.
DSC can be enabled through the
shift lever, or the tap shift controls
on the back of the steering wheel
(if equipped). See Manual Mode on
Uplevel page 9‑26.
1. Driver and Passenger 6. Defrost
Temperature Controls 7. Rear Window Defogger
2. Fan Control 8. Recirculation
3. OFF (Fan) See Dual Automatic Climate Control
4. Driver and Passenger Heated System (Base) on page 8‑1 or Dual
Seats (If Equipped) Automatic Climate Control System
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) (Uplevel) on page 8‑5.
In Brief 1-15
Vehicle Features Favorites SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Favorites can be stored including Service
Radio(s) radio stations and media. SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
based in the 48 contiguous United
O : Press to turn the system on To display the favorites page, press
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
and off. Turn to increase or the FAV button on the radio
faceplate. Continue pressing the SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
decrease the volume.
FAV button to toggle through the variety of programming and
RADIO: Press to choose between remaining visible favorite pages. commercial-free music, coast to
FM, AM, and SiriusXM®, coast, and in digital-quality sound.
if equipped. See “Manage Favorites” under A fee is required to receive the
Home Page on page 7‑4. SiriusXM service.
{: Press to go to the Home Page.
MENU: Press to select a menu. Setting the Clock For more information refer to:
MEDIA: Press to change the audio See Clock (Base Radio) on . www.siriusxm.com or call
source between CD, USB, SD Card, page 5‑6 or Clock (Uplevel Radio) 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
and AUX. on page 5‑6. . www.xmradio.ca or call
7: Press to seek the previous 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Satellite Radio
station or track. See Satellite Radio on page 7‑11.
Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
6 : Press to seek the next station radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
or track. satellite radio subscription can
See Overview on page 7‑3 about receive SiriusXM programming.
these and other radio features.
1-16 In Brief
Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls

This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) The Bluetooth system allows users
auxiliary input and a USB port in the with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
center console under the armrest to make and receive hands-free
and in the center stack storage bin. calls using the vehicle audio system
External devices such as iPods®, and controls.
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
changers, and USB storage devices must be paired with the in-vehicle
may be connected, depending on Bluetooth system before it can be
the audio system. used in the vehicle. Not all phones
See Auxiliary Jack on page 7‑20 will support all functions.
and USB Port on page 7‑16. See Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) on page 7‑23 or Bluetooth
(Voice Recognition) on page 7‑27 or For vehicles with audio steering
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑21. wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
g : Press to talk or interact with
OnStar® and Bluetooth®. See
OnStar Overview on page 14‑1 and
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑23 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑27 or
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑21.
In Brief 1-17
c : Press to decline an incoming y or z : Press the five-way Cruise Control

call, or end a current call. Press to control up or down to go up or down
mute or unmute the infotainment in a list. Press to go up or down
system. a page.
SEL: Press to select a highlighted
menu item.
C or B : Press to go to the next or
previous favorite when listening to
the radio. Press to go to the next or
previous track when listening to a
media source.
x + or x −:Press to increase or
decrease the volume.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2. J: Press to turn the system on
and off. A white cruise control
indicator appears in the instrument
S or T : Press the five-way control cluster when cruise is turned on.
to the left or right to go to the
previous or next area in the display
or to the previous or next menu.
1-18 In Brief
+RES: Press the control up briefly See Cruise Control on page 9‑39 or
to resume to a previously set speed Adaptive Cruise Control on
or to increase vehicle speed if the page 9‑42 (if equipped).
cruise control is already activated.
To increase speed by 1 km/h Infotainment System
(1 mph), press +RES up to the first
detent. To increase speed to the See the infotainment manual for
next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the information on the radio, audio
speedometer, press +RES up to the players, phone, navigation system,
second detent. and voice or speech recognition.
There is also information on settings
SET−: Press the control down and downloadable applications (if
briefly to set the speed and activate equipped).
cruise control or to decrease vehicle
speed if the cruise control is already Driver Information y or z : Press to move up or
activated. To decrease speed by down in a list.
1 km/h (1 mph), press SET− down Center (DIC)
S or T : Press to move between
to the first detent. To decrease The DIC display is in the instrument the interactive display zones in the
speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) cluster. It shows the status of many cluster. Press S to go back to the
mark on the speedometer, press vehicle systems.
SET− down to the second detent. previous menu.
*: Press to disengage cruise SEL: Press to open a menu or

control without erasing the set select a menu item. Press and hold
speed from memory. to reset values on certain screens.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑26.
In Brief 1-19
Forward Collision Alert indicator will change to amber and See Assistance Systems for Parking
flash. In addition, the driver seat will or Backing on page 9‑51.
(FCA) System pulse or beeps will sound.
FCA is intended to help avoid or See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Ultrasonic Parking Assist
reduce the harm caused by on page 9‑62.
front-end crashes. FCA provides a URPA uses sensors on the rear
green indicator when a vehicle is bumper to assist with parking and
detected directly ahead. It provides
Side Blind Zone avoiding objects while in
a flashing visual alert and pulses Alert (SBZA) R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
the driver seat, or beeps, when less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA
If available, SBZA will alert the may display a warning triangle on
approaching a vehicle directly driver to vehicles in the vehicle's
ahead too quickly. FCA also the Rear Vision Camera screen and
side blind zone. When the system a graphic on the instrument cluster
provides a visual alert if following detects a vehicle in the side blind
another vehicle much too closely. to provide the object distance. In
zone, the SBZA display will light up addition, multiple beeps or pulses
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) in the corresponding outside side may occur if very close to an object.
System on page 9‑55. mirror and will flash if the turn signal
is on. The vehicle may also have the Front
Parking Assist system, a higher
Lane Departure See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) speed Backing Warning System,
Warning (LDW) on page 9‑60. and the Rear Automatic Braking
LDW is intended to help avoid system.
unintentional lane departures at
Rear Vision See Driver Assistance Systems on
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or Camera (RVC) page 9‑50.
greater. LDW uses a camera sensor RVC displays a view of the area
to detect the lane markings. The behind the vehicle, on the center
LDW indicator, @, appears green if stack display, when the vehicle is
a lane marking is detected. If the shifted into R (Reverse).
vehicle departs the lane, the
1-20 In Brief
Active Emergency Power Outlets Universal Remote System

Braking System The accessory power outlets can be
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise used to plug in electrical equipment,
Control (ACC) it also has the such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Active Emergency Braking System, The vehicle has two accessory
which includes Intelligent Brake power outlets:
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic . Inside the front storage bin
Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
below the climate control
These systems can provide a boost
system.
to braking or automatically brake the
vehicle to help avoid crashes. . On the rear of the center floor
console.
See Active Emergency Braking
System on page 9‑58. Lift the cover to access the
accessory power outlet.
This system provides a way to
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7. replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
In Brief 1-21
Read the instructions completely Express Open/Express Close:

before attempting to program the Press the rear or front of the
Universal Remote system. Because switch (1) to the second detent and
of the steps involved, it may be release to express open or express
helpful to have another person close the sunroof.
available to assist you with Vent Feature: Press the rear of the
programming the Universal Remote switch (2) and release to express
system. open the vent. Press the front of the
See Universal Remote System on switch (2) and release to express
page 5‑49. close the vent.
Manually open the sunshade.
Sunroof
1. SLIDE Switch See Sunroof on page 2‑23.
For vehicles equipped with a
sunroof, the ignition must be in 2. TILT Switch
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, Open/Close: Press the rear or
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) front of the switch (1) to the first
must be active, to operate the detent and hold to open or close the
sunroof. See Ignition Positions on sunroof.
page 9‑16 and Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑21.
1-22 In Brief
Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance The StabiliTrak system assists with This vehicle may have a Tire
directional control of the vehicle in Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
difficult driving conditions. The
Traction Control system is on when the vehicle is
System (TCS) started.
The traction control system limits . To turn off both Traction Control
wheel spin. The system is on when and StabiliTrak, press and
the vehicle is started. hold g until g and i illuminate
. To turn off traction control, press in the instrument cluster.
The low tire pressure warning light
and release g on the center . Press g again to turn on both alerts to a significant loss in
console. i illuminates in the systems. pressure of one of the vehicle's
instrument cluster. tires. If the warning light comes on,
See StabiliTrak® System on
stop as soon as possible and inflate
. Press and release g again to page 9‑36.
the tires to the recommended
turn traction control back on. pressure shown on the Tire and
See Traction Control System (TCS) Loading Information label. See
on page 9‑34. Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11.
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
In Brief 1-23
The low tire pressure warning light Engine Oil Life System 2. Press SEL on the DIC controls
may come on in cool weather when and hold SEL down for a few
the vehicle is first started, and then The engine oil life system calculates seconds to clear the CHANGE
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This engine oil life based on vehicle use ENGINE OIL SOON message
may be an early indicator that the and displays the CHANGE ENGINE and reset the oil life at 100%.
tire pressures are getting low and OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter. Be careful not to reset the oil life
the tires need to be inflated to the display accidentally at any time
proper pressure. The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil other than after the oil is
The TPMS does not replace normal change. changed. It cannot be reset
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain accurately until the next oil
the correct tire pressures. Resetting the Oil Life System change.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System 1. Using the DIC controls on the The oil life system can also be reset
on page 10‑52. right side of the steering wheel, as follows:
display REMAINING OIL LIFE
on the DIC. See Driver 1. Turn the ignition on with the
Tire Sealant and engine off.
Information Center (DIC) on
Compressor Kit page 5‑26. When remaining 2. Fully press and release the
This vehicle may have a tire sealant oil life is low, the CHANGE accelerator pedal three times
and compressor kit that can be used ENGINE OIL SOON message within five seconds.
to seal small punctures in the tread will appear on the display. See If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
area of the tire. Significant sidewall Engine Oil Messages on SOON message is not on, the
damage will require the tire to be page 5‑35. system is reset.
replaced.
See Engine Oil Life System on
See Tire Sealant and Compressor page 10‑13.
Kit on page 10‑67 for complete
operating information.
1-24 In Brief
. Avoid idling the engine for long
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) periods of time.
Roadside Service
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can . U.S.: 1-800-224-1400
When road and weather
use either unleaded gasoline Canada: 1-800-882-1112
conditions are appropriate, use
or ethanol fuel containing up to
cruise control. TTY Users (U.S. Only):
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 9‑66. For . Always follow posted speed 1-888-889-2438
all other vehicles, use only the limits or drive more slowly when Mexico: 01-800-466-0805
unleaded gasoline described under conditions require.
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑64. New vehicles are automatically
. Keep vehicle tires properly enrolled in the Roadside Service
inflated. program.
Driving for Better Fuel . Combine several trips into a See Roadside Service (Mexico) on
Economy single trip. page 13‑7 or Roadside Service
Driving habits can affect fuel . Replace the vehicle's tires with (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑10.
mileage. Here are some driving tips the same TPC Spec number
to get the best fuel economy molded into the tire's sidewall OnStar®
possible. near the size.
If equipped, this vehicle has a
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate . Follow recommended scheduled comprehensive, in-vehicle system
smoothly. maintenance. that can connect to a live Advisor
. Brake gradually and avoid for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
abrupt stops. Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors Windows

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Windows Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Vehicle Security Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys and Locks Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16 Roof
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Exterior Mirrors
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Interior Mirrors
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-13 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-20
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous and
children or others could be
seriously injured or killed. They
could operate the power windows
To remove the key, press the button
or other controls or make the
near the bottom of the transmitter,
vehicle move. The windows will and pull the key out. Never pull the
function with the RKE transmitter key out without pressing the button.
in the vehicle, and children or
others could be caught in the path See your dealer if a new key is
of a closing window. Do not leave needed.
children in a vehicle with an RKE Contact Roadside Service if locked
transmitter. out of the vehicle. See Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑10.
With an active OnStar subscription,
This key, inside the Remote Keyless an OnStar Advisor may remotely
Entry (RKE) transmitter, is used for unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
the driver door and glove box. Overview on page 14‑1.

. Check the transmitter's battery.
Remote Keyless Entry See “Battery Replacement” later
(RKE) System in this section.
See Radio Frequency Statement on . If the transmitter is still not
page 13‑21 for information working correctly, see your
regarding Part 15 of the Federal dealer or a qualified technician
Communications Commission (FCC) for service.
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. Remote Keyless Entry
If there is a decrease in the RKE (RKE) System Operation
operating range:
The RKE transmitter functions may
. Check the distance. The work up to 60 m (195 ft) away from With Remote Start and Remote
transmitter may be too far from the vehicle. Trunk Release Shown, Without
the vehicle.
Keep in mind that other conditions, Similar
. Check the location. Other such as those previously stated, can
vehicles or objects may be Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
impact the performance of the The turn signal indicators may flash
blocking the signal. transmitter. and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking. See “Remote
Locking, Unlocking, Starting” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑43.
If the driver door is open when Q is See “Remote Locking, Unlocking, | (Remote Trunk Release):
pressed and “Unlocked Door Anti Starting” under Vehicle Press and hold until the trunk
Lock Out” is enabled through the Personalization on page 5‑43. begins to move to open the power
vehicle personalization, all doors will Pressing K will disarm the trunk.
lock and then the driver door will theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
immediately unlock. See “Unlocked Keyless Access Operation
Alarm System on page 2‑16.
Door Anti Lock Out” under Vehicle Some vehicles have the keyless
Personalization on page 5‑43. If the / (Remote Start): For vehicles access system that lets you lock
passenger door is open when Q is with this feature, press and release and unlock the doors and access
pressed, all doors lock. Q and then immediately press and the trunk without removing the RKE
hold / for at least two seconds to transmitter from your pocket, purse,
Pressing Q may also arm the start the engine from outside the briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle vehicle using the RKE transmitter. must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the door
Alarm System on page 2‑16. See Remote Vehicle Start on being opened. If the vehicle has this
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the page 2‑9. feature, there will be a button on the
outside door handles.
driver door or all doors. When L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
remotely unlocking the vehicle at Alarm): Press and release one The keyless access system can be
night, the headlamps and back-up time to initiate vehicle locator. The programmed to unlock all doors
lamps will come on for about exterior lamps flash and the horn on the first lock/unlock press from
30 seconds to light your approach to chirps three times. Press and hold the driver door. See Vehicle
the vehicle. The turn signal L for three seconds to sound the Personalization on page 5‑43.
indicators may flash to indicate panic alarm. The horn sounds and
unlocking. Memory seat positions the turn signal lamps flash for
may be recalled when unlocking the 30 seconds, or until L is pressed
vehicle. again or the vehicle is started.
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from Pressing the lock/unlock button will Passive Locking
the Driver Door cause all doors to lock if any of the If the vehicle has the keyless
When the doors are locked and the following occur: access system, this feature allows
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) . It has been more than you to select the doors to
of the door handle, pressing the five seconds since the first lock/ automatically lock during normal
lock/unlock button on the driver door unlock button press. vehicle exit. When the vehicle is
handle will unlock the driver door. . Two lock/unlock button presses turned off and all doors are closed,
If the lock/unlock button is pressed were used to unlock all doors. the vehicle will determine how many
again within five seconds, all RKE transmitters remain in the
passenger doors will unlock. . Any vehicle door has opened vehicle interior. If at least one RKE
and all doors are now closed. transmitter has been removed from
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the interior of the vehicle, the doors
the Passenger Doors will lock after eight seconds.
When the doors are locked and the Temporarily disable the locking
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) feature by pressing and holding
of the door handle, pressing the the K switch on the door for several
lock/unlock button on a passenger seconds with a door open. Passive
door handle will unlock all doors. locking will then remain disabled
Pressing the lock/unlock button will until the door Q switch is pressed,
cause all doors to lock if any of the or until the vehicle is turned on.
following occur:
To customize the doors to
Driver Door Shown, Passenger
. The lock/unlock button was used automatically lock when exiting the
to unlock all doors. vehicle, see “Remote Locking,
Similar
. Any vehicle door has opened Unlocking, Starting” under Vehicle
and all doors are now closed. Personalization on page 5‑43.
Keyless Trunk Opening Programming with a Recognized The Driver Information Center
Press the touch pad on the trunk Transmitter (Keyless Access (DIC) displays READY TO
handle to open the trunk if the RKE Vehicles Only) LEARN ELECTRONIC
transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). A new transmitter can be KEY #2, 3, 4, ETC.
programmed to the vehicle when
Programming Transmitters to there is one recognized transmitter.
the Vehicle
To program, the vehicle must be off
Only RKE transmitters programmed and all transmitters, both currently
to the vehicle will work. If a recognized and new, must be
transmitter is lost or stolen, a with you.
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer. 1. Place the recognized
The vehicle can be reprogrammed transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
so that lost or stolen transmitters no 2. Remove the key lock cylinder
longer work. Each vehicle can have cap. See Door Locks on
up to eight transmitters matched page 2‑11. Insert the vehicle key
to it. into the key lock cylinder on the
driver door handle, then turn the 3. Place the new transmitter into
key counterclockwise to the the transmitter pocket. The
unlock position five times within center console storage area will
10 seconds. need to be opened to access the
transmitter pocket.
4. Press the ENGINE START/ to complete. The vehicle must be 3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
STOP button. When the off and all transmitters to be times. After the third time all
transmitter is learned, the DIC programmed must be with you. previously known transmitters
display will show that it is ready 1. Remove the key lock cylinder will no longer work with the
to program the next transmitter. cap. See Door Locks on vehicle. Remaining transmitters
5. Remove the transmitter from the page 2‑11. Insert the vehicle key can be relearned during the next
into the key lock cylinder on the steps.
transmitter pocket and press K
driver door handle, then turn the The DIC display should
or Q on the transmitter.
key counterclockwise to the now show READY FOR
To program additional unlock position five times within REMOTE # 1.
transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5. 10 seconds.
When all additional transmitters The Driver Information Center
are programmed, press and hold (DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
the START/STOP button for PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
approximately 12 seconds to exit 2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC
programming mode. displays PRESS ENGINE
Programming without a START BUTTON TO LEARN
Recognized Transmitter (Keyless and then press the ENGINE
Access Vehicles Only) START/STOP button.
If there are no currently recognized The DIC display will again show
transmitters available, follow this REMOTE LEARN PENDING,
procedure to program up to eight PLEASE WAIT.
transmitters. This feature is not 4. Place the new transmitter in the
available in Canada. This procedure transmitter pocket. The center
will take approximately 30 minutes console storage area will need
to be opened to access the
transmitter pocket.
5. Press the START/STOP button. To start the vehicle: Battery Replacement

When the transmitter is learned, 1. Open the center console storage Notice: When replacing the
the DIC display will show that it area and the storage tray. battery, do not touch any of the
is ready to program the next
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
transmitter.
from your body could damage the
6. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter.
transmitter pocket and press K Replace the battery if the REPLACE
or Q on the transmitter. BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the START/STOP button for
approximately 12 seconds to exit
programming mode.
2. Place the transmitter in the
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
transmitter pocket.
Transmitter Battery
3. With the vehicle in P (Park),
If the transmitter battery is weak or if N (Neutral) or, Neutral, press the
there is interference with the signal, brake pedal and the ENGINE
the DIC may display a message START/STOP button.
when you try to start the vehicle.
Replace the transmitter battery 1. Press the button near the bottom
See Key and Lock Messages on
as soon as possible. of the transmitter and pull the
page 5‑36.
key out.
Remote Vehicle Start

If available, this feature allows the
engine to be started from outside
the vehicle.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This
button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
The climate control system will use
the previous settings during a
remote start. The rear window
2. Use the oval base of the key 3. Remove the old battery. Do not defogger may come on during
blade to separate the two halves use a metal object. remote start based on cold ambient
of the transmitter. 4. Insert the new battery on the conditions. The rear defog indicator
back housing, positive side light does not come on during
facing down. Replace with a remote start.
CR2032 or equivalent battery. Laws in some local communities
5. Align the key release button and may restrict the use of remote
snap the transmitter back starters. For example, some laws
together. may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not During the remote start, the For example, if the vehicle has
use the remote start feature. The doors will be locked and the been running for five minutes, and
vehicle may run out of fuel. parking lamps will remain on as 10 minutes are added, the engine
The RKE transmitter range may be long as the engine is running. will run for a total of 15 minutes.
less while the vehicle is running. The engine will shut off after A maximum of two remote starts,
Other conditions can affect the 10 minutes unless a time or a remote start with an extension,
performance of the transmitter. See extension is done or the ignition are allowed between ignition cycles.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is put in ON/RUN/START. The vehicle's ignition must be
System on page 2‑3. 3. Press the brake pedal and select changed to ON/RUN/START and
the ON/RUN/START ignition then back to OFF before the remote
Starting the Engine Using Remote mode to drive the vehicle. start procedure can be used again.
Start
Extending Engine Run Time Canceling a Remote Start
1. Press and release Q on the
RKE transmitter. For a 10-minute extension, repeat To cancel a remote start, do any of
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is the following:
2. Immediately press and hold / still running. The remote start can
for at least two seconds or until only be extended once.
. Press and hold / until the
the turn signal lamps flash. This parking lamps turn off.
When the remote start is extended,
confirms the request to remote the second 10-minute period will
. Turn on the hazard warning
start the vehicle has been start immediately. flashers.
received. If the vehicle's lamps
are not visible, press and
. Turn the vehicle on and then
back off.
hold / for at least two seconds.
Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Will Not Work
The remote start will not operate if
any of the following occur:
{ WARNING injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
. The ignition is in any mode other Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
than OFF. dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. The transmitter is in the vehicle.
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
. The hood is not closed. doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
. The hazard warning flashers vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
are on. locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
. There is an emission control thrown out of the vehicle in a
system malfunction. crash is increased if the
. From the outside, if the vehicle
doors are not locked. So, all is equipped with keyless access,
. The engine coolant temperature
passengers should wear press the button on the door
is too high.
safety belts properly and the handle and pull the handle when
. The oil pressure is low. the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
doors should be locked
. Two remote vehicle starts have whenever the vehicle is transmitter is within range. See
already been used. driven. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). . Young children who get into .
unlocked vehicles may be From the inside, to lock a rear
unable to get out. A child can door push down on the door lock
be overcome by extreme heat knob on top of the door. To
and can suffer permanent unlock a door, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and
(Continued) again to open it.

. Use the key in the front doors.
The key cylinder is covered by
3. Move the cap (2) rearward. Power Door Locks
a cap. 4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.
To replace the cap:
1. Insert the two tabs at the back of
the cap (2) between the black
seal and the metal base.
2. Pull the door handle (1) to the
open position.
3. Move the cap (2) forward and
press to snap the cap into place.
1. Door Handle 4. Release the door handle (1).
2. Cap
3. Slot Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
4. Key The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate when activated.
To access the key cylinder:
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
1. Pull the door handle (1) to the doors.
open position.
2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3)
on the bottom of the cap (2) and
pry outward.
Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks switch is pressed with the driver
door open, all the doors will lock
This feature delays the actual The doors will lock automatically and only the driver door will unlock.
locking of the doors. when all doors are closed, the
ignition is on, and the shift lever is If the vehicle is off with the RKE
When Q is pressed on the power moved out of P (Park). The doors transmitter in the vehicle and the
door lock switch, while the door is will automatically unlock when the power door lock switch is pressed
open, a chime will sound three vehicle is stopped and the shift with the driver door open, all the
times indicating that delayed locking lever is moved into P (Park). doors will lock and only the driver
is active. door will unlock after closing all of
Use the manual or power door locks the doors.
When all the doors are closed, the to unlock the doors if someone
doors will lock automatically after needs to exit, and to lock the doors This feature can be manually
five seconds. If a door is reopened again. overridden with the driver door open
before five seconds have elapsed, by pressing and holding Q on the
the five-second timer will reset once The power door locks can be
programmed through the Driver power door lock switch.
all the doors are closed again.
Information Center (DIC). See Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Press Q on the door lock switch Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑43. When this feature is on and door
again or press Q on the RKE locking is requested with the driver
transmitter to override this feature door open, all doors will lock and
and lock the doors immediately. Lockout Protection only the driver door will unlock. The
This feature can also be If the vehicle is in ACC/ driver door must be closed before
programmed. See Vehicle ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START locking is requested for all doors to
Personalization on page 5‑43. with the Remote Keyless remain locked. When this feature is
Entry (RKE) transmitter in the off, the Delayed Door Lock menu
vehicle and the power door lock will be available.
This feature can also be Press v { to activate the safety Doors

programmed. See Vehicle locks on the rear doors. The
Personalization on page 5‑43. indicator light in the switch will Trunk
illuminate when activated.
Safety Locks The rear door power windows are
also disabled. See Power Windows
{ WARNING
on page 2‑21. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
Press v { again to deactivate the
liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
lockout switch.
or with any objects that pass
If an inside rear door handle is through the seal between the
being pulled when the safety lock is body and the trunk/hatch or
deactivated, that door will remain liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
locked and the indicator light may carbon monoxide (CO) which
flash. Release the handle, then cannot be seen or smelled. It can
press the safety lock twice to cause unconsciousness and even
deactivate the safety locks. death.
The rear door safety locks prevent If the vehicle must be driven with
passengers from opening the rear the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
doors from inside the vehicle. . Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Trunk Lock Release If the vehicle is ever without power,

WARNING (Continued) the trunk area can still be accessed.
. Adjust the climate control Through the rear seat pass-through
system to a setting that door, if equipped:
brings in only outside air and 1. Fold the rear armrest down and
set the fan speed to the open the pass-through door. See
highest setting. See “Climate Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Control Systems” in the on page 3‑11.
Index.
2. Reach inward through the
. If the vehicle is equipped with opening to locate the emergency
a power liftgate, disable the trunk release handle. See
power liftgate function. “Emergency Trunk Release
See Engine Exhaust on Handle” following.
page 9‑24. To open the trunk, press | from 3. Pull the release handle toward
inside the vehicle or on the Remote the front of the vehicle to open
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the trunk.
or push the touch pad on the rear of By folding the rear seat, if equipped:
the trunk above the license plate.
1. Fold down the rear seatback.
With the keyless access system, See Rear Seats on page 3‑9.
if the vehicle is locked, the RKE
transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) 2. Reach inward through the
of the trunk for it to be recognized; opening to locate the emergency
then the trunk can be opened by the trunk release handle.
touch pad on the rear of the trunk 3. Pull the release handle toward
above the license plate. the front of the vehicle to open
the trunk.
Emergency Trunk Release The emergency trunk release Vehicle Security

Handle handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, This vehicle has theft-deterrent
enabling them to open the trunk features; however, they do not make
from the inside. the vehicle impossible to steal.
There is a glow-in-the-dark
emergency trunk release handle on Vehicle Alarm System
the trunk lid. This handle will glow This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
following exposure to light. Pull the system.
release handle to open the trunk
from the inside.
Notice: Do not use the

emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle. The indicator light, on the
instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status of
the system.
In addition to standard
theft-deterrent system capabilities,
this system may also have a power
sounder, and inclination sensor.
When equipped with the optional If a door, the hood, or trunk is If you set off the alarm by accident,
security package, the alarm can opened without first unlocking with turn off the alarm by pressing K on
also be triggered by a change in the transmitter, the turn signals will the transmitter, or start the vehicle
vehicle position, such as if the flash and the horn will sound for with a recognized transmitter in the
vehicle is lifted, or by an interruption about 30 seconds. The alarm vehicle. The alarm will not stop if
of the vehicle's power supply. The system will then re-arm to monitor you unlock the driver door with
power sounder has an internal for the next unauthorized event. the key.
battery. If the vehicle loses battery The theft-deterrent alarm system will
power when the theft-deterrent not activate if the doors are locked
How to Detect a Tamper
system is armed, the power sounder with the key. Condition
will activate automatically.
Disarming the System If K is pressed and the horn chirps
Arming the System three times, the alarm was activated
To disarm the system, either unlock while the system was armed.
1. Close all doors, the trunk, and the doors using the transmitter,
the hood. or start the vehicle with a If the alarm has been activated, a
2. Lock the vehicle using the recognized transmitter in the message will appear on the DIC.
transmitter or the power door vehicle. See Security Messages on
lock switch. The indicator light page 5‑41.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
on the instrument panel should accident:
come on and stay on for about Immobilizer
30 seconds. . Lock the vehicle with the
See Radio Frequency Statement on
transmitter after all occupants
3. After 30 seconds, or after Q is page 13‑21 for information
have left the vehicle and all
pressed again, the alarm system regarding Part 15 of the Federal
doors are closed.
will arm, and the indicator light Communications Commission (FCC)
will begin to slowly flash
. Always unlock a door with the rules and Industry Canada
indicating the alarm is operating. transmitter. Unlocking the driver Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
door with the key will not disarm
the alarm.
Immobilizer Operation The system has one or more RKE If the ignition modes will not change
transmitters matched to an with the other transmitter, your
This vehicle has a passive immobilizer control unit in the vehicle needs service. If the ignition
theft-deterrent system. vehicle. Only a correctly matched does change modes, the first
The system does not have to be RKE transmitter will start the transmitter may be faulty. See your
manually armed or disarmed. vehicle. If the transmitter is ever dealer who can service the
damaged, you may not be able to theft-deterrent system and have a
The vehicle is automatically start your vehicle. new RKE transmitter programmed to
immobilized when the vehicle is the vehicle.
turned off. When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when It is possible for the immobilizer
The immobilization system is the ignition is turned on. system to learn new or replacement
disarmed when the pushbutton start RKE transmitters. Up to eight
is activated to enter the ACC/ If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a transmitters can be programmed for
ACCESSORY mode or the ON/ the vehicle. To program additional
RUN/START mode and a valid problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again. transmitters, see “Programming
transmitter is present in the vehicle. Transmitters to the Vehicle” under
If the vehicle will not change Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, System Operation on page 2‑3.
ON/RUN/START, OFF), and the
RKE transmitter appears to be Do not leave the key or device that
undamaged, try another transmitter. disarms or deactivates the
Or, you may try placing the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
transmitter in the transmitter pocket
The security light, in the instrument located in the center console. See
cluster, comes on if there is a “NO REMOTE DETECTED” under
problem with arming or disarming Key and Lock Messages on
the theft-deterrent system. page 5‑36.
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors Exterior Automatic Dimming

Mirror
Convex Mirrors If equipped, there is a driver side
exterior automatic dimming mirror
that will automatically adjust for the
{ CAUTION glare of headlamps behind.
A convex mirror can make things, Memory Mirrors
like other vehicles, look farther
If equipped, there are exterior
away than they really are. If you
memory mirrors. See Memory Seats
cut too sharply into the right lane, on page 3‑6.
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
glance over your shoulder before If equipped, there is Side Blind Zone
changing lanes. Alert. See Side Blind Zone Alert
1. Move the selector switch to L
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the (SBZA) on page 9‑60.
The passenger side mirror is convex driver or passenger mirror. Turn Signal Indicator
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is 2. Press one of the four arrows to
curved so more can be seen from If equipped, there are turn signal
move the mirror. indicators on the mirror housings.
the driver seat.
3. Move the selector switch to ) to The indicator will flash when a turn
deselect the mirror. signal or the hazard warning
flashers are used.
Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows

Manual Folding Mirrors
The mirrors can be folded inward
Manual Rearview Mirror { WARNING
toward the vehicle to prevent To avoid the glare of the headlamps
Never leave a child, a helpless
damage when going through an from behind, push the tab forward
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
automatic car wash. Push the mirror for daytime and pull it rearward for
especially with the windows
outward to return it to the original nighttime use.
closed in warm or hot weather.
position. They can be overcome by the
Automatic Dimming extreme heat and suffer
Heated Mirrors Rearview Mirror permanent injuries or even death
= (Rear Window Defogger): If equipped, the automatic dimming from heat stroke.
Press to heat the mirrors. rearview mirror will automatically
See Dual Automatic Climate Control reduce the glare of the headlamps
System (Base) on page 8‑1 or Dual from behind. The dimming feature
Automatic Climate Control System comes on each time the vehicle is
(Uplevel) on page 8‑5. started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
The vehicle aerodynamics are Express-Down/Up Windows

designed to improve fuel economy
Windows with the express feature
performance. This may result in a
allow the windows to be raised and
pulsing sound when either rear
lowered all the way without holding
window is down and the front
the switch.
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window Press or pull the switch fully and
or the sunroof, if equipped. release it to activate the express
feature.
Power Windows The express mode can be canceled
by briefly pressing or pulling the
{ WARNING switch.
The power windows only operate Express Window Anti-Pinch
Children could be seriously with the ignition in ACC/
injured or killed if caught in the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
Feature
path of a closing window. Never or when Retained Accessory Power If any object is in the path of the
leave the Remote Keyless Entry (RAP) is active. See Retained window when the express-up is
(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with Accessory Power (RAP) on active, the window will stop at the
children. When there are children page 9‑21. obstruction and auto-reverse to a
in the rear seat, use the window The power window switches on the preset factory position. Weather
lockout switch to prevent driver door control all the windows. conditions such as severe icing
operation of the windows. See Each passenger door has a switch may also cause the window to
Keys on page 2‑2. that controls only that window. auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation after the
Press the switch to lower the obstruction or condition is removed.
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Programming the Power The window is now reprogrammed.
Override Windows Repeat the process for the other
windows.
If the vehicle battery has been
{ WARNING recharged or disconnected, or is not Window Lockout
working, the front power windows
If express override is activated, may need to be reprogrammed for
the window will not reverse the express-up feature to work.
automatically. You or others could Before reprogramming, replace or
be injured and the window could recharge the vehicle battery.
be damaged. Before you use
To program:
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are 1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
clear of the window path. ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active, close all doors.
The anti-pinch feature can be 2. Press down the power window
overridden when the ignition is in switch until the window is
ON/RUN/START. Hold the window fully open.
switch all the way up to the second 3. Pull the power window switch up This feature prevents the rear
position. The window will rise for as until the window is fully closed. passenger windows from operating,
long as the switch is held. Once the except from the driver position.
switch is released, the express 4. Continue holding the switch up
mode is reactivated. for approximately two seconds Press v { to activate the window
after the window is completely lockout. The indicator light in the
In this mode, the window can close closed. switch will illuminate when
on an object in its path. Use care activated.
when using the override mode.
The rear door safety locks are also Roof Open/Close: Press the rear or
disabled. See Safety Locks on front of the switch (1) to the first
page 2‑14. detent and hold to open or close the
Sunroof sunroof.
Press v { again to deactivate the
For vehicles equipped with a Express Open/Express Close:
lockout switch. sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/ Press the rear or front of the
If the indicator light flashes, the RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in switch (1) to the second detent and
feature may not be working properly. Retained Accessory Power (RAP), release to express open or express
to operate the sunroof. See Ignition close the sunroof.
Sun Visors Positions on page 9‑16 and
Vent Feature: Press the rear of the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Pull the visor toward you, or move it on page 9‑21. switch (2) and release to express
to the side to help reduce glare. open the vent. Press the front of the
To use the lighted mirror, lift the switch (2) and release to express
cover. close the vent.
Manually open the sunshade.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof when it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from
closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof then
retracts away from the object.
1. SLIDE Switch
2. TILT Switch
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Use During Adding Equipment to the

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31
Restraints Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-18 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Head Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Front Seats Airbag System Infants and Young
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-21 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-38
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-4 When Should an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-39
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 What Makes an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
How Does an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seat
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-47
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of the restraint is at the same
To lower the head restraint, press
the button located on the side of the
height as the top of the occupant's head restraint, push the head
{ WARNING head. This position reduces the restraint down, and release the
chance of a neck injury in a crash. button. Pull and push on the head
With head restraints that are not restraint after the button is released
installed and adjusted properly, Front Seats to make sure that it is locked in
there is a greater chance that The vehicle's front seats have place.
occupants will suffer a neck/ adjustable head restraints in the
spinal injury in a crash. Do not outboard seating positions.
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
The head restraints can be adjusted

forward or rearward. To adjust the
The height of the head restraint can head restraint forward, grasp the
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint head restraint and pull it forward to
up to raise it. Try to move the head the desired locking position. To
restraint to make sure that it is adjust the head restraint rearward,
locked in place. press the button located on the side
of the head restraint and move the Front Seats

head restraint rearward until the
desired locking position is reached.
Try to move the head restraint after Power Seat Adjustment
the button is released to make sure
that it is locked in place. { WARNING
The front seat outboard head You can lose control of the
restraints are not designed to be vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
removed.
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Rear Seats Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the To lower the head restraint, press
outboard seating positions. the button, located on the top of the
The height of the head restraint can seatback, and push the head
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint restraint down. Try to move the
up to raise it. Try to move the head head restraint after the button is
restraint to make sure that it is released to make sure that it is
locked in place. locked in place.
Rear outboard head restraints are
not designed to be removed.
To adjust the seat: Lumbar Adjustment Thigh Support

. Move the seat forward or Adjustment
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
. If available, raise or lower the
front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control
up or down.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
To adjust the lumbar support, see To adjust the lumbar and bolster
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑4. support: If available, adjust the manual leg
Some vehicles are equipped with a . Press and hold the control extension by pulling up on the lever,
feature that activates a vibrating forward or rearward to increase and then pulling or pushing on the
pulse alert in the driver seat to help or decrease lumbar support. support to lengthen or shorten it.
the driver avoid crashes. See Driver Release the lever to lock it in place.
. Press and hold the control up or
Assistance Systems on page 9‑50. down to increase or decrease
seatback bolster support,
if available.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries. Do not have a seatback reclined if
The lap belt could go up over the vehicle is moving.
To adjust the seatback: your abdomen. The belt forces
. Tilt the top of the control would be there, not at your pelvic
rearward to recline. bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise. For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Memory Seats 2. Press and hold SET and “1” at There is also the ability to press and
the same time until a beep release “1,” “2,” or B to manually
sounds. recall the previously stored memory
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a positions. The ignition must be
second driver using “2.” in ON/RUN/START, and the
transmission must be in P (Park)
To save positions to the B (Exit) (parking brake is set for a manual
button and Easy Exit features: transmission). Placing the ignition in
1. Adjust the driver seat and OFF before the stored positions are
outside mirrors to the desired reached stops the recall.
positions for getting out of the If something has blocked the driver
vehicle. seat while recalling a memory
position, the recall may stop.
2. Press and hold SET and B at
Remove the obstruction; then press
the same time until a beep and hold the appropriate manual
If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and sounds.
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door control for the memory item that is
are used to manually save and Manually Recalling Memory not recalling for two seconds. Try
recall memory settings for the driver Positions recalling the memory position again
seat and outside mirrors. by pressing the appropriate memory
Press and hold "1," "2," or B to button. If the memory position is still
Storing Memory Positions manually recall the previously not recalling, see your dealer for
To save positions to the “1” and “2” stored memory positions. service.
buttons: Releasing "1,” "2," or B before the
stored positions are reached stops
1. Adjust the driver seat and
the recall.
outside mirrors to the desired
driving positions.
Recalling RKE Memory Positions

. If the driver door is already Try recalling the memory position
(Auto Memory Recall) open, press K on the RKE again by opening the driver door
The Auto (Automatic) Memory transmitter to activate the recall. and pressing K on the RKE
Recall feature automatically recalls To activate the recall when On - At transmitter. If the memory position is
the current driver’s previously stored Ignition On is selected in the vehicle still not recalling, see your dealer for
“1” or “2” position when entering the personalization menu: service.
vehicle. Easy Exit Recall
. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/
Depending upon the Auto Memory START. If programmed on in the vehicle
Recall feature enabled in the vehicle personalization menu, the Easy Exit
See Vehicle Personalization on
personalization menu, memory “1” feature automatically moves the
page 5‑43.
or “2” positions are recalled in the driver seat and outside mirrors to
following ways: To stop recall movement, press one
the memory positions saved to the
of the memory, power mirror,
To activate the recall when On -
or power seat controls. If On - At
B (Exit) button. See “Storing
Driver Door Open is selected in the Memory Positions” listed previously.
Ignition On is selected in the vehicle
vehicle personalization menu: See also Vehicle Personalization on
personalization menu, placing the
page 5‑43.
. On vehicles with RKE, press K ignition in OFF also stops the recall.
on the RKE transmitter and open Easy Exit recall automatically
If something has blocked the driver
the door. activates when one of the following
seat while recalling a memory
occurs:
. On vehicles with keyless access, position, the recall may stop.
press the lock/unlock button on Remove the obstruction; then press . The vehicle is turned off and the
the outside driver door handle and hold the appropriate manual driver door is opened within a
and open the driver door. The control for the memory item that short time.
RKE transmitter must be present is not recalling for two seconds. . The vehicle is turned off with the
for the recall to activate. driver door open.
If something has blocked the driver Press M /J or L /z to heat the

seat while recalling the exit position, WARNING (Continued)
driver or passenger seat cushion
the recall may stop. Remove the and seatback.
obstruction; then press and hold the cause the seat heater to
appropriate manual control for the overheat. An overheated seat Press the button once for the
exit feature not recalling for heater may cause a burn or may highest setting. With each press of
two seconds. Try recalling the exit damage the seat. the button, the seat will change to
position again. If the exit position is the next lower setting, and then to
still not recalling, see your dealer for the off setting. The indicator lights
service. next to the buttons indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
Heated Front Seats lowest. If the heated seats are on
high, the level may automatically be
lowered after approximately
{ WARNING 30 minutes.
If you cannot feel temperature When this feature is off, the heated
change or pain to the skin, the seat symbol on the button is white.
seat heater may cause burns. To When the heated seat is turned on,
reduce the risk of burns, people the symbol turns red.
with such a condition should use The passenger seat may take
care when using the seat heater, Uplevel Buttons Shown, Base longer to heat up.
especially for long periods of Buttons Similar
time. Do not place anything on If available, the buttons are near the
the seat that insulates against climate controls on the center stack.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, To operate, the ignition must be in
cover, or similar item. This may ON/RUN/START.
(Continued)
Remote Start Heated Seats Rear Seats To fold the seatback:

When it is cold outside, the
heated seats can be turned on Folding the Seatback
automatically during a remote start. On some vehicles, either side of the
They are canceled when the ignition seatback can be folded for more
is turned on. Press the button to use cargo space. Fold a seatback only
the heated seats after the vehicle is when the vehicle is not moving.
started.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
The heated seat indicator lights do the safety belts still fastened may
not turn on during a remote start. cause damage to the seat or the
The temperature performance of an safety belts. Always unbuckle the
unoccupied seat may be reduced. safety belts and return them to
This is normal. their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
The heated seats will not turn on 1. Disconnect the rear safety belt
during a remote start unless they mini-latch using a key in the slot
are enabled in the vehicle on the mini-buckle, and let the
personalization menu. See Remote belt retract.
Vehicle Start on page 2‑9 and
page 5‑43.
Raising the Seatback To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up. Make sure
{ WARNING the center safety belt and latch
do not get trapped behind the
If either seatback is not locked, it seat. Push the seatback
could move forward in a sudden rearward to lock it in place.
stop or crash. That could cause
A red tab near the seatback
injury to the person sitting there.
lever retracts when the seatback
Always push and pull on the
is locked in place.
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked. 2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
2. Pull the lever on top of the into position.
seatback toward you to unlock 3. Reconnect the center safety belt
the seatback. { WARNING mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do
A red tab near the seatback A safety belt that is improperly not let the belt twist.
lever raises when the seatback routed, not properly attached, 4. Pull on the center safety belt to
is unlocked. or twisted will not provide the make sure the mini-latch is
3. Fold the seatback forward. protection needed in a crash. The secure.
person wearing the belt could be 5. Repeat the steps to raise the
Repeat Steps 2–3 to fold the
seriously injured. After raising the other seatback, if necessary.
other seatback, if desired.
rear seatback, always check to be
When the seat is not in use, it
sure that the safety belts are
should be kept in the upright, locked
properly routed and attached, and
position.
are not twisted.
Rear Seat Safety Belts WARNING (Continued)

Pass-Through Door This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
Do not let anyone ride where a passengers to ride in any area of
safety belt cannot be worn the vehicle that is not equipped
properly. In a crash, if you or your with seats and safety belts.
passenger(s) are not wearing Always wear a safety belt, and
safety belts, injuries can be much check that all passenger(s) are
worse than if you are wearing restrained properly too.
safety belts. You can be seriously
Some vehicles have a rear seat injured or killed by hitting things
pass-through door in the center of inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a
the rear seatback. Fold down the being ejected from the vehicle. In reminder to buckle the safety belts.
center armrest and pull the latch to addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
open the door. page 5‑13.
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3‑33 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 3‑35.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
There are important things to know would apply force on your Lap-Shoulder Belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest. If you are using a rear center
These parts of the body are best seating position with a detachable
able to take belt restraining safety belt and the safety belt is not
forces. The shoulder belt locks if attached, see “Folding the
there is a sudden stop or crash. Seatback” under Rear Seats on
page 3‑9 for instructions on
reconnecting the safety belt to the
{ WARNING mini-buckle.
You can be seriously injured, The following instructions explain
or even killed, by not wearing how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
your safety belt properly. properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front
. Never allow the lap or 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
of you. shoulder belt to become adjustable, so you can sit up
loose or twisted. straight. To see how, see “Seats”
. Always use the correct buckle in the Index.
for your seating position.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
. Never route the lap or
this applies force to the strong shoulder belt over an
pelvic bones and you would be armrest.
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. To make the lap part tight, pull
the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks. up on the shoulder belt.
get twisted. Pull up on the latch plate to It may be necessary to pull
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt stitching on the safety belt
you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety through the latch plate to fully
quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3‑17. tighten the lap belt on smaller
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on occupants.
Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt
more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if
If the shoulder portion of a necessary.
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
They can help tighten the safety properly adjusted, the comfort guide
belts during the early stages of a positions the belt away from the
moderate to severe frontal, near neck and head.
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold There is one guide for each outside
conditions for pretensioner passenger position in the rear seat.
activation are met. And, on vehicles To install a comfort guide to the
with side impact and roof-rail safety belt:
airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
To unlatch the belt, push the button the pretensioners and possibly other
on the buckle. The belt should parts of the safety belt system will
return to its stowed position. need to be replaced. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts after a
Before a door is closed, be sure the Crash on page 3‑18.
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety Rear Safety Belt Comfort
belt, damage can occur to both the Guides
safety belt and the vehicle.
This vehicle may have rear safety 1. Remove the guide from its
Safety Belt Pretensioners belt comfort guides. If not, they are storage pocket on the side of
available through your dealer. The the seat.
This vehicle has safety belt
guides may provide added safety
pretensioners for front outboard
belt comfort for older children who
occupants. Although the safety belt
have outgrown booster seats and
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
for some adults. When installed and
are part of the safety belt assembly.
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release
protection needed in a crash. The the safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort Safety Belt Extender

guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
be removed from the guide. Store around you, you should use it.
the guide in its storage pocket on But if a safety belt is not long
the side of the seatback. enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
Safety Belt Use During order it, take the heaviest coat you
Pregnancy will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
Safety belts work for everyone, personal injury, do not let someone
including pregnant women. Like all else use it, and use it only for the
occupants, they are more likely to seat it is made to fit. The extender
be seriously injured if they do not A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
wear safety belts. use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
throughout the pregnancy. belt. See the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt

Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a
belt reminder light, safety belts, Crash
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
{ WARNING
Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
{ WARNING
damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety
that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle.
from doing its job. See your dealer provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the
safety belts may not protect you in a soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or serious injury or even death in a
frayed, get a new one right away. crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
Make sure the safety belt reminder properly after a crash, have them
light is working. See Safety Belt inspected and any necessary
Reminders on page 5‑13. replacements made as soon as
Keep safety belts clean and dry. possible.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑18.
After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System The vehicle may have the following
safety belts may not be necessary. airbags:
But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following . Seat-mounted side impact
were used during any crash may airbags:
airbags for the second row
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver. outboard passengers.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the front All vehicle airbags have the word
replaced. outboard passenger. AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
. A knee airbag for the driver. near the deployment opening.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt . A knee airbag for the front For frontal airbags, the word
system was not being used at the outboard passenger. AIRBAG is on the center of the
time of the crash. steering wheel for the driver and on
. A seat-mounted side impact the instrument panel for the front
Have the safety belt pretensioners airbag for the driver. outboard passenger.
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
. A seat-mounted side impact For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
stays on after you start the vehicle airbag for the front outboard is on the lower part of the
or while you are driving. See Airbag passenger. instrument panel.
Readiness Light on page 5‑14. . A roof-rail airbag for the driver For seat-mounted side impact
and the passenger seated airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
directly behind the driver. side of the seatback closest to
. A roof-rail airbag for the front the door.
outboard passenger and the For roof-rail airbags, the word
passenger seated directly AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
behind the front outboard
passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement

the protection provided by safety WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce Wearing your safety belt during a you in position before and during
the risk of injury from the force of an crash helps reduce the chance of a crash. Always wear a safety
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate hitting things inside the vehicle or belt, even with airbags. The driver
very quickly to do their job. being ejected from it. Airbags are should sit as far back as possible
“supplemental restraints” to the while still maintaining control of
Here are the most important things safety belts. Everyone in the the vehicle.
to know about the airbag system:
vehicle should wear a safety belt Occupants should not lean on or
properly, whether or not there is
{ WARNING an airbag for that person.
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
You can be severely injured or seat-mounted side impact airbags
killed in a crash if you are not and/or roof-rail airbags.
wearing your safety belt, even { WARNING
with airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety Because airbags inflate with great
belts, not replace them. Also, force and faster than the blink of { WARNING
airbags are not designed to inflate an eye, anyone who is up Children who are up against,
in every crash. In some crashes against, or very close to any or very close to, any airbag
safety belts are the only restraint. airbag when it inflates can be when it inflates can be seriously
See When Should an Airbag seriously injured or killed. Do not injured or killed. Airbags plus
Inflate? on page 3‑23. sit unnecessarily close to any lap-shoulder belts offer protection
(Continued) airbag, as you would be if sitting for adults and older children, but
on the edge of the seat or leaning not for young children and infants.
forward. Safety belts help keep
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
There is an airbag readiness light
protection that a child restraint
on the instrument cluster, which
system can provide. Always
shows the airbag symbol. The
secure children properly in the system checks the airbag electrical
vehicle. To read how, see Older system for malfunctions. The light
Children on page 3‑33 or Infants tells you if there is an electrical
and Young Children on problem. See Airbag Readiness
page 3‑35. Light on page 5‑14.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar Passenger Side Similar
passenger knee airbag is below the
glove box. The seat-mounted side impact On vehicles with second row
airbags for the driver and front seat-mounted side impact airbags,
outboard passenger are in the side they are in the sides of the rear
of the seatbacks closest to the door. seatback closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at

{ WARNING Inflate? different crash speeds depending on
whether the vehicle hits an object
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to straight on or at an angle, and
occupant and an airbag, the inflate in moderate to severe frontal whether the object is fixed or
airbag might not inflate properly or near frontal crashes to help moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
or it might force the object into reduce the potential for severe or wide.
that person causing severe injury injuries, mainly to the driver's or
or even death. The path of an Thresholds can also vary with
front outboard passenger's head specific vehicle design.
inflating airbag must be kept and chest. However, they are only
clear. Do not put anything designed to inflate if the impact Frontal airbags are not intended to
between an occupant and an exceeds a predetermined inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
airbag, and do not attach or put deployment threshold. Deployment rear impacts, or in many side
anything on the steering wheel thresholds are used to predict how impacts.
hub or on or near any other severe a crash is likely to be in time In addition, the vehicle has
airbag covering. for the airbags to inflate and help dual-stage frontal airbags.
restrain the occupants. Dual-stage airbags adjust the
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or restraint according to crash severity.
seat-mounted side impact airbag. should inflate is not based primarily Frontal knee airbags are designed
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. to inflate in moderate to severe
Never secure anything to the roof It depends on what is hit, the frontal or near frontal impacts that
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags direction of the impact, and how exceed a predetermined
by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly the vehicle slows down. deployment threshold.
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
The vehicle has electronic frontal the system's designed threshold What Makes an Airbag
sensors, which help the sensing level. The threshold level can vary
system distinguish between a with specific vehicle design.
Inflate?
moderate frontal impact and a more Seat-mounted side impact airbags In a deployment event, the sensing
severe frontal impact. For moderate are not intended to inflate in frontal system sends an electrical signal
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags impacts, near frontal impacts, triggering a release of gas from the
inflate at a level less than full rollovers, or rear impacts. inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
deployment. For more severe frontal airbag causing the bag to break out
impacts, full deployment occurs. Roof-rail airbags are not intended of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
to inflate in rear impacts. and related hardware are all part of
The passenger seat position sensor A seat-mounted side impact airbag
and the passenger safety belt the airbag module.
is intended to inflate on the side of
buckle provide information that is the vehicle that is struck. Both For airbag location, see Where Are
used to determine if the passenger roof-rail airbags will inflate when the Airbags? on page 3‑21.
knee airbag should deploy. either side of the vehicle is struck or
The vehicle has seat-mounted side if the sensing system predicts that How Does an Airbag
impact airbags and roof-rail airbags. the vehicle is about to roll over on Restrain?
See Airbag System on page 3‑19. its side, or in a severe frontal
Seat-mounted side impact and impact. In moderate to severe frontal or
roof-rail airbags are intended to near frontal collisions, even belted
In any particular crash, no one can occupants can contact the steering
inflate in moderate to severe side say whether an airbag should have
crashes depending on the location wheel or the instrument panel. In
inflated simply because of the moderate to severe side collisions,
of the impact. In addition, these vehicle damage or repair costs.
roof-rail airbags are intended to even belted occupants can contact
inflate during a rollover or in a the inside of the vehicle.
severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after

provided by safety belts by
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING
distributing the force of the
impact more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there
occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags for people with a history of
are designed to help contain the quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble.
head and chest of occupants in the To avoid this, everyone in the
outboard seating positions in the Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as
first and second rows. The rollover
they inflate. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot
full or partial ejection in rollover several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an
events, although no system can airbags, see Where Are the airbag inflates, then get fresh air
prevent all such ejections. Airbags? on page 3‑21. by opening a window or a door.
The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing
But airbags would not help in many problems following an airbag
types of collisions, primarily into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek
because the occupant's motion is
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention.
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on from the vents in the deflated
page 3‑23. airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn
Airbags should never be regarded the windshield or being able to steer
as anything more than a supplement on the interior lamps and hazard
the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the
to safety belts. people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, and turn off In many crashes severe enough to
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
the interior lamps and hazard inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which
warning flashers by using the broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
controls for those features. Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data
also occur from the front outboard Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑19 and Event Data
{ WARNING passenger airbag.
Recorders on page 13‑19.
. Airbags are designed to inflate
A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some new work on the airbag systems.
damaged important functions in parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work
system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer for
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another service.
appears to be drivable after a crash. A new system will include
moderate crash, there may be airbag modules and possibly
concealed damage that could other parts. The service manual
make it difficult to safely operate for the vehicle covers the need
the vehicle. to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Passenger Sensing The words ON and OFF, or the According to accident statistics,
symbol for on and off, will be visible children are safer when properly
System during the system check. When the secured in a rear seat in a correct
The vehicle has a passenger system check is complete, either the child restraint for their weight
sensing system for the front word ON or OFF, or the symbol for and size.
outboard passenger position. The on and off, will be visible. See We recommend that children be
passenger airbag status indicator Passenger Airbag Status Indicator secured in a rear seat, including: an
will light on the overhead console on page 5‑14. infant or a child riding in a
when the vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system rear-facing child restraint; a child
turns off the front outboard riding in a forward-facing child seat;
passenger frontal airbag and knee an older child riding in a booster
airbag, under certain conditions. No seat; and children, who are large
other airbag is affected by the enough, using safety belts.
passenger sensing system. Never put a rear-facing child seat in
The passenger sensing system the front. This is because the risk to
United States works with sensors that are part of the rear-facing child is so great,
the front outboard passenger seat. if the airbag inflates.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag should be allowed
to inflate or not.
Canada and Mexico

. There is a critical problem with
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints When the passenger sensing
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the system has turned off the front
or killed if the passenger frontal airbag(s) are off. If you secure a outboard passenger frontal airbag
airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in and knee airbag, the off indicator
the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger will light and stay lit to remind you
restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far that the airbags are off. See
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a on page 5‑14.
be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat.
passenger frontal airbag inflates The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on the front
and the passenger seat is in a
The passenger sensing system is outboard passenger frontal airbag
forward position.
designed to turn off the front and knee airbag anytime the system
Even if the passenger sensing outboard passenger airbag and senses that a person of adult size is
system has turned off the front knee airbag if: sitting properly in the front outboard
outboard passenger airbag(s), no passenger seat.
system is fail-safe. No one can
. The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied. When the passenger sensing
guarantee that an airbag will not system has allowed the airbags to
inflate under some unusual . The system determines that an be enabled, the on indicator will light
circumstance, even though the infant is present in a child and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbag(s) are off. restraint. airbags are active.
(Continued) . A front outboard passenger
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
For some children, including If the On Indicator Is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
off the front outboard passenger and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback
frontal airbag and knee airbag, 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion,
depending upon the person’s if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from
seating posture and body build. the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle.
Everyone in the vehicle who pushing the child restraint into
has outgrown child restraints 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion.
should wear a safety belt from the seat such as blankets,
Also make sure the child
properly — whether or not there is cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under the
an airbag for that person. heaters, or seat massagers.
vehicle head restraint. If this
4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head
{ WARNING following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints
provided by the child restraint on page 3‑2.
If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
comes on and stays on, it means 6. Restart the vehicle.
Securing Child Restraints (Front
that something may be wrong Passenger Seat) on page 3‑47 The passenger sensing system
with the airbag system. To help or Securing Child Restraints may or may not turn off the
avoid injury to yourself or others, (Rear Seat) on page 3‑50. airbags for a child in a child
have the vehicle serviced right restraint depending upon the
away. See Airbag Readiness child's seating posture and body
Light on page 5‑14 for more build. It is better to secure a
information, including important child restraint in a rear seat.
safety information.
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material in the Index for additional
Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets, information about the importance of
cushions, seat covers, seat proper restraint use.
heaters, seat massagers, a A thick layer of additional material,
laptop, or other electronic such as a blanket or cushion,
devices. or aftermarket equipment such as
3. Place the seatback in the fully seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
upright position. massagers can affect how well
4. Have the person sit upright in the passenger sensing system
the seat, centered on the seat operates. We recommend that you
cushion, with legs comfortably not use seat covers or other
extended. aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
5. Restart the vehicle and have the vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
person remain in this position for the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
two to three minutes after the on page 3‑31 for more information
If a person of adult size is sitting in
indicator is lit. about modifications that can affect
the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be how the system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting
because that person is not sitting System Operation A wet seat can affect the
properly in the seat. Use the performance of the passenger
following steps to allow the system Safety belts help keep the sensing system. Here is how:
to detect that person and enable the passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and . The passenger sensing system
front outboard passenger frontal
braking, which helps the passenger may turn off the passenger
airbag and knee airbag:
sensing system maintain the frontal airbag and passenger
1. Turn the vehicle off. passenger airbag status. See knee airbag when liquid is
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” soaked into the seat. If this
happens, the off indicator will be
lit, and the airbag readiness light an unoccupied seat. If this is not
on the instrument cluster will desired, remove the object from { WARNING
also be lit. the seat.
For up to 10 seconds after the
. Liquid pooled on the seat that vehicle is turned off and the
has not soaked in may make it { WARNING battery is disconnected, an airbag
more likely that the passenger can still inflate during improper
sensing system will turn on the Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the service. You can be injured if you
passenger frontal airbag and are close to an airbag when it
passenger knee airbag while a passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
child restraint or child occupant
proper operation of the passenger They are probably part of the
is on the seat. If the passenger
frontal airbag and passenger sensing system. airbag system. Be sure to follow
knee airbag are turned on, the proper service procedures, and
on indicator will be lit. make sure the person performing
Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
readiness light is lit, do not install a Airbags affect how the vehicle Adding Equipment to the
child restraint or allow anyone to should be serviced. There are parts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
occupy the seat. See Airbag of the airbag system in several
Readiness Light on page 5‑14 for places around the vehicle. Your Adding accessories that change the
important safety information. dealer and the service manual have vehicle's frame, bumper system,
information about servicing the height, front end, or side sheet
The on indicator may be lit if an metal, may keep the airbag
object, such as a briefcase, vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see system from working properly.
handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
or other electronic device, is put on Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑17.
The operation of the airbag system or device, installed under or on Airbag System Check
can also be affected by changing or top of the seat fabric, could also
moving any parts of the front seats, interfere with the operation of the The airbag system does not need
safety belts, the airbag sensing and passenger sensing system. This regularly scheduled maintenance or
diagnostic module, steering wheel, could either prevent proper replacement. Make sure the airbag
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag deployment of the passenger readiness light is working. See
modules, ceiling headliner or pillar airbag(s) or prevent the passenger Airbag Readiness Light on
garnish trim, overhead console, sensing system from properly page 5‑14.
front sensors, side impact sensors, turning off the passenger airbag(s). Notice: If an airbag covering is
or airbag wiring. See Passenger Sensing System on damaged, opened, or broken, the
Your dealer and the service manual page 3‑27. airbag may not work properly. Do
have information about the location The vehicle has rollover roof-rail not open or break the airbag
of the airbag sensors, sensing and airbags, see Different Size Tires coverings. If there are any
diagnostic module, and airbag and Wheels on page 10‑61. opened or broken airbag covers,
wiring. have the airbag covering and/or
If your vehicle needs to be modified airbag module replaced. For the
In addition, the vehicle has a because you have a disability and location of the airbags, see
passenger sensing system for the you have questions about whether Where Are the Airbags? on
front outboard passenger position, the modifications will affect the page 3‑21. See your dealer for
which includes sensors that are vehicle's airbag system, or if you service.
part of the passenger seat. The have questions about whether the
passenger sensing system may not airbag system will be affected if the
operate properly if the original seat vehicle is modified for any other
trim is replaced with non-GM reason, call Customer Assistance.
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with See Customer Assistance Offices
GM covers, upholstery, or trim (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
designed for a different vehicle. Any Customer Assistance Offices
object, such as an aftermarket seat (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
not work properly and may
page 5‑14.
not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
The manufacturer instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics,
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the children and infants are safer when
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, properly restrained in a child
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. restraint system or infant restraint
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to system secured in a rear seating
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts? position.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a In a crash, children who are not
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the buckled up can strike other people
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder who are buckled up, or can be
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or children need to use safety belts
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit properly.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs. { WARNING
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash. Never allow more than one child
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the to wear the same safety belt. The
page 3‑13. If the shoulder belt abdomen, which could cause safety belt cannot properly spread
still does not rest on the severe or even fatal internal the impact forces. In a crash, they
shoulder, then return to the injuries in a crash. can be crushed together and
booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort seriously injured. A safety belt
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on must be used by only one person
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑13. at a time.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
WARNING (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants
That could cause serious or fatal and all other children. Neither the
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
{ WARNING restrained while in a vehicle.
Never allow a child to wear the

safety belt with the shoulder belt
{ WARNING
behind their back. A child can be Children can be seriously injured
seriously injured by not wearing or strangled if a shoulder belt is
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a wrapped around their neck and
crash, the child would not be the safety belt continues to
restrained by the shoulder belt. tighten. Never leave children
The child could move too far unattended in a vehicle and never
forward increasing the chance of allow children to play with the
head and neck injury. The child safety belts.
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer

protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's person's arms. An infant should child restraint in the right front
safety belt system nor its airbag be secured in an appropriate seat. Secure a rear-facing child
system is designed for them. Every restraint. restraint in a rear seat. It is also
time infants and young children ride better to secure a forward-facing
in vehicles, they should have the child restraint in a rear seat. If you
protection provided by appropriate must secure a forward-facing
child restraints. child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people, passenger seat as far back as it
or can be thrown out of the vehicle. will go.
{ WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
{ WARNING
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) Children who are up against,
infant will suddenly become a or very close to, any airbag when
110 kg (240 lb) force on a it inflates can be seriously injured
(Continued) or killed. Never put a rear-facing
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of The restraint manufacturer

add-on child restraints? instructions that come with the { WARNING
A: Add-on child restraints, which restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
are purchased by the vehicle so small that the vehicle's regular
owner, are available in four basic child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
types. Selection of a particular the hip bones, as it should.
restraint should take into available for children with
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash,
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will { WARNING the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
For most basic types of child injuries. To reduce the risk of
need complete support. In a
restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, if an infant is in a
different models available. When
rear-facing child restraint, the crash, young children should
purchasing a child restraint, be
crash forces can be distributed always be secured in appropriate
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the across the strongest part of an child restraints.
restraint will have a label saying infant's body, the back and
that it meets federal motor shoulders. Infants should always
vehicle safety standards. be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child
against the back of the infant. to see out the window.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office.
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement { WARNING
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure restraint. Secure the child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint.
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States Where to Put the
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child Restraint
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians According to accident statistics,
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41. use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety position.
We recommend that children and When securing a child restraint in a

child restraints be secured in a rear WARNING (Continued) rear seating position, study the
seat, including: an infant or a child instructions that came with the
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; passenger airbag inflates and the child restraint to make sure it is
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger seat is in a forward compatible with this vehicle.
child seat; an older child riding in a position.
Child restraints and booster seats
booster seat; and children, who are Even if the passenger sensing vary considerably in size, and some
large enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right may fit in certain seating positions
Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no better than others. Always make
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can sure the child restraint is properly
the rear-facing child is so great if the guarantee that an airbag will not secured.
airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual Depending on where you place the
circumstance, even though it is child restraint and the size of the
{ WARNING turned off. child restraint, you may not be able
Secure rear-facing child restraints to access adjacent safety belt
A child in a rear-facing child assemblies or LATCH anchors for
in a rear seat, even if the
restraint can be seriously additional passengers or child
airbag is off. If you secure a
injured or killed if the right front restraints. Adjacent seating
forward-facing child restraint in
passenger airbag inflates. This positions should not be used if the
the right front seat, always move
is because the back of the child restraint prevents access to or
the front passenger seat as far
rear-facing child restraint would interferes with the routing of the
back as it will go. It is better to
be very close to the inflating safety belt.
secure the child restraint in a
airbag. A child in a forward-facing Wherever a child restraint is
rear seat.
child restraint can be seriously installed, be sure to secure the child
injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System restraint properly.
(Continued) on page 3‑27 for additional
information.
Keep in mind that an unsecured When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors
child restraint can move around in a a top tether, you must also use
collision or sudden stop and injure either the lower anchors or the
people in the vehicle. Be sure to safety belts to properly secure the
properly secure any child restraint in child restraint. A child restraint must
the vehicle — even when no child is never be installed using only the top
in it. tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
Lower Anchors and in your vehicle, you need a child
Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH
(LATCH System) attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
The LATCH system secures a child instructions on how to use the child
restraint during driving or in a crash. restraint and its attachments. The
LATCH attachments on the child following explains how to attach Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
restraint are used to attach the child a child restraint with these built into the vehicle. There are
restraint to the anchors in the attachments in your vehicle. two lower anchors for each
vehicle. This system is designed to LATCH seating position that will
make installation of a child restraint Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors accommodate a child restraint with
easier. lower attachments (2).
and attachments or top tether
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible anchors and attachments.
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether
a single tether (3) or a dual Anchor Locations
tether (4). Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for your child
Rear Seat
the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
A top tether anchor is built into I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
the vehicle. The top tether positions with top tether anchors.
attachment (2) on the child restraint H (Lower Anchor): Seating
connects to the top tether anchor in positions with two lower anchors.
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
The outboard lower anchors are The top tether anchors are behind
behind the vertical openings in the the rear seat, on the filler panel.
seat trim. Open the covers to access the
anchors. Be sure to use an anchor
on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child
To assist in locating the top tether restraint will be placed.
anchors, the top tether anchor Do not secure a child restraint in a
symbol is on the cover. position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
system secured in a rear seating restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the
position. See Where to Put the Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
Restraint on page 3‑39 for restraint to a single anchor could
additional information. cause the anchor or attachment Notice: Do not let the LATCH
to come loose or even break attachments rub against the
Securing a Child Restraint during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may
Designed for the LATCH could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary,
System risk of serious or fatal injuries move buckled safety belts to
during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH
{ WARNING child restraint per anchor. attachments.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is Do not fold the empty rear seat
not attached to anchors, the child with a safety belt buckled. This
restraint will not be able to protect { WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
the child correctly. In a crash, the
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position,
child could be seriously injured or
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat.
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
wrapped around their neck and If you need to secure more than one
restraint properly using the
the safety belt continues to child restraint in the rear seat, see
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
tighten. Buckle any unused safety Where to Put the Restraint on
belts to secure the restraint,
belts behind the child restraint so page 3‑39.
following the instructions that
children cannot reach them. Pull
came with the child restraint and
the shoulder belt all the way out
the instructions in this manual.
(Continued)
This system is designed to make 1.2. Put the child restraint on 2.3. Route, attach, and tighten
the installation of child restraints the seat. the top tether according to
easier. When using lower anchors, 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower your child restraint
do not use the vehicle's safety belts. attachments on the child instructions and the
Instead, use the vehicle's anchors restraint to the lower following instructions:
and child restraint attachments to anchors.
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
anchor to secure a top tether. recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
1. Attach and tighten the lower the top tether to the top tether
attachments to the lower anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
anchors. If the child restraint child restraint instructions and
does not have lower the following steps:
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
lower anchors, secure the child If the position you are using
2.2. Open the top tether anchor
restraint with the top tether and does not have a headrest
cover to expose the anchor.
the safety belts. Refer to your or head restraint and you
child restraint manufacturer are using a single tether,
instructions and the instructions route the tether over the
in this manual. seatback.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
If the position you are using If the position you are using If the position you are using
does not have a headrest has an adjustable headrest has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether, are using a single tether, are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the raise the headrest or head raise the headrest or head
seatback. restraint and route the restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or tether under the headrest or
head restraint and in head restraint and around
between the headrest or the headrest or head
head restraint posts. restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Front Passenger Seat)
{ WARNING
This vehicle has airbags. A rear A child in a rear-facing child
{ WARNING seat is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the passenger frontal
forward-facing child restraint. See
A crash can damage the LATCH Where to Put the Restraint on airbag inflates. This is because
system in the vehicle. A damaged page 3‑39. the back of the rear-facing child
LATCH system may not properly restraint would be very close to
secure the child restraint, In addition, the vehicle has a the inflating airbag. A child in a
resulting in serious injury or even passenger sensing system which is
forward-facing child restraint can
designed to turn off the front
death in a crash. To help make be seriously injured or killed if the
outboard passenger frontal airbag
sure the LATCH system is passenger frontal airbag inflates
and knee airbag under certain
working properly after a crash, conditions. See Passenger Sensing and the passenger seat is in a
see your dealer to have the System on page 3‑27 and forward position.
system inspected and any Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Even if the passenger sensing
necessary replacements made as on page 5‑14. system has turned off the front
soon as possible.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in outboard passenger airbag(s), no
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can
If the vehicle has the LATCH system the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not
and it was being used during a if the airbag deploys. inflate under some unusual
crash, new LATCH system parts circumstance, even though the
may be needed. airbag(s) are off.
New parts and repairs may be (Continued)
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
the instructions that come with the 2. Put the child restraint on
WARNING (Continued) child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the In Canada, the law requires that the lap and shoulder portions of
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraints have the vehicle's safety belt through
forward-facing child restraint in a top tether, and that the tether be or around the restraint. The child
the front outboard passenger attached. restraint instructions will show
seat, always move the seat as far You will be using the lap-shoulder you how.
back as it will go. It is better to belt to secure the child restraint in
secure the child restraint in a this position. Follow the instructions
rear seat. that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat rearward as far
If the child restraint has the LATCH back as it will go and raise the
system, see Lower Anchors and seat upward as far up as it
Tethers for Children (LATCH will go, before securing the
System) on page 3‑41 for how and forward-facing child restraint.
where to install the child restraint When the passenger sensing
using LATCH. If a child restraint is system has turned off the front
secured using a safety belt and it outboard passenger frontal
uses a top tether, see Lower airbag and knee airbag, the off
Anchors and Tethers for Children indicator on the passenger 4. Push the latch plate into the
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for airbag status indicator should buckle until it clicks.
top tether anchor locations. light and stay lit when you start
the vehicle. See Passenger Position the release button on
Do not secure a child seat in a
Airbag Status Indicator on the buckle so that the safety belt
position without a top tether anchor
page 5‑14. could be quickly unbuckled if
if a national or local law requires
necessary.
that the top tether be anchored, or if

safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint ” under Passenger
a forward-facing child restraint, it Sensing System on page 3‑27.
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child To remove the child restraint,
restraint as you tighten the belt. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the the LATCH system, you will be
child restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position.
If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions
system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint.
Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint
System) on page 3‑41 for how and when and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks. If the latch
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put plate will not go fully into the
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑39. buckle, check if the correct
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for buckle is being used.
Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
the seat. Position the release button on
page 3‑41 for top tether anchor
the buckle so that the safety belt
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run could be quickly unbuckled if
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of necessary.
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle safety belt through or
if a national or local law requires around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑41 for more
information.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
If equipped, there may also be
storage behind the climate control
system. Touch the bottom of the
climate control system panel until
the door automatically starts to
open. The storage area may contain
To access, push on the cover and a USB port, SD card reader and
release. There is an accessory auxiliary jack. See USB Port on
power outlet inside. See Power page 7‑16, SD Card Reader on
Outlets on page 5‑7. page 7‑19, and Auxiliary Jack on
page 7‑20 for the base model radio
and the infotainment manual for the
uplevel model radio.
4-2 Storage
Keep the storage area closed when Armrest Storage

not in use.
Touch the bottom of the climate
control system panel again until the
door automatically starts to close.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the
lever. Use the key to lock and
unlock it. The glove box may have a
compact disc player inside.
Rear Armrest
Front Armrest Pull the armrest down and lift the
cover to access the storage area.
Push the button and lift to access
the storage area. The storage area
may contain a USB port, SD card
reader and auxiliary jack. See USB
Port on page 7‑16, SD Card Reader
on page 7‑19, and Auxiliary Jack on
page 7‑20 for the base model radio
and the infotainment manual for the
uplevel model radio.
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

roof rack that weighs more than
Features 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
Cargo Tie-Downs If something is carried on top of
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
than the roof rack — like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle To prevent damage or loss of cargo
is being driven. The item being when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
carried could be violently torn off,
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
and this could cause a collision
rack will make the vehicle’s center
and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
than the roof rack on top of the braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
The cargo tie-downs can be used to
For vehicles with a roof rack, the occasionally stop the vehicle to
secure small loads inside the trunk.
rack can be used to load items. For make sure the cargo remains in its
roof racks that do not have place. Do not exceed the maximum
crossrails included, GM Certified vehicle capacity when loading the
crossrails can be purchased as an vehicle.
accessory. See your dealer for See Vehicle Load Limits on
additional information. page 9‑11.
4-4 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14

Passenger Airbag Status
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Information Displays
Controls Driver Information
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-29
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3 Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Service Electric Parking Brake Vehicle Messages
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Battery Voltage and Charging
Clock (Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Clock (Uplevel Radio) . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Lane Departure Warning Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 (LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-20 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Indicators StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-21 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Coolant Temperature Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-23 Object Detection System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Engine Coolant Temperature High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Ride Control System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-41 Controls 4. Pull the lever up to lock the
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 steering wheel in place.
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-41
Starting the Vehicle Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Adjustment
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-42 Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-43
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-43
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-43
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
To adjust the steering wheel:
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
1. Pull the lever down. For vehicles with audio steering
2. Move the steering wheel up wheel controls, some audio controls
or down. can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
g (Push to Talk): Press to talk or S or T (Previous or Next): Press Heated Steering Wheel
interact with OnStar® and the five-way control to the left or
Bluetooth®. See OnStar Overview right to go to the previous or next
on page 14‑1 and Bluetooth area in the display or to the previous
(Infotainment Controls) on or next menu.
page 7‑23 or Bluetooth (Voice y or z (Next or Previous):
Recognition) on page 7‑27 or Press the five-way control up or
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑21. down to go up or down in a list.
c (End Call): Press to decline an Press to go up or down a page.
incoming call, or end a current call. SEL (Select): Press to select a
Press to mute or unmute the highlighted menu option.
infotainment system.
C or B (Next or Previous ( (Heated Steering Wheel): Press
Favorite): Press to go to the next to turn the heated steering wheel on
or previous favorite when listening or off. A light on the button displays
to the radio. Press to go to the next when the feature is turned on.
or previous track when listening to a The steering wheel takes about
media source. three minutes to be fully heated.
x + or x − (Volume): Press to
increase or decrease the volume.
Horn Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while the
Press a on the steering wheel pad
wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they
to sound the horn. will immediately stop.
Windshield Wiper/Washer If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move
the wipers will restart and move to
the lever up to INT for intermittent
the base of the windshield.
wipes, then turn the x INT band
up for more frequent wipes or down If the ignition is put in OFF while the
for less frequent wipes. wipers are performing wipes due to
windshield washing, the wipers
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. continue to run until they reach the
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly base of the windshield.
move the windshield wiper lever to move the wiper lever down. For Rainsense™
select the wiper speed. several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down. For vehicles with Rainsense, a
HI: Use for fast wipes. sensor near the top center of the
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
LO: Use for slow wipes. windshield detects the amount of
blades and windshield before using
water on the windshield and
them. If frozen to the windshield,
controls the frequency of the
carefully loosen or thaw them.
windshield wiper.
Damaged blades should be
replaced. See Wiper Blade Keep this area of the windshield
Replacement on page 10‑30. clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor.
INT (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity With Rainsense, if the transmission

Control): Move the windshield is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle { WARNING
wiper lever to INT. Turn the x INT speed is very slow, the wipers will
automatically stop at the base of the In freezing weather, do not use
band on the wiper lever to adjust the the washer until the windshield is
sensitivity. windshield.
warmed. Otherwise the washer
The wiper operations return to fluid can form ice on the
normal when the transmission is no windshield, blocking your vision.
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle
speed has increased.
n L (Windshield Washer): Pull Compass
the windshield wiper lever toward The vehicle may have a compass
you to spray windshield washer fluid display on the Driver Information
. Turn the band up for more and activate the wipers. The wipers Center (DIC). The compass receives
sensitivity to moisture. will continue until the lever is its heading and other information
. Turn the band down for less released or the maximum wash time from the Global Positioning
sensitivity to moisture. is reached. When the windshield System (GPS) antenna,
.
wiper lever is released, additional StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed
Move the windshield wiper lever wipes may occur depending on how information.
out of the INT position to long the windshield washer had
deactivate Rainsense. been activated. See Washer Fluid
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection on page 10‑23 for information on
filling the windshield washer fluid
When using an automatic car wash, reservoir.
move the windshield wiper lever to
OFF. This disables the automatic
Rainsense windshield wipers.
The compass system is designed to 3. Press the MENU knob to go to Setting the Time
operate for a certain number of the next option. Press S BACK To set the time:
miles or degrees of turn before to go to the last menu and save
needing a signal from the GPS the changes. 1. From the Home Page, press the
satellites. When the compass SETTINGS screen button and
display shows CAL, drive the AUTO SET press Time and Date.
vehicle for a short distance in an In the Set Time view, push on the 2. Press Set Time and press +
open area where it can receive a area just above the chrome bar and or − to increase or decrease
GPS signal. The compass system below the "AUTO SET" screen hours, minutes, and AM or PM.
will automatically determine when a button to turn on/off the Auto Time Press 12Hr or 24Hr for 12 or
GPS signal is restored and provide adjust capability. 24 hour clock.
a heading again. See Compass
Messages on page 5‑34 for the 3. Press } to go back to the
messages that may be displayed for
Clock (Uplevel Radio) previous menu.
the compass. The infotainment system controls
To set the date:
are used to access the time and
Clock (Base Radio) date settings through the menu 1. Press the SETTINGS screen
system. See “Home Page” in the button and press Time and Date.
Setting the Time infotainment manual for information 2. Press Set Date and press + or −
To set the time: about how to use the menu system. to increase or decrease month,
1. Select Settings from the Home day, or year.
Page and select Set Time. 3. Press } to go back to the
2. Turn the MENU knob to increase previous menu.
or decrease the hour.
Power Outlets Certain accessory power plugs may Notice: Hanging heavy
not be compatible with the equipment from the power outlet
The accessory power outlets can be accessory power outlet and could can cause damage not covered
used to plug in electrical equipment, overload vehicle or adapter fuses. by the vehicle warranty. The
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. If a problem is experienced, see power outlets are designed for
The vehicle has two accessory your dealer. accessory power plugs only, such
power outlets: When adding electrical equipment, as cell phone charge cords.
. Inside the front storage bin be sure to follow the proper Always unplug electrical equipment
below the climate control installation instructions included with when not in use and do not plug in
system. the equipment. See Add-On equipment that exceeds the
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑75. maximum 20 amps rating.
. On the rear of the center floor
console.
Lift the cover to access the
accessory power outlet.
Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges
on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem,
Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Follow this manual's advice.
signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle Waiting to do repairs can be costly
before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning and even dangerous.
to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a
replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle.
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

Cluster Application Displays Audio Units: Press SEL while Units is

While the Audio application page is highlighted to enter the Units menu.
The cluster has three interactive
displayed, press SEL to enter the Choose English or metric units by
display zones.
Audio menu. In the Audio menu pressing SEL while the desired item
Use the five-way control on the right is highlighted. A checkmark will be
search for music or change the
steering wheel control to move displayed next to the selected item.
audio source.
between the different display zones
Info Pages: Press SEL while Info
and scroll through the different Phone Pages is highlighted to select the
displays.
While the Phone application page is items to be displayed in the DIC
The left and right zones display displayed, press SEL to enter the information displays. See Driver
Driver Information Center (DIC) Phone menu. In the Phone menu, Information Center (DIC) on
information. See Driver Information if there is no active phone call, page 5‑26.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26. view recent calls or scroll through Open Source Software: Press
The center zone displays contacts. If there is an active call, SEL while Open Source Software is
application information for mute the phone or switch to handset highlighted to display open source
navigation, audio, phone, operation. software information.
or settings. Settings
Navigation Press SEL while the Settings Speedometer
If there is no active route, a application page is displayed to The speedometer shows the
compass will be displayed. If there enter the Settings menu. vehicle's speed in either kilometers
is an active route, press SEL to end per hour (km/h) or miles per
route guidance or turn the voice hour (mph).
prompts on or off.
Odometer The trip odometer is accessed and Fuel Gauge

reset through the Driver Information
The odometer shows how far the Center (DIC). See Driver
vehicle has been driven, in either Information Center (DIC) on
kilometers or miles. page 5‑26.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a Tachometer
new cluster installed, the new
The tachometer displays the engine
odometer is set to the mileage of
speed in revolutions per
the old odometer. If this is not
minute (rpm).
possible, it is set at zero and a label
is put on the driver door to show the Notice: If the engine is operated
old mileage reading. with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
Trip Odometer be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the When the ignition is on, the fuel
The trip odometer can show how far vehicle warranty. Do not operate gauge indicates about how much
the vehicle has been driven since the engine with the tachometer in fuel is left in the tank.
the trip odometer was last reset. the shaded warning area. There is an arrow near the fuel
gauge pointing to the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There still is
a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Here are four things that some Engine Coolant

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Temperature Gauge
. At the service station, the
fuel pump shuts off before the
gauge reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
English
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank. This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine.
. The gauge moves a little while Metric
turning a corner or speeding up. While driving under normal
operating conditions, if the needle
. The gauge takes a few seconds
moves into the shaded area, the
to stabilize after the ignition is
engine is too hot. Pull off the road,
turned on, and goes back to
stop the vehicle, and turn off the
empty when the ignition is
engine as soon as possible.
turned off.
Safety Belt Reminders If the driver safety belt is buckled, This cycle continues several times if
neither the chime nor the light the passenger remains or becomes
Driver Safety Belt Reminder comes on. unbuckled while the vehicle is
Light moving.
Passenger Safety Belt
There is a driver safety belt Reminder Light If the passenger safety belt is
reminder light on the instrument buckled, neither the chime nor the
cluster. There is a passenger safety belt light comes on.
reminder light near the passenger
airbag status indicator. See The front passenger safety belt
Passenger Sensing System on warning light and chime may turn on
page 3‑27. if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop, or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
When the vehicle is started, this from the seat or buckle the
light flashes and a chime may come safety belt.
on to remind the driver to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled. When the vehicle is started, this
This cycle may continue several light flashes and a chime may come
times if the driver remains or on to remind passengers to fasten
becomes unbuckled while the their safety belt. Then the light stays
vehicle is moving. on solid until the belt is buckled.
Airbag Readiness Light Passenger Airbag Status

{ WARNING Indicator
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays The vehicle has a passenger
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or sensing system. See Passenger
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means Sensing System on page 3‑27 for
sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag system might not be important safety information. The
the airbag modules, the wiring, and working properly. The airbags in passenger airbag status indicator is
the crash sensing and diagnostic the vehicle might not inflate in a in the overhead console.
module. For more information on the crash, or they could even inflate
airbag system, see Airbag System without a crash. To help avoid
on page 3‑19. injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag

system, a Driver Information Center United States
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5‑41.
The airbag readiness light comes on
for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately. Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after a check to show the light is working.

several more seconds, the status { WARNING It should go out when the engine is
indicator will light either ON or OFF, started.
or the on or off symbol to let you If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means If the light stays on, or comes on
know the status of the front while driving, there may be a
outboard passenger frontal airbag that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
and knee airbag. system. Have it checked by your
avoid injury to yourself or others,
If the word ON or the on symbol is have the vehicle serviced right dealer. Driving while this light is on
lit on the passenger airbag status could drain the battery.
away. See Airbag Readiness
indicator, it means that the front When this light comes on, or is
Light on page 5‑14 for more
outboard passenger frontal airbag flashing, the Driver Information
and knee airbag are allowed to information, including important
safety information. Center (DIC) also displays a
inflate. message.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is See Battery Voltage and Charging
lit on the airbag status indicator, it Charging System Light Messages on page 5‑33.
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front If a short distance must be driven
outboard passenger frontal airbag with the light on, be sure to turn off
and knee airbag. all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the The charging system light comes on
passenger sensing system. See briefly when the ignition is turned
your dealer for service. on, but the engine is not running, as
Malfunction OBD II system has detected a affect the vehicle's emission

problem and diagnosis and service controls and can cause this light
Indicator Lamp might be required. to come on. Modifications to
A computer system called OBD II Malfunctions often are indicated by these systems could lead to
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second the system before any problem is costly repairs not covered by the
Generation) monitors the operation apparent. Being aware of the light vehicle warranty. This could also
of the vehicle to ensure emissions can prevent more serious damage result in a failure to pass a
are at acceptable levels, helping to to the vehicle. This system also required Emission Inspection/
maintain a clean environment. The assists the service technician in Maintenance test. See
malfunction indicator lamp comes correctly diagnosing any Accessories and Modifications on
on when the vehicle is placed in malfunction. page 10‑3.
Service Only Mode, as a check to This light comes on during a
show it is working. If it does not, Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways:
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. See Ignition Positions on on, the emission controls might Light Flashing: A misfire condition
page 9‑16. not work as well, the vehicle fuel has been detected. A misfire
economy might not be as good, increases vehicle emissions and
and the engine might not run as could damage the emission control
smoothly. This could lead to system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
costly repairs that might not be and service might be required.
covered by the vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
Notice: Modifications made to the the vehicle:
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
If the malfunction indicator lamp intake, or fuel system of the
comes on while the engine is vehicle or the replacement . Avoid hard accelerations.
running, this indicates that the of the original tires with other . Avoid steep uphill grades.
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can

. If towing a trailer, reduce the A few driving trips with the cap diagnostic tools to fix any
amount of cargo being hauled as properly installed should turn the mechanical or electrical problems
soon as it is possible. light off. that might have developed.
If the light continues to flash, find a . Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
Maintenance Programs
the engine not to run as
least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live,
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up, your vehicle may be required to
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance
possible. hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will
control system malfunction has These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data
been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC).
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
The following may correct an It may require at least one full tank
emission control system of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
. Check that the fuel cap is fully page 9‑64.
installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made The DLC is under the instrument
page 9‑68. The diagnostic the light turn off, your dealer can panel to the left of the steering
system can determine if the check the vehicle. The dealer has wheel. See your dealer if assistance
fuel cap has been left off or the proper test equipment and is needed.
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer This light comes on briefly when the
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for vehicle is turned on. If it does not
. The malfunction indicator lamp is inspection. come on then, have it fixed so it will
on with the engine running, or if be ready to warn if there is a
the vehicle is placed in Service Brake System Warning problem.
Only Mode and the malfunction Light If the light comes on and stays on,
indicator lamp does not come there is a base brake problem.
The vehicle brake system consists
on. See your dealer for
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
assistance in verifying proper
operation of the malfunction
circuit is not working, the remaining { WARNING
circuit can still work to stop the
indicator lamp. The brake system might not be
vehicle. For normal braking
. The OBD II (On-Board performance, both circuits need to working properly if the brake
Diagnostics) system determines be working. system warning light is on.
that critical emission control Driving with the brake system
If the warning light comes on, there warning light on can lead to a
systems have not been
is a brake problem. Have the brake crash. If the light is still on after
completely diagnosed. The
system inspected right away. the vehicle has been pulled off
vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can the road and carefully stopped,
happen if the 12-volt battery has have the vehicle towed for
recently been replaced or run service.
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take Metric English
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
Parking Brake Light Service Electric Parking If this light stays on, there is a
problem with the electric parking
Brake Light brake system or another system on
the vehicle that is causing the
parking brake system to work at a
reduced level. The vehicle can still
be driven, but should be taken to a
Metric English dealer as soon as possible. See the
information for the electric parking
This light comes on when the brake under Parking Brake (Electric)
parking brake is applied. If the light This light should come on briefly on page 9‑30 or Parking Brake
continues flashing after the parking when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it (Manual) on page 9‑33. If a
brake is released, or while driving, does not come on, have it fixed so it message displays in the Driver
there is a problem with the electric will be ready to warn if there is a Information Center (DIC), see Brake
parking brake system or another problem. System Messages on page 5‑33.
system. A message may also
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Brake System
Messages on page 5‑33.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Antilock Brake System If the ABS light is the only light on, If it does not, have the vehicle
the vehicle has regular brakes, but serviced by your dealer. If the
(ABS) Warning Light the antilock brakes are not system is working normally, the
functioning. indicator light then turns off.
If both the ABS and the brake This light comes on green when the
system warning light are on, the system is on and ready to operate.
vehicle's antilock brakes are not When the system determines that
functioning and there is a problem the vehicle is leaving its lane
with the regular brakes. See your without using the turn signal, this
dealer for service. light will change to amber and flash.
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started. See Brake System Warning Light on See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
page 5‑18 and Brake System on page 9‑62.
If the light does not come on, have it Messages on page 5‑33.
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem. Vehicle Ahead Indicator
Lane Departure Warning
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
(LDW) Light
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on, If available, this light in the Driver
or comes on again while driving, the Information Center (DIC) displays
vehicle needs service. A chime may green when a vehicle is detected
If available, this light briefly comes
also sound when the light comes on ahead.
on amber while starting the vehicle.
steady.
This light will display amber when This light and the StabiliTrak OFF If the TCS is off, the system does
you are following a vehicle ahead light come on when StabiliTrak is not assist in controlling the vehicle.
much too closely. turned off. Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not systems and the warning light
System on page 9‑55. limited. Adjust driving accordingly. turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) See Traction Control System (TCS)
Traction Off Light on page 9‑34 and StabiliTrak® on page 9‑34 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑36. System on page 9‑36.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working This light comes on briefly while
normally, the indicator light then starting the engine. If it does not, The StabiliTrak or Traction Control
turns off. have the vehicle serviced by your System (TCS) indicator/warning
The traction off light comes on when dealer. light comes on briefly when the
the Traction Control System (TCS) engine is started.
This light comes on when the
has been turned off by pressing and StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the light does not come on, have
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
button. Control System (TCS) is also off. If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
If the light is on and not flashing, the Engine Coolant The engine coolant temperature
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak warning light comes on when the
system have been disabled. A DIC
Temperature Warning engine has overheated.
message may display. Check the Light If this happens, pull over and turn
DIC messages to determine which off the engine as soon as possible.
feature(s) is no longer functioning See Engine Overheating on
and whether the vehicle requires page 10‑22.
service.
If the indicator/warning light is on Tire Pressure Light
and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working. This light comes on briefly while
starting the vehicle.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑36 and Traction Control If it does not, have the vehicle
System (TCS) on page 9‑34. serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally the indicator
light goes off. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Notice: The engine coolant Monitor System (TPMS), this light
temperature warning light comes on briefly when the engine is
indicates that the vehicle has started. It provides information
overheated. Driving with this light about tire pressures and the TPMS.
on can damage the engine and it
may not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑22.
When the Light Is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it
This indicates that one or more of means that oil is not flowing through
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil the engine properly. The vehicle
the tires are significantly maintenance can damage the
underinflated. could be low on oil and might have
engine. Driving with the engine some other system problem. See
A Driver Information Center (DIC) oil low can also damage the your dealer.
tire pressure message may also engine. The repairs would not be
display. See Tire Messages on covered by the vehicle warranty. Low Fuel Warning Light
page 5‑42. Stop as soon as Check the oil level as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the possible. Add oil if required, but
pressure value shown on the Tire if the oil level is within the
and Loading Information label. See operating range and the oil
Tire Pressure on page 10‑50. pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
When the Light Flashes First and the maintenance schedule for
Then Is On Steady changing engine oil.
If the light flashes for about a minute This light is near the fuel gauge and
and then stays on, there may be a comes on briefly when the ignition is
problem with the TPMS. If the turned on as a check to show it is
problem is not corrected, the light working.
will come on at every ignition cycle. It also comes on when the fuel tank
See Tire Pressure Monitor is low on fuel. The light turns off
Operation on page 10‑53. when fuel is added. If it does not,
The oil pressure light should come have the vehicle serviced.
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Security Light High-Beam On Light Adaptive Forward

Lighting (AFL) Light
The immobilizer light should come This light comes on when the
on briefly as the engine is started. high-beam headlamps are in use. This light should come on briefly as
If it does not come on, have the See Headlamp High/Low-Beam the vehicle is started. If it does not
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Changer on page 6‑4. come on, have the vehicle serviced
If the system is working normally, by your dealer.
the indicator light turns off. Automatic High-Beam Light
This light comes on solid when
If the light stays on and the engine there is a problem with the AFL
does not start, there could be a system. It flashes when the system
problem with the theft-deterrent is switching between lighting
system. See Immobilizer Operation modes. See Adaptive Forward
on page 2‑18. Lighting (AFL) on page 6‑5.
This light comes on when the

automatic high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
Lamps On Reminder Cruise Control Light Adaptive Cruise Control Light
This light comes on when the The cruise control light is white This light in the Driver Information
exterior lamps are in use. See when the cruise control is on and Center (DIC) comes on when the
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1. ready, and turns green when the Adaptive Cruise Control (if
cruise control is set and active. equipped) is active. See Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 9‑42.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑39.
Information Displays S or T : Press to move between 4. Press SEL while an item is

the interactive display zones in the highlighted to select or deselect
cluster. Press S to go back to the that item. When an item is
Driver Information selected, a checkmark will
Center (DIC) previous menu.
appear next to it.
SEL (Select): Press to open a
The DIC displays are shown in the DIC Information Displays
menu or select a menu item. Press
left and right interactive display
and hold to reset values on certain The following is the list of all
zones on the instrument cluster. The
screens. possible DIC information displays.
displays show the status of many
vehicle systems. The controls for Some of the information displays
DIC Information Display
the DIC are on the right steering may not be available for your
Options particular vehicle.
wheel control.
The information displays on the DIC Speed: The digital speedometer
can be turned on or off through the shows the vehicle speed in either
Settings menu. kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
1. Press SEL while viewing the per hour (mph).
Settings page in the center Trip 1 and Trip 2: The Trip display
display zone on the cluster. shows the current distance traveled,
2. Scroll to Info Pages and in either kilometers (km) or
press SEL. miles (mi), since the trip odometer
was last reset. The trip odometer
3. Press y or z to move through can be reset by pressing and
the list of possible information holding SEL while this display is
displays. active.
y or z : Press to move up or
down in a list.
Fuel Range: The Fuel Range Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Timer: This display can be used as
display shows the approximate The Instantaneous Fuel Economy a timer. To start the timer, press SEL
distance the vehicle can be driven display shows the current fuel while this display is active. The
without refueling. LOW will be economy in either liters per display will show the amount of time
displayed when the vehicle is low 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles that has passed since the timer was
on fuel. The fuel range estimate is per gallon (mpg). This number last reset. To stop the timer, press
based on an average of the reflects only the fuel economy that SEL briefly while this display is
vehicle's fuel economy over recent the vehicle has right now and active and the timer is running. To
driving history and the amount of changes frequently as driving reset the timer to zero, press and
fuel remaining in the fuel tank. conditions change. hold SEL while this display is active.
Average Fuel Economy: The Average Speed: The Average Compass: The Compass display
Average Fuel Economy display Speed display shows the average shows the direction the vehicle is
shows the approximate average speed of the vehicle in kilometers driving.
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) per hour (km/h) or miles per Turn Arrow: The Turn Arrow
or miles per gallon (mpg). This hour (mph). This average is display shows the next maneuver
number is calculated based on the calculated based on the various when using route guidance.
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded vehicle speeds recorded since the
since the last time this menu item last reset of this value. The average Travel Time: The Travel Time
was reset. The Average Fuel speed can be reset by pressing and display shows the estimated time
Economy can be reset by pressing holding SEL while this display is duration remaining for the current
and holding SEL while this display active. route.
is active. Distance to Destination: The
Distance to Destination display
shows the distance to the
destination when using route
guidance.
Speed Limit: The Speed Limit Oil Life: The Oil Life display shows It cannot be reset accurately until
display shows the current speed an estimate of the oil's remaining the next oil change. To reset the
limit. The information for this page useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE engine oil life system, press and
comes from a roadway database. 99% is displayed, that means 99% hold SEL for several seconds while
Speed Warning: The Speed of the current oil life remains. the Oil Life display is active. See
Warning display allows the driver to When the remaining oil life is low, Engine Oil Life System on
set a speed that they do not want to the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON page 10‑13.
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, message will appear on the display. Tire Pressure: The Tire Pressure
press SEL when Speed Warning is See Engine Oil Messages on display shows the approximate
displayed. Press y or z to adjust page 5‑35. The oil should be pressures of all four tires. Tire
the value. This feature can be changed as soon as possible. See pressure is displayed in either
turned off by pressing and holding Engine Oil on page 10‑11. In kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per
SEL while viewing this page. If the addition to the engine oil life system square inch (psi). If the pressure is
selected speed limit is exceeded, a monitoring the oil life, additional low, the value for that tire is shown
pop-up warning is displayed and a maintenance is recommended in the in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor
chime may sound. Maintenance Schedule. See System on page 10‑52 and Tire
Maintenance Schedule on Pressure Monitor Operation on
Cruise Set Speed: The Cruise Set page 11‑3. page 10‑53.
Speed display shows the speed the
cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Remember, the Oil Life display must Blank Page: The Blank Page
Control is set to. be reset after each oil change. It will display allows for no information to
not reset itself. Also, be careful not be displayed in the DIC display
Battery Voltage: The Battery to reset the Oil Life display zone(s).
Voltage display shows the current accidentally at any time other than
battery voltage. when the oil has just been changed.
Head-Up Display (HUD) Notice: If you try to use the HUD

image as a parking aid, you may
misjudge the distance and
{ WARNING damage your vehicle. Do not use
If the HUD image is too bright or the HUD image as a parking aid.
too high in your field of view, it The HUD information can be
may take you more time to see displayed in various languages. The
things you need to see when it is speedometer reading and other
dark outside. Be sure to keep the numerical values can be displayed
HUD image dim and placed low in in either English or metric units.
your field of view. The language selection is changed
through the radio and the units of
HUD Display on the Vehicle
For vehicles with HUD, some measurement is changed through
the instrument cluster. See Vehicle Windshield
information concerning the
operation of the vehicle is projected Personalization on page 5‑43 and The HUD information appears as an
onto the windshield. This includes “Settings” under Instrument Cluster image focused out toward the front
the speedometer reading, rpm on page 5‑9. of the vehicle.
reading, transmission position, The HUD may display different
compass heading, audio/phone alerts and information for vehicles
information, and Turn-by-Turn equipped with these features:
Navigation information. The images . Traction Control System (TCS)
are projected through the HUD lens
on the driver side of the instrument . StabiliTrak System
panel. . Collision Alert
. Gap Adjust

. Upcoming Maneuver from To adjust the HUD image so that There are four views in the HUD
OnBoard Navigation items are properly displayed: display:
. Upcoming Maneuver from 1. Adjust the driver seat to a
OnStar comfortable position.
. Incoming Call 2. Start the engine.
When the HUD is on, the 3. Adjust the HUD controls.
speedometer reading is continually
displayed, except when an imminent Use the following settings to adjust
navigation maneuver is being the HUD. Metric
shown. The current audio, phone, $ (Image Adjustment): Press
or navigation alert temporarily down or lift up to center the HUD
displays if their status changes. This image. The HUD image can only be
occurs if the steering wheel controls adjusted up and down, not side
are used to adjust a setting or to side.
acknowledge an alert.
! (Display View): Press to
select the display view. Release English
when the desired display is shown Speed View: This display gives the
on the HUD. If vehicle messages speedometer reading (in English or
are displayed, pressing the DIC metric units), speed limit, Adaptive
select button may clear the Cruise Control speed, Forward
message. See Driver Information Collision Alert, Lane Departure
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26. Warning, and Vehicle Ahead
D (Brightness): Lift up and hold indicator. Some information only
to brighten the display. Press down appears on vehicles that have these
The HUD control is to the left of the and hold to dim the display. Hold features, and when they are active.
steering wheel. down to turn the display off.
closer you get to the maneuver. All

navigation information is provided to
the HUD by the navigation radio or
OnStar (if equipped).
Metric Metric
Metric
English English
Audio/Phone View: This display Navigation View: This display
includes the information in speed includes the information in speed
view along with audio/phone view along with Turn-by-Turn
information. The current radio Navigation information. The English
station, media type, and incoming compass heading is displayed when Performance View: This display
calls will be displayed. navigation routing is not active. gives the speedometer reading
All formats will briefly show the (in English or metric units), rpm
Turn-by-Turn Navigation alerts and reading, transmission positions, and
provide details about the next gear shift indicator.
driving maneuver to be made.
When you are near the next
maneuver, the HUD displays a
distance bar that will empty the
The HUD image displayed on the spray cleaner directly on the lens Vehicle Messages
windshield will automatically dim because the cleaner could leak into
and brighten to compensate for the unit. Messages displayed on the DIC
outside lighting. However, the HUD indicate the status of the vehicle or
brightness control can still be If You Cannot See the HUD some action that may be needed
adjusted as needed. Image When the Ignition Is On to correct a condition. Multiple
. Is anything covering the messages may display one after the
The HUD image can temporarily
HUD lens? other.
light up depending on the angle and
position of the sunlight on the HUD . Is the HUD dimmer setting bright The messages that do not require
display. This is normal and will enough? immediate action can be
change when the angle of the acknowledged and cleared by
sunlight on the HUD display
. Is the HUD image adjusted to pressing SEL. The messages that
changes. the proper height? require immediate action cannot
. Are you wearing polarized be cleared until that action is
Polarized sunglasses could make
sunglasses? performed. All messages should be
the HUD image harder to see.
taken seriously and clearing the
Care of the HUD If the HUD Image Is Not Clear messages does not correct the
. Is the HUD image too bright? problem.
Clean the inside of the windshield
as needed to remove any dirt or film . Are the windshield and HUD The following are some of the
that could reduce the sharpness or lens clean? vehicle messages that may be
clarity of the HUD image. displayed depending on the vehicle
If the HUD image is not correct, content.
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, contact your dealer.
clean cloth that has household glass
Keep in mind that the windshield is
cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
part of the HUD system. See
HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not
Windshield Replacement on
page 10‑30.
Battery Voltage and TRANSPORT MODE ON RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

Charging Messages This message is displayed when the This message is displayed if the
vehicle is in transport mode. Some Electric Parking Brake is on while
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE features can be disabled while in the vehicle is in motion. See Parking
This message displays when the this mode, including Remote Brake (Electric) on page 9‑30 or
vehicle has detected that the battery Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start, Parking Brake (Manual) on
voltage is dropping beyond a and the vehicle alarm system. Take page 9‑33.
reasonable point. The battery saver the vehicle to your dealer for service
to turn transport mode off. SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
system starts reducing features of
the vehicle that may be noticed. At This message may be displayed
the point that features are disabled, Brake System Messages when there is a problem with the
this message displays. Turn off brake boost assist system. When
unnecessary accessories to allow BRAKE FLUID LOW this message is displayed, the brake
the battery to recharge. This message is displayed when the boost assist motor might be heard
brake fluid level is low. See Brake operating and you might notice
LOW BATTERY Fluid on page 10‑25. pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
This message is displayed when the normal under these conditions. Take
battery voltage is low. See Battery STEP ON BRAKE TO the vehicle to your dealer for
on page 10‑26. RELEASE PARK BRAKE service.
SERVICE BATTERY This message is displayed if you SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

attempt to release the Electric
CHARGING SYSTEM Parking Brake without the brake This message is displayed when
This message is displayed when pedal applied. See Parking Brake there is a problem with the parking
there is a fault in the battery (Electric) on page 9‑30 or Parking brake. Take the vehicle to your
charging system. Take the vehicle to Brake (Manual) on page 9‑33. dealer for service.
your dealer for service.
Compass Messages This can occur under the following Door Ajar Messages
conditions:
Dashes may be displayed if the DOOR OPEN
vehicle temporarily loses
. The radar is not clean. Keep the
communication with the Global radar sensors free of mud, dirt, A door open symbol will be
Positioning System (GPS). snow, ice, and slush. Clean displayed on the DIC showing which
the entire front and/or rear door is open. If the vehicle has been
of the vehicle. For cleaning shifted out of P (Park), a DOOR
Cruise Control Messages instructions, see Exterior Care OPEN message will also be
ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET on page 10‑81. displayed. If the vehicle is in manual
TO XXX . Heavy rain or snow is interfering shift mode, the DOOR OPEN
message will be displayed if the
This message displays when the with the radar object detection or
vehicle starts to move. Close the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) camera performance.
door completely.
speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise CRUISE SET TO XXX
Control on page 9‑42. HOOD OPEN
This message displays when the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE cruise control speed is set. See This message will display along with
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Cruise Control on page 9‑39. a hood open symbol when the hood
is open. Close the hood completely.
This message displays when NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
attempting to activate Adaptive TRUNK OPEN
PEDAL APPLIED
Cruise Control (ACC) when it is This message will display along with
temporarily unavailable. The ACC This message displays when a symbol when the trunk is open.
system does not need service. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is Close the trunk completely.
active and the driver is pressing the
gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC
will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9‑42.
Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED — Engine Oil Messages

Messages IDLE ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays and a chime
A/C OFF ENGINE sounds when the engine coolant This message displays when the
COOLANT HOT temperature is too hot. The engine engine oil needs to be changed.
This message displays when the coolant temperature warning light When you change the engine oil, be
engine coolant becomes hotter than will also be on. Stop and allow the sure to reset the Oil Life System.
the normal operating temperature. vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Oil Life System on
To avoid added strain on a hot page 10‑13, Driver Information
ENGINE OVERHEATED — Center (DIC) on page 5‑26, Engine
engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off. TURN VEHICLE OFF Oil on page 10‑11, and Maintenance
When the coolant temperature This message displays and a Schedule on page 11‑3.
returns to normal, the air continuous chime sounds if the ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE
conditioning compressor turns back engine cooling system reaches ENGINE
on. The vehicle can continue to be unsafe temperatures for operation.
driven. The engine coolant temperature This message displays when the
warning light will flash. Stop and engine oil temperature is too hot.
If this message continues to appear, Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
have the system repaired by your turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so to avoid severe until it cools down.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine. damage. This message clears when
the engine has cooled to a safe
operating temperature.
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL If this message is on, but there Key and Lock Messages
is no reduction in performance,
On some vehicles, this message NO REMOTE KEY WAS
proceed to your destination. The
displays when the engine oil level
may be too low. Check the oil level
performance may be reduced the DETECTED PLACE KEY IN
next time the vehicle is driven. The TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN
before filling to the recommended
vehicle may be driven at a reduced START YOUR VEHICLE SEE
level. If the oil is not low and this
speed while this message is on, but OWNER’S MANUAL FOR
message remains on, take the
maximum acceleration and speed DETAILS
vehicle to your dealer for service.
may be reduced. Anytime this
See Engine Oil on page 10‑11. This message displays when trying
message stays on, the vehicle
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP should be taken to your dealer for to start the vehicle if an RKE
ENGINE service as soon as possible. transmitter is not detected. The
transmitter battery may be weak.
This message displays if low oil Fuel System Messages See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
pressure levels occur. Stop the Transmitter Battery” under Remote
vehicle as soon as safely possible FUEL LEVEL LOW Keyless Entry (RKE) System
and do not operate it until the cause Operation on page 2‑3.
of the low oil pressure has been This message displays when the
corrected. Check the oil as soon as vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE
possible and have the vehicle soon as possible TO RESTART
serviced by your dealer. TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message is displayed when
This message displays when the attempting to turn off the vehicle
Engine Power Messages fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the and the remote is no longer
fuel cap. detected. Restarting is allowed
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
without the remote for five minutes.
This message displays when the Press the brake pedal to restart the
vehicle's engine power is reduced. vehicle.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
NUMBER OF KEYS Lamp Messages XXX TURN INDICATOR

PROGRAMMED FAILURE
AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
This message displays when LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED When one of the turn signals is out,
programming new keys to the this message displays to show
vehicle.
SERVICE which bulb needs to be replaced.
This message displays when the See Bulb Replacement on
REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE AFL system is disabled and needs page 10‑31 and Replacement Bulbs
This message displays when service. See your dealer. See on page 10‑33.
leaving the vehicle with the RKE Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
transmitter still inside. page 6‑5. TURN SIGNAL ON
This message is displayed if the
REPLACE BATTERY IN AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL turn signal has been left on. Turn off
REMOTE KEY ON/OFF the turn signal.
This message displays when the This message is displayed when the
battery in the RKE transmitter needs exterior lamp control is in AUTO and
to be replaced. the lights have turned on or off. See
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑5.
Object Detection System This can occur under the following FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED
conditions: CLEAN WINDSHIELD
Messages
. The radar is not clean. Keep the This message displays when the
24 GHz RADARS OFF radar sensors free of mud, dirt, camera is blocked. Cleaning the
This message displays when driving snow, ice, and slush. Clean the outside of the windshield behind the
in certain areas where there may be entire front and/or rear of the rearview mirror may correct the
radar interference. Adaptive Cruise vehicle. For cleaning issue. The Lane Departure Warning
Control (ACC), Forward Collision instructions, see Exterior Care system will not operate. Forward
Alert (FCA), and the Active on page 10‑81. Collision Alert (FCA) may not work
Emergency Braking System may not . Heavy rain or snow is interfering or may not work as well.
work or may not work as well. The with the radar object detection or
vehicle does not need service. LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
camera performance.
UNAVAILABLE
AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP This message may also be
This message displays when
UNAVAILABLE displayed if there is a problem with
attempting to activate the Lane
the StabiliTrak system.
This message displays when the Departure Warning (LDW) system
Active Emergency Braking System FORWARD COLLISION when it is temporarily unavailable.
has been unavailable for some time. ALERT OFF The LDW system does not need
The Active Emergency Braking service.
System does not need service. This message displays when the
Forward Collision Alert has been This message could be due to the
turned off. camera being blocked. Cleaning the
outside of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror may correct the
issue.
PARK ASSIST OFF

. Heavy rain or snow is interfering SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
with the radar object detection or
This message displays when the camera performance. If this message remains on after
Parking Assist system has been continued driving, the vehicle needs
turned off or when there is a See Driver Assistance Systems on service. Do not use the Lane
temporary condition causing the page 9‑50. Departure Warning (LDW) and
system to be disabled. SERVICE AUTOMATIC Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
COLLISION PREP features. Take the vehicle to your
REAR AUTO BRAKE AND dealer.
PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE If this message displays, take the
vehicle to your dealer to repair the SERVICE PARK ASSIST
This message displays when
attempting to activate the parking system. This message displays if there is a
and backing features of the Driver SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST problem with the Parking Assist
Assistance System when they are system. Do not use this system to
SYSTEM help you park. See your dealer for
temporarily unavailable. The system
does not need service. If this message displays, take the service.
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
This can occur under the following system. SERVICE REAR AUTO BRAKE
conditions: AND PARK ASSIST
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
. The radar is not clean. Keep the Forward Collision Alert (FCA), This message displays if there is a
radar sensors free of mud, dirt, Active Emergency Braking System, problem with the parking and
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the Assistance Systems for Parking or backing features of the Driver
entire front and/or rear of the Backing, and/or Lane Departure Assistance System. Do not use this
vehicle. For cleaning Warning (LDW) system may not system to help park or back the
instructions, see Exterior Care work. Do not use these systems vehicle. See your dealer for service.
on page 10‑81. until the vehicle has been repaired.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF need service. For cleaning, see SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
"Washing the Vehicle" under
This message indicates that the This message displays if a problem
Exterior Care on page 10‑81.
driver has turned the Side Blind occurs with the All-Wheel-Drive
Zone Alert (SBZA) system off. (AWD) system. The vehicle will run
Ride Control System in 2WD. This could be caused by:
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION Messages
SYSTEM
. An electronics problem
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF . Worn out or overheated clutch
If this message remains on after
continued driving, the vehicle needs If the vehicle has the plates
service. Side Blind Zone Alert All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) system, this . Various electrical issues
(SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert message displays when there is a
temporary condition making the The system may need service. See
(RCTA) features will not work. Take
AWD system unavailable. The your dealer.
the vehicle to your dealer.
vehicle will run in 2WD. This could SERVICE STABILITRAK
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM be caused by:
UNAVAILABLE This message displays if there is a
. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed problem with the StabiliTrak system.
This message indicates that Side See StabiliTrak® System on
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear
. AWD system overheat
page 9‑36.
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are . Certain vehicle electrical
disabled either because the sensor conditions SERVICE SUSPENSION
is blocked and cannot detect This message turns off when the SYSTEM
vehicles in the blind zone, or the above conditions are no longer
vehicle is passing through an open This message displays when there
present and the warning message is is a problem with the MagneRide™
area, such as the desert, where reset.
there is insufficient data for system. See Driver Mode Control on
operation. This message may also See All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑29. page 9‑37. Have the vehicle
activate during heavy rain or due to serviced by your dealer.
road spray. The vehicle does not
SERVICE TRACTION Security Messages SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

CONTROL This message displays if there is a
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays when there problem with the vehicle. Take the
is a problem with the Traction This message displays if the vehicle vehicle to your dealer for service.
Control System (TCS). See Traction detects a tamper condition.
Control System (TCS) on Starting the Vehicle
page 9‑34. Service Vehicle Messages Messages
TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE AC SYSTEM PRESS BRAKE TO START
This message may display when the This message displays if there is a VEHICLE
Traction Control System (TCS) has problem with the air conditioning
This message is displayed when
been turned off. See Traction system. Take the vehicle to your
attempting to start the vehicle
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑34 dealer for service.
without first pressing the brake
TRACTION CONTROL ON SERVICE POWER STEERING pedal.
This message may display when the This message displays if there is a SERVICE KEYLESS START
Traction Control System (TCS) has problem with the power steering SYSTEM
been turned on. See Traction system. Take the vehicle to your
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑34 dealer for service. This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the pushbutton start
SERVICE STEERING system. Take the vehicle to your
Airbag System Messages COLUMN LOCK dealer for service.
SERVICE AIRBAG This message displays if there is a
This message displays if there is a problem with the steering column
problem with the airbag system. lock. Take the vehicle to your dealer
Take the vehicle to your dealer for for service.
service.
TURN STEERING WHEEL TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE Transmission Messages
START VEHICLE AGAIN This message displays when the SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message may display when pressure in one or more of the tires
you try to start the vehicle, but the is low. This message displays if there is a
column remains locked. Try turning problem with the transmission. See
This message also displays LEFT
the steering wheel while starting the your dealer.
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
vehicle to unlock the steering REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate SHIFT DENIED
column. If the vehicle still does not the location of the low tire.
start, turn the steering wheel the This message displays when using
other way, and try starting the The low tire pressure warning light the Driver Shift Control (DSC) and
vehicle again. will also come on. See Tire attempting to shift to a gear not
Pressure Light on page 5‑22. appropriate for the vehicle speed
Tire Messages If a tire pressure message appears and engine revolutions per
on the DIC, stop as soon as you minute (rpm). See Manual Mode on
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR can. Inflate the tires by adding air page 9‑26.
SYSTEM until the tire pressure is equal to the SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays if there is a values shown on the Tire and
problem with the Tire Pressure Loading Information label. See Tires This message displays when the
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire on page 10‑42, Vehicle Load Limits transmission needs to be shifted to
Pressure Monitor Operation on on page 9‑11, and Tire Pressure on P (Park). This may appear when
page 10‑53. page 10‑50. attempting to remove the key from
the vehicle if the vehicle is not in
You can receive more than one tire P (Park).
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
pressure message at a time. The
This message displays when the DIC also shows the tire pressure
system is learning new tires. See values. See Driver Information
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on Center (DIC) on page 5‑26.
page 10‑53.
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE Vehicle Speed Messages Vehicle

ENGINE
SELECTED SPEED LIMIT Personalization
This message displays and a chime EXCEEDED
sounds if the transmission fluid in The audio system controls are used
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the This message is displayed when the to access the personalization
transmission fluid temperature high vehicle speed is greater than the set menus for customizing vehicle
can cause damage to the vehicle. speed. See "Speed Warning" under features.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to Driver Information Center (DIC) on
Base Radio Audio System
allow the transmission to cool. This page 5‑26.
Controls
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
VEHICLE SPEED LIMITED MENU: Press the center of the
This message is displayed under knob to enter the menus and select
Vehicle Reminder certain conditions when there is a menu items. Turn the knob to scroll
problem and the vehicle’s speed is through the menus.
Messages being limited. S BACK: Press to exit or move
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE backward in a menu.
WITH CARE Washer Fluid Messages To access the
This message displays when ice WASHER FLUID LOW ADD personalization menu:
conditions are possible. FLUID 1. On the Home page, turn the
This message may display when the MENU knob to highlight Settings
washer fluid level is low. See and press the MENU knob.
Washer Fluid on page 10‑23. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Vehicle Settings and press the
MENU knob.
CUE Infotainment System Audio

. Power Door Locks Auto Rear Defog
System Controls . Remote Locking, Unlocking, If equipped, this will turn auto rear
To access the Starting defog on or off. This feature will
personalization menu: . Return to Factory Settings automatically turn on the rear
1. Press SETTINGS on the Home window defogger when it is cold
Climate and Air Quality outside.
page on the infotainment system
display. Select the Climate and Air Quality Select Off or On.
menu and the following may be
2. Press Vehicle Settings. displayed: Collision/Detection Systems
3. Press the desired feature to . Auto Fan Max Speed Select the Collision/Detection
display a list of available Systems menu and the following will
options. . Auto Defog be displayed (if equipped):
4. Press to select the desired . Auto Rear Defog . Alert Type
feature setting. Auto Fan Max Speed . Auto Collision Preparation
5. Press the 0 to return to the This feature will set the maximum . Park Assist
previous menu. auto fan speed. . Go Notifier
Personalization Menus Select Low, Medium, or High. . Side Blind Zone Alert
The following list of menu items may Auto Defog
be available: Alert Type
This will turn auto defog on or off.
. Climate and Air Quality Only vehicles with the uplevel dual This feature will set crash alerts to
automatic climate control system will beeps or seat vibrations. This
. Collision/Detection Systems setting affects all crash alerts
have this option.
. Comfort and Convenience including Forward Collision,
Select Off or On.
. Language
. Lighting
Lane Departure Warning, Adaptive Auto Collision Preparation feature. Comfort and Convenience
Cruise Control, Parking Assist, and See Active Emergency Braking
Select the Comfort and
Backing Warning alerts. System on page 9‑58.
Convenience menu and the
Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat. Select Off, Alert & Brake, or Alert. following will be displayed:
Auto Collision Preparation Park Assist . Auto Memory Recall
This feature will turn on or off the This allows the Ultrasonic Parking . Reverse Tilt Mirror
Forward Collision Alert feature as Assist feature to be turned on or off. . Easy Exit Options
well as the Automatic Braking Select Off or On.
capability of the Auto Collision . Chime Volume
Preparation feature. With the Alert & Go Notifier . Personalization by Driver
Brake setting, both Forward This feature will give a reminder that
Collision Alert as well as the
. Rain Sense Wipers
Adaptive Cruise Control provides
Automatic Braking capability of the when it has brought the vehicle to a Auto Memory Recall
Auto Collision Preparation feature complete stop behind another
are available. The Alert setting This allows the Auto Memory Recall
stopping vehicle, and then that feature to be turned on or off.
disables most automatic braking vehicle drives on.
functions of the Auto Collision Select Off or On. On some vehicles
Preparation feature. Some Select Off or On. select Off, On - Driver Door Open,
last-second automatic braking Side Blind Zone Alert or On - At ignition On.
capability is still provided with the
Alert setting, but it is much less This allows the Side Blind Zone
likely to be triggered by most Alert feature to be turned on or off.
driving conditions. Off disables Select Off or On.
all Forward Collision Alert and
Automatic Braking capabilities of the
Reverse Tilt Mirror Rain Sense Wipers Lighting

When on, both the driver and This allows the Rain Sense Wipers Select the Lighting menu and the
passenger, driver, or passenger feature to be turned on or off. following will be displayed:
mirrors will tilt downward when the Select Disabled or Enabled. . Vehicle Locator Lights
vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) to
improve visibility of the ground near Language . Exit Lighting
the rear wheels. They will return . Left or Right Hand Traffic
Select the Language menu and the
to their previous driving position
following will be displayed: . Auto High Beam
when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse) or the ignition is turned . English . Adaptive High Beam
to OFF. . French . Adaptive Forward Lighting
Select Off, On - Driver and . Spanish
Passenger, On - Driver, or On -
. Daytime Tail Lights
Passenger. Select the language. The selected Vehicle Locator Lights
language will display on the system,
Easy Exit Options and voice recognition will reflect the This allows the vehicle locator lights
This allows the Easy Exit Options selected language. to be turned on or off.
feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On.
Select Off or On. Exit Lighting
Chime Volume This allows the selection of how
This allows the selection of the long the exterior lamps stay on
chime volume level. when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
Select a volume between 0 and 63.
Select Off, 30 Seconds,
60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
Left or Right Hand Traffic Adaptive Forward Lighting Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
This allows the selection to change This allows the selection of how When on, this feature will keep the
the vehicle for left hand or right long the exterior lamps stay on driver door from locking when the
hand traffic. when leaving the vehicle when it is door is open. If Off is selected, the
Select Left Hand Traffic or Right dark outside. Delayed Door Lock menu will be
Hand Traffic. On some vehicles Select Corner and Curve Lighting or available.
select Left Hand Traffic, Right Hand Intelligent Light Distribution. On Select Off or On.
Traffic, or Automatic (GPS). some vehicles select Corner and
Curve Lighting, Intelligent Light Auto Door Lock
Auto High Beam Distribution, or GPS Assistance. This allows selection of which of the
This allows the Auto High Beam to doors will automatically lock when
be turned on or off. Daytime Tail Lights the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)
Select Off or On. On some vehicles This allows the Daytime Tail Lights (automatic transmission) or at
select Off, Normal Sensitivity, to be turned on or off. 13 km/h (8 mph) (manual
or Low Sensitivity. Select Off or On. transmission).
Select Off or On.
Adaptive High Beam Power Door Locks
This allows the vehicle locator lights Auto Door Unlock
Select Power Door Locks and the
to be turned on or off. following will be displayed: This allows selection of which of the
Select Off or On. On some vehicles doors will automatically unlock when
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
elect Off, Normal Sensitivity, or Low the vehicle is shifted into P (Park)
. Auto Door Lock (automatic transmission) or when
Sensitivity.
. Auto Door Unlock the key is removed from the ignition
(manual transmission).
. Delayed Door Lock
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
Delayed Door Lock Remote Unlock Light Feedback Remote Start

When on, this feature will delay the When on, the exterior lamps will This allows the remote start feature
locking of the doors. To override the flash when unlocking the vehicle to be turned on or off.
delay, press the power door lock with the RKE transmitter. Select Off or On.
switch on the doors. Select Off or Flash Lights.
Select Off or On. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Remote Lock Feedback If equipped and turned on, this
Remote Lock, Unlock, and This allows selection of what type of feature will turn the heated seats on
Start feedback is given when locking the when using remote start on
Select Remote Lock/Unlock and the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. cold days.
following may be displayed: Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights Select Off or On. On some vehicles
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback Only, or Horn Only. select Off, On - Driver and
Passenger, or On - Driver.
. Remote Lock Feedback Remote Door Unlock
This allows selection of which doors Passive Door Unlock
. Remote Door Unlock
will unlock when pressing the unlock This allows passive unlocking to be
. Relock Remotely Unlocked
button on the RKE transmitter. turned on or off and selects what
Doors
Select All Doors or Driver doors will unlock.
. Remote Start
Door Only. Select All Doors or Driver
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Door Only.
Relock Remotely Unlocked Doors
. Passive Door Unlock Passive Door Lock
When on, if the doors are unlocked
. Passive Door Lock from the RKE transmitter and a door This allows passive locking to be
. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder is not opened, the doors will turned on or off and selects
automatically relock. feedback.
Select Off or On.
Select On, On with Horn Chirp, Restore Vehicle Settings Universal Remote
or Off. This allows selection of restoring
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder vehicle settings.
System
Select Cancel or Continue. See Radio Frequency Statement on
This allows the remote left in vehicle
page 13‑21 for information
feature to be turned on or off. Clear All Private Data regarding Part 15 of the
Select Off or On. This allows selection to clear all Federal Communications
private information from the vehicle. Commission (FCC) rules and
Return to Factory Settings Industry Canada Standards
Select Return to Factory Settings Select Cancel or Continue. RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
and the following list may display: Restore Radio Settings
. Restore Vehicle Settings This allows selection to restore
. Clear All Private Data radio settings.
. Restore Radio Settings Select Cancel or Continue.
Universal Remote System Do not use the Universal Remote When programming a garage door,
system with any garage door opener park outside of the garage. Park
Programming that does not have the stop and directly in line with and facing the
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener motor-head or
garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that
manufactured before April 1,1982. people and objects are clear of the
Read the instructions completely garage door or gate being
before attempting to program the programmed.
Universal Remote system. Because It is recommended that a new
of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in the hand-held
helpful to have another person transmitter for quicker and more
available to assist with programming accurate transmission of the
the Universal Remote system. radio-frequency signal.
Keep the original hand-held Programming the Universal
transmitter for use in other vehicles Remote System
If the vehicle has this feature, you as well as for future Universal
Remote system programming. It is For questions or help programming
will see these buttons with one the Universal Remote system,
indicator light next to them in the also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed call 1-800-355-3515 or go to
overhead console. www.homelink.com.
Universal Remote system buttons
This system provides a way to be erased for security purposes. Programming a garage door opener
replace up to three remote control See “Erasing Universal Remote involves time-sensitive actions, so
transmitters used to activate System Buttons” later in this read the entire procedure before
devices such as garage door section. starting. Otherwise, the device will
openers, security systems, and time out and the procedure will have
home automation devices. to be repeated.
To program up to three devices: Some entry gates and garage

. If the Universal Remote
door openers may require system indicator light blinks
1. Hold the end of the hand-held rapidly for two seconds,
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate then turns to a constant
(1 to 3 in) away from the light and the garage door
Universal Remote system Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this does not move, continue
buttons while keeping the with programming
indicator light in view. The section.
Steps 4–6.
hand-held transmitter was 3. Press and hold for five seconds
supplied by the manufacturer of the newly trained Universal It may be helpful to have
the garage door opener receiver Remote system button (the another person assist with
(motor-head unit). button selected in Step 2) while the remaining Steps 4–6.
2. At the same time, press and observing the indicator light and
hold both the hand-held garage door activation.
transmitter button and one of the . If the indicator light stays on
three Universal Remote system continuously or the garage
buttons to be used to operate door starts to move when
the garage door. Do not release the Universal Remote
the Universal Remote system system button is pressed
button or the hand-held and released, then the
transmitter button until the programming is complete.
indicator light changes from a There is no need to “Learn” or “Smart” Button
slowly to a rapidly flashing light. continue programming 4. After Steps 1–3 have been
You now may release both Steps 4–6. completed, locate the “Learn” or
buttons. “Smart” button inside the garage
on the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). The
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
5. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining two you live, replace Step 2 under
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After Universal Remote system buttons, “Programming the Universal Remote
pressing this button, you will begin with Step 1 of “Programming System” with the following:
have 30 seconds to complete the Universal Remote System.” Continue to press and hold the
Step 6. Universal Remote system button
Gate Operator and Canadian
6. Immediately return to the Programming while you press and release every
vehicle. Firmly press and hold two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
for two seconds the Universal If you have questions or need help transmitter button until the
Remote system button, selected programming the Universal Remote frequency signal has been
in Step 2 to control the garage system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go successfully accepted by the
door, and then release it. If the to www.homelink.com. Universal Remote system. The
garage door does not move or Canadian radio-frequency laws Universal Remote system indicator
the lamp on the garage door require transmitter signals to time light will flash slowly at first and then
opener receiver (motor-head out or quit after several seconds of rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
unit) does not flash, press and transmission. This may not be long “Programming the Universal Remote
hold the same button a second enough for the Universal Remote System” to complete.
time for two seconds, then system to pick up the signal during
release it. Again, if the door programming. Similarly, some U.S. Universal Remote System
does not move or the garage gate operators are manufactured to
door lamp does not flash, press
Operation
time out in the same manner.
and hold the same button a third Using the Universal Remote
time for two seconds, then If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate System
release.
operator or garage door opener by Press and hold the appropriate
The Universal Remote system using the “Programming the Universal Remote system button
should now activate the Universal Remote System” for at least half of a second. The
garage door. procedures, regardless of where indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Remote Reprogramming a Single If you have questions or need help
System Buttons Universal Remote System programming the Universal Remote
Button system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
All programmed buttons should be to www.homelink.com. You may
erased when the vehicle is sold or To reprogram any of the three also call the customer assistance
the lease ends. Universal Remote system buttons: phone number under Customer
To erase all programmed buttons on 1. Press and hold the desired Assistance Offices (U.S. and
the Universal Remote system Universal Remote system Canada) on page 13‑4 or Customer
device: button. Do not release the Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
button. page 13‑5.
1. Press and hold down the two
outside buttons until the 2. The indicator light will begin to
indicator light begins to flash. flash after 20 seconds. Without
This should take about releasing the button, proceed
10 seconds. with Step 1 under “Programming
2. Release both buttons. the Universal Remote System.”
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Lighting Features
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Daytime Running Exterior Lighting Battery
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
The exterior lamp control is on the
Adaptive Forward
turn and lane change lever.
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-6 Turn the control to the following
Turn and Lane-Change positions:
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 O (Off): Turns off the exterior
lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released.
Turn to O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
6-2 Lighting
In Canada, the headlamps will

. Instrument Panel Lights Turning On and Enabling
automatically reactivate when the . Parking Lamps Automatic High Beams
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) on To enable the automatic high-beam
automatic transmission vehicles, Automatic High-Beam System
system, with the turn and
and when the parking brake is This system turns the vehicle's lane-change lever in the neutral
released on manual transmission high-beam headlamps on and off position, turn the exterior lamp
vehicles. according to surrounding traffic control to AUTO. The blue
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically conditions. high-beam on light appears on the
turns the exterior lamps on and off, The system turns the high-beam instrument cluster when the high
depending on outside lighting. headlamps on when it is dark beams are on.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the enough and there is no other traffic Driving with Automatic High
parking lamps together with the present. Beams
following:
The system only activates the high
. Sidemarker Lamps beams when driving over 40 km/h
. Taillamps (25 mph).
. License Plate Lamps There is a sensor near the top
center of the windshield, which
. Instrument Panel Lights automatically controls the system.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the This light comes on in the Keep this area of the windshield
headlamps together with the instrument cluster when the clear of debris to allow for best
following: automatic high-beam system is system performance.
. Sidemarker Lamps enabled.
. Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
Lighting 6-3
The high-beam headlamps remain Changer must be activated two

. Your vehicle's windshield is dirty,
on, under the automatic control, times within five seconds to cracked, or obstructed by
until one of the following situations reactivate the automatic something that blocks the view
occurs: high-beam system. The of the light sensor.
. The system detects an instrument cluster light will come . Your vehicle's windshield is
approaching vehicle's on to indicate the automatic covered with ice, dirt, haze,
headlamps. high-beam system is reactivated. or other obstructions.
. The system detects a preceding The high beams may not turn off . Your vehicle is loaded such that
vehicle's taillamps. automatically if the system cannot the front end points upward,
detect other vehicle's lamps causing the light sensor to aim
. The outside light is bright because of any of the following: high and not detect headlamps
enough that high-beam and taillamps.
headlamps are not required.
. The other vehicle's lamp(s) are
missing, damaged, obstructed . You are driving on winding or
. The vehicle's speed drops below from view, or otherwise hilly roads.
20 km/h (12 mph). undetected.
You may need to manually disable
. The turn and lane-change lever . The other vehicle's lamp(s) are or cancel the high-beam headlamps
is moved forward to the covered with dirt, snow, and/or by turning the low-beam headlamps
high-beam position or the road spray. on, if any of the above conditions
Flash-to-Pass feature is used. exist.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
. The other vehicle's lamp(s)
Changer on page 6‑4 and cannot be detected due to dense
Flash-to-Pass on page 6‑4. exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road
spray, mist, or other airborne
. The automatic high-beam obstructions.
system can be disabled by the
High/Low-Beam Changer or the
Flash-to-Pass feature. If this
happens, the High/Low-Beam
6-4 Lighting
Exterior Lamps Off Flash-to-Pass Fully functional daytime running

lamps are required on all vehicles
Reminder This feature allows the high-beam first sold in Canada.
A warning chime will sound if the headlamps to be used to signal the
driver in front of you that you want The DRL system turns on the
exterior lamp control is left on in low-beam headlamps at a reduced
either the headlamp or parking lamp to pass.
brightness. For vehicles with
position and the driver door is Pull and hold the turn signal lever High Intensity Discharge (HID)
opened with the ignition off. toward you to use this feature. headlamps, there is a dedicated
When this is done the following will DRL. The DRL will come on when
Headlamp High/ occur: all of the following conditions
Low-Beam Changer . If the headlamps are off or in are met:
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam low-beam mode, the high-beam . The ignition is on.
Changer): Push the turn signal headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as the lever is
. The exterior lamp control is
lever away from you and release, to in AUTO.
turn the high beams on. To return to held there. Release the lever to
low beams, push the lever again or turn them off. . The light sensor determines it is
pull it toward you and release. . If the headlamps are in daytime.
high-beam mode, they will go to . The parking brake is released or
low beam. the vehicle is not in P (Park).
The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
Daytime Running instrument panel lights, and other
Lamps (DRL) lamps will not be on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can The DRL turn off when the
This indicator light turns on in the make it easier for others to see the headlamps are turned to O or the
instrument cluster when the front of your vehicle during the day. ignition is off.
high-beam headlamps are on.
Lighting 6-5
Automatic Headlamp The system may also turn on the Adaptive Forward
headlamps when driving through a
System parking garage or tunnel.
Lighting (AFL)
When the exterior lamp control is When it is bright enough outside, On vehicles with the AFL system,
set to AUTO and it is dark enough the headlamps will turn off or may the headlamps pivot horizontally to
outside, the headlamps come on change to Daytime Running provide greater road illumination
automatically. Lamps (DRL). while turning. To enable AFL, set
the exterior lamp control on the turn
The automatic headlamp system signal lever to the AUTO position.
turns off when the exterior lamp Moving the control out of the AUTO
control is turned to O or the ignition position will deactivate the system.
is off. AFL will operate when the vehicle
speed is greater than 3 km/h
Lights On with Wipers (2 mph). AFL will not operate when
If the windshield wipers are the transmission is in R (Reverse).
activated in daylight with the engine AFL is not immediately operable
on, and the exterior lamp control is after starting the vehicle; driving a
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking short distance is required to
lamps, and other exterior lamps calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
come on. The transition time for the Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
There is a light sensor on top of the lamps coming on varies based on
instrument panel. Do not cover the wiper speed. When the wipers are
sensor, otherwise the headlamps not operating, these lamps turn off.
will come on when they are not Move the exterior lamp control to P
needed. or ; to disable this feature.
6-6 Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change The turn and lane-change signal
can be turned off manually by
Signals moving the lever back to its original
position.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change, the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑34.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
| (Hazard Warning Flashers): An arrow on the instrument cluster

Press this button on the center flashes in the direction of the turn or
stack to make the front and rear turn lane change.
signal lamps flash on and off. Press Raise or lower the lever until the
again to turn the flashers off. arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
The hazard warning flashers turn on change. Hold it there until the lane
automatically if the airbags deploy. change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
Lighting 6-7
Interior Lighting Dome Lamps Reading Lamps

The dome lamp is in the overhead There are reading lamps on the
Instrument Panel console. overhead console and over the rear
Illumination Control passenger doors. These lamps
come on when any door is opened.
To manually turn the reading lamps
on or off:
The brightness of the instrument

panel lighting and steering wheel
controls can be adjusted. To change the dome lamp settings,
D (Instrument Panel press:
Illumination): Move the OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
thumbwheel up or down to brighten when a door is open.
or dim the lights. Press m or n next to each
DOOR: The lamp comes on when overhead console reading lamp.
a door is opened.
Courtesy Lamps Press the lamp lens to turn the rear
ON: Turns the lamp on. passenger reading lamps on or off.
The courtesy lamps come on when
any door is opened and the dome
lamp is in the DOOR position.
6-8 Lighting
Lighting Features This feature can be changed. See Battery Power Protection
“Vehicle Locator Lights” under
Vehicle Personalization on The battery saver feature is
Entry Lighting page 5‑43. designed to protect the vehicle's
The headlamps, taillamps, license battery.
plate lamps, back-up lamps, outside Exit Lighting If some interior lamps are left on
mirror lamps, exterior door handle and the ignition is turned off, the
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, dome lamp, and most of the battery rundown protection system
lamps, back-up lamps, outside
interior lights turn on briefly when K mirror lamps, license plate lamps,
automatically turns the lamp off after
is pressed on the Remote Keyless some time.
and exterior door handle lamps
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See come on at night, or in areas with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) limited lighting, when a door is Exterior Lighting Battery
System Operation on page 2‑3. opened after the ignition is turned Saver
When the driver door is opened, all off. The dome lamp comes on after
control lights, Driver Information The exterior lamps turn off about
the ignition is changed to the OFF
Center (DIC) lights, and door pocket 10 minutes after the ignition is
position. The exterior lamps and
lights turn on. After about turned off, if the parking lamps or
dome lamp remain on after the door
30 seconds the exterior lamps turn headlamps have been manually left
is closed for a set amount of time,
off, then the dome lamp and on. This protects against draining
then automatically turn off.
remaining interior lights dim to off. the battery. To restart the 10-minute
Entry lighting can be disabled The exterior lamps turn off timer, turn the exterior lamp control
manually by changing the ignition immediately by turning the exterior to the off position and then back to
out of the OFF position, or by lamp control off. the parking lamp or headlamp
position.
pressing Q on the RKE transmitter. This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on To keep the lamps on for more than
page 5‑43. 10 minutes, the ignition must be in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Introduction
System USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16
7-19 Infotainment
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Read the following pages to
Introduction become familiar with the
Phone infotainment system featured in this
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-21
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 owner manual.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Bluetooth (Voice { WARNING
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Taking your eyes off the road
Radio Trademarks and License for too long or too often while
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Agreements using any infotainment features
Trademarks and License can cause a crash resulting in
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 injury or death. Do not give
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 extended attention to
infotainment tasks while
driving. Focus your attention
on driving and limit glances to
the instrument cluster or center
stack screens. Use voice
guidance whenever possible.
7-2 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3. The base radio is included in this
features intended to help with this This vehicle’s infotainment system manual. See the CUE infotainment
by disabling some functions when may be equipped with a noise manual for information on the CUE
driving. A grayed-out function is not reduction system, which can work radio, audio players, phone,
available when the vehicle is improperly if the audio amplifier, navigation system, and voice or
moving. All functions are available engine calibrations, exhaust system, speech recognition. There is also
when the vehicle is parked. microphones, radio, or speakers are information on settings and
Before driving: modified or replaced. This could downloadable applications (if
result in more noticeable engine equipped).
. Become familiar with the
infotainment system operation noise at certain speeds.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
and buttons on the faceplate. The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, TheftLock® is designed to
. Set up the audio by presetting discourage theft of the vehicle's
favorite stations, setting the the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. radio by learning a portion of the
tone, and adjusting the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
speakers. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑21. The radio does not operate if it is
. Set up phone numbers in stolen or moved to a different
advance so they can be called vehicle.
easily by pressing a single
button or by using a single voice
command for vehicles equipped
with phone capability.
Overview 1. FAV (Favorite Pages)

. Press to scroll through the
Infotainment System Overview favorite pages for each
The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons on the faceplate source.
and steering wheel controls.
2. O (Power/Volume)
. Press to turn the audio on
or off.
. Press and hold to clear the
screen and display
the time.
. Press to mute the system.
Press again to unmute.
. Turn the knob to adjust the
volume.
3. 7 (Seek Previous/Fast
Reverse)
. Press to seek to the
beginning of the current or
previous track. If the track
has been playing for less
than five seconds, it seeks
the previous track. If longer
than five seconds, the
current track starts from the
beginning.

. Press and hold to quickly . Press to select the
reverse through a track. highlighted menu option.
10. S BACK
Release the button to return .
. Press to return to the
Turn to scroll through a list.
to playing speed. See CD previous screen in
Player on page 7‑13. 6. { (Home Page) a menu.
. For AM, FM, or SiriusXM® . See “Home Page” following . On a page accessed
(if equipped), press to seek in this section. directly by a faceplate
to the previous strong button or Home Page
station. 7. RADIO screen button,
. Press to change the audio press S BACK to go to
4. 6 (Seek Next/Fast Forward) source between AM, FM, the previous menu.
. Press to seek the next or SiriusXM (if equipped).
track. 8. MEDIA Home Page
. Press and hold to fast . Press to change the audio Home Page Features
forward through a track. source between CD, USB,
Release the button to return SD Card, and AUX. The infotainment system displays a
to playing speed. See CD Home Page that makes it easy to
Player on page 7‑13. 9. PHONE access all of the applications. Turn
. For AM, FM, or SiriusXM
. See Bluetooth (Infotainment the MENU knob to highlight feature
(if equipped), press to seek Controls) on page 7‑23 icons. Press the MENU knob to
to the next strong station. or Bluetooth (Voice access the feature’s options.
Recognition) on page 7‑27 Various functions are disabled when
5. MENU or Bluetooth (Overview) on the vehicle is moving.
. Press to access the menu page 7‑21.
for the current audio
source.
AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen Setting Radio Preferences 3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
icon to display the active source Select LOCK to lock the system.
Select the SETTINGS screen icon
page. The sources available are This will also lock the vehicle
to display the Settings menu and
AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped), storage locations, if equipped.
the following may display:
CD, USB/iPod, AUX, and SD Card. 4. Type the four-digit code
See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑8, Time: See Clock (Base Radio) on
to unlock the system.
Satellite Radio on page 7‑11, CD page 5‑6 or Clock (Uplevel Radio)
Player on page 7‑13, and Auxiliary on page 5‑6. Press S BACK to go back
Jack on page 7‑20. to the previous menu.
Language (Current Language):
PHONE: Select the PHONE screen This will set the display language in Radio: See “Radio Setup” later in
icon to display the Phone main the radio, instrument cluster, and this section.
page. See “PHONE” in this section. voice recognition. Press to display a Vehicle: See Vehicle
NAV: Select the NAV screen icon list of languages. Press S BACK to Personalization on page 5‑43.
to display the last Turn-by-Turn go back to the previous menu. Display: Press the MENU knob to
maneuver if a destination was Valet Mode: turn the display on or off.
downloaded. See Navigation on
page 14‑2. 1. Type a four-digit code on the Return to Factory Settings: See
circular numeric keypad. Turn “Return to Factory Settings” later in
SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS the MENU knob to highlight a this section.
screen icon to display the Settings number.
main page. See “Setting Radio Software Information: Press the
Preferences” in this section. 2. Press the MENU knob to select MENU knob to select Save Vehicle
it. Do this for each one of the Info to USB. Press the MENU knob
four digits. Select Enter to go to again to start downloading the
the confirmation screen. vehicle information to the USB.
Radio Setup From the RADIO screen icon, the Number of Favorites Shown: To
While at the active screen, such as following may be displayed: set the number of favorites for
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped), Manage Favorites: display, select Auto to automatically
press and hold the area just above adjust the number of Favorites
. Turn the MENU knob and push pages shown as Favorites are
the chrome bar and below one of to select a Favorite.
the preset screen buttons to save added and removed. Another way
the current station as a favorite. . Push the area just above the to adjust is to select a number from
Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the 5–25 to show that selection of
chrome bar to recall a favorite DELETE screen button to delete favorites. Press S BACK to go back
station. a favorite. to the previous menu.
From the Home Screen, turn the . While a station is highlighted, Audible Touch Feedback: Select
MENU knob to select Settings press the MOVE screen button. Audible Touch Feedback to turn
application and push the MENU The screen button will change to feedback Off or On. Press S BACK
knob to select. Turn again to select DROP. Turn the MENU knob and to go back to the previous menu.
"Radio" settings menu and push the station tab will follow the
to select. Turn again to select path to the desired location. Auto Volume (If Equipped): This
"Manage Favorites" and push to Press the area just above the feature adjusts the volume based
select. chrome bar and below the on vehicle speed. The options are
DROP screen button to relocate Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium,
the station. Medium-High, or High. Select the
desired volume. Press S BACK to
go back to the previous menu.
Bose® AudioPilot® Noise Maximum Startup Volume: This Symbols, then select Off or On.
Compensation Technology (If feature sets the maximum startup Press S BACK to go back to the
Equipped): While turned ON, volume. If the vehicle is started and previous menu.
AutoPilot® detects ambient noise the volume is greater than this level,
and vehicle speed to continuously the volume is adjusted to this level. See Assistance Systems for Parking
monitor and adjust many aspects of To set the maximum startup volume, or Backing on page 9‑51.
the audio signal so that your music Turn the MENU knob to increase Rear Cross Traffic Alert: This
will sound the same at a set volume or decrease startup volume. feature will display an alert icon
level. Press S BACK to go back to the when cross traffic is detected.
The options are ON and OFF. previous menu. Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert, then
select Off or On. Press S BACK to
This feature is most effective at Rear Camera (If Equipped)
lower radio volume settings where go back to the previous menu.
From the Rear Camera screen
background noise can affect how button, the following may be Return to Factory Settings
well the music can be heard while displayed:
being played through your vehicle’s Select Return to Factory Settings
audio system. At higher volume Rear Camera Display: This and the following list may display:
settings, where the music is much feature will turn the Rear Vision Restore Vehicle Settings: This
louder than the background noise, Camera display on or off. Select option will restore factory vehicle
there may be little or no adjustments Rear Camera Display and then personalization settings. Select
by AudioPilot®. select Off or On. Press S BACK to Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen
For more information on go back to the previous menu. displays stating all vehicle
Bose® AudioPilot® noise customization settings will be
Park Assist Symbols: This feature restored to the factory settings.
compensation technology, visit will display symbols where objects
www.bose.com//audiopilot. Select Cancel or Confirm.
are detected by the Rear Parking
Assist system. Select Park Assist Press S BACK to go back to the
last menu.
Clear All Private Data: This option English and Metric Unit Radio
clears all private information from Conversion
the vehicle. Select Clear All Private
Data. Select Cancel or Continue. To change the display units between AM-FM Radio
English and metric units, see
Press S BACK to go back to the Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. Playing the Radio
last menu.
While on the audio main page,
Restore Radio Settings: This Software Updates press the RADIO or MEDIA button
option will restore factory radio repeatedly to display and scroll
See the following websites for
settings. Select Restore Radio through the available sources (AM,
information:
Settings. A screen displays stating FM, and SiriusXM® (if equipped),
all personalized radio settings will Cadillac CD, USB, SD, and AUX).
be restored back to the factory
In the U.S., see www.cadillac.com. The steering wheel controls can
settings. Select Cancel or Continue.
In Canada, see www.cadillac.ca. also be used to adjust the volume.
Press S BACK to go back to the See Steering Wheel Controls on
last menu. page 5‑2.
AM, FM, SiriusXM (If Equipped)
To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM
(if equipped):
1. Press {.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the AUDIO screen icon.
3. Press the MENU knob to select.
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight to the left for more sound from Bose® AudioPilot® Noise
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if the front speakers and to the Compensation Technology (If
equipped) and press the MENU right for more sound from the Equipped): While turned ON,
knob to select. rear speakers. The middle AutoPilot® detects ambient noise
Press the RADIO faceplate button position balances the sound and vehicle speed to continuously
to display the active radio source. between the front and rear monitor and adjust many aspects of
Press the MENU knob and the speakers. the audio signal so that your music
following radio settings may display: . EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENU will sound the same at a set volume
knob to highlight. Turn the level.
Tone Settings:
MENU knob to scroll through the The options are ON and OFF.
. Bass, Midrange, and Treble: options. Press the MENU knob
Turn the MENU knob and This feature is most effective at
to select. Press the S BACK lower radio volume settings where
highlight. Press the MENU knob button to go back to the
to select. Turn the MENU knob background noise can affect how
previous menu. well the music can be heard while
to adjust.
Station List: Select to display being played through your vehicle’s
. Balance: Turn the MENU knob a list of AM or FM stations. audio system. At higher volume
to highlight. Press the MENU settings, where the music is much
knob to select. Turn the MENU Press S BACK to go to the
louder than the background noise,
knob left for more sound from previous menu. there may be little or no adjustments
the left speakers or right for Auto Volume: If equipped, this by AudioPilot®.
more sound from the right feature adjusts the volume based on
speakers. The middle position For more information on
the vehicle speed. Select the level Bose® AudioPilot® noise
balances the sound between the between off, low, medium-low,
left and right speakers. compensation technology, visit
medium, medium-high, and high. www.bose.com//audiopilot.
. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to Press S BACK to go to the
highlight. Press the MENU knob previous menu.
to select. Turn the MENU knob
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: For Options for SiriusXM Only Tuning a Station

vehicles equipped with a Bose XM View: XM view allows the Turn the MENU knob to manually
Sound System the available choices channel list to be viewed by channel find a station.
are Manual and Talk. name, artist playing on channel,
DSP Modes: If equipped with a or song playing on channel. Turn Storing Radio Station Presets
Bose® Surround Sound System, it the MENU knob to highlight XM Favorites are stored in the favorites
will have the following four DSP view and press the MENU knob to area at the bottom of the screen.
modes: select. Press S BACK to go to the Up to 25 preset stations can be
. Normal: Adjusts the audio to previous menu. stored under the following:
normal mode. This provides the Channel List: Select to display a AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if
best sound quality for all seating list of SiriusXM stations. Turn equipped): While on the active
positions. the MENU knob to highlight and source main page, such as AM, FM,
. Driver: Adjusts the audio to give press the MENU knob to select. and SiriusXM (if equipped), press
the driver the best possible Press S BACK to go to the and hold the area just above the
sound quality. previous menu. chrome bar and below one of the
. Rear: Adjusts the audio to give preset screen buttons to save the
Also see the radio settings common
the rear seat occupants the best current station as a favorite. Press
for all sources earlier in this section.
possible sound quality. the area just above the chrome bar
Finding a Station to recall a favorite station.
. Centerpoint®: Turns on Bose
Centerpoint® surround Seeking a Station Favorites
technology. Favorites can be stored including
Press 7 or 6 to search for the
Centerpoint creates a surround previous or next strongest station. radio stations and media.
sound from nearly any audio To display the favorites page, press
source; existing CD collection, the FAV button on the radio
satellite radio, and audio players. faceplate.
From the Settings menu press the See www.siriusxm.com or call SiriusXM Messages
MENU knob to select Manage 1-866-635-2349 in the U.S. In
XL (Explicit Language
Favorites. The Manage Favorites Canada, see www.siriusxmradio.ca
Channels): These stations, or any
feature has the option of moving or or call 1-877-209-0079.
others, can be blocked by request,
deleting a favorite. See “Manage When SirisuXM is active, the by calling 1-866-635-2349 in the
Favorites” under Home Page on channel name and number, song U.S., and 1-877-209-0079 in
page 7‑4. title, and artist display on the Canada.
screen.
Satellite Radio Loading XM: The audio system is
Browsing SiriusXM Channels acquiring and processing audio and
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio text data. No action is needed.
Service To browse the SiriusXM channels:
Channel Off Air: This station is not
1. While XM is the active source, currently in service.
Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
press the MENU knob.
radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM Channel Unauth: This station is
satellite radio subscription can 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight blocked or cannot be received.
receive SiriusXM programming. XM Channel List. Press the
MENU knob to select. Channel Not Available: This
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service previously assigned station is no
based in the 48 contiguous United 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight longer assigned.
States and 10 Canadian provinces. All XM Channels. Press the
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide MENU knob to select and No XM Signal/Reception May Be
variety of programming and display all channels or select a Blocked: The vehicle may be in a
commercial-free music, coast to category. location where the SiriusXM signal
coast, and in digital-quality is being blocked. When the vehicle
sound. A service fee is required is moved into an open area, the
to receive the SiriusXM service. signal should return.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0, interference, some static can occur, Cell Phone Usage
this message displays with the XM especially around tall buildings or
Cell phone usage, such as making
radio eight-digit radio ID label. This hills, causing the sound to fade in
or receiving phone calls, charging,
label is needed to activate the and out.
or just having the phone on may
service.
AM cause static interference in the
Check Antenna: If this message radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
does not clear within a short period The range for most AM stations is if this happens.
of time, the receiver could have a greater than for FM, especially at
fault. Consult with your dealer. night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with Backglass Antenna
each other. Static can also occur The AM-FM antenna is integrated
Radio Reception when things like storms and power with the rear window defogger in the
Frequency interference and static lines interfere with radio reception. rear window. Do not scratch the
can occur during normal radio When this happens, try reducing the inside surface or damage the lines
reception if items such as phone treble on the radio. in the glass. If the inside surface is
chargers, vehicle convenience damaged, it could interfere with
accessories, and external electronic SiriusXM Satellite Radio radio reception. For proper radio
devices are plugged into the Service reception, the antenna connector
accessory power outlet. If there is SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service needs to be properly attached to the
interference or static, unplug the provides digital radio reception. post on the glass.
item from the accessory power Tall buildings or hills can interfere If attaching a cell phone antenna to
outlet. with satellite radio signals, causing the glass, attach it between the grid
FM the sound to fade in and out. In lines.
addition, traveling or standing under
FM signals only reach about 16 to heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the or tunnels may cause loss of the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit SiriusXM signal for a period of time.
that automatically works to reduce
Notice: Using a razor blade or Audio Players There can be increased skipping,
sharp object to clear the inside difficulty in recording tracks,
rear window can damage the rear difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
window antenna and/or the rear CD Player difficulty in loading and ejecting.
window defogger. Repairs would The player can be used for CD and If these problems occur, check the
not be covered by the vehicle MP3 audio. disc for damage or try a known
warranty. Do not clear the inside good disc.
rear window with sharp objects. With the vehicle on, insert a disc
into the slot, label side up. Press the To avoid damage to the CD player:
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket MEDIA button to select CD as a . Do not use scratched or
glass tinting with metallic film. source. damaged discs.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or The system is capable of playing: . Do not apply labels to discs. The
distort the incoming radio . Most audio CDs labels could get caught in the
reception. Any damage caused to player.
. CD-R
the backglass antenna due to . Insert only one disc at a time.
metallic tinting materials will not . CD-RW
be covered by the vehicle
. Keep the loading slot free of
. MP3 or unprotected WMA foreign materials, liquids, and
warranty. formats debris.
Multi-Band Antenna When playing any compatible . Use a marking pen to label the
recordable disc, the sound quality top of the disc.
The roof antenna is for OnStar, can be reduced due to disc quality,
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, and GPS the method of recording, the
(Global Positioning System). Keep quality of the music that has been
clear of obstructions for clear recorded, or the way the disc has
reception. If the vehicle has a been handled.
sunroof, and it is open, reception
can also be affected.
Loading and Ejecting Discs Use the following controls to play u or 6 (Seek Next/Fast
the disc: Forward): While on the CD main
To load a disc:
1. Turn the vehicle on.
t or 7 (Seek Previous/Fast page, press just above the chrome
Reverse): While on the CD main bar and below the u.
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label page, press just above the chrome
side up. The player pulls it in the
. Press to seek to the next track.
bar and below the t.
rest of the way. If the disc is . Press and hold to fast forward
damaged or improperly loaded,
. Press to seek to the beginning of through a track. Release the
there is an error and the disc the current or previous track. button to return to playing
ejects. If the track has been playing for speed. Elapsed time displays.
less than five seconds, it seeks
Playing an Audio CD to the previous track. If longer j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD
than five seconds, the current main page. Press just above the
Press the MEDIA button on the chrome bar and below pause/play to
faceplate until CD is selected. track starts from the beginning.
pause. Press again to resume.
On the CD main page, a track
. Press and hold to fast reverse
through a track. Release the Z (Shuffle): Press just above the
number displays at the beginning of
each track. Song, Artist, and Album button to return to playing chrome bar and below the Z to
information displays when available. speed. Elapsed time displays. play the songs in random order.
Press again to turn off.
If a Blu-ray Disc® or DVD disc is between off, low, medium-low, Error Messages
loaded into the CD player and the medium, medium-high, and high.
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
CD screen button is selected, a Press S BACK to go to the comes out, it could be for one of the
message comes on the screen to previous menu. following reasons:
use the Video application. The
Video application is only available Bose® AudioPilot®: If equipped, . The disc has an invalid or
on vehicles with rear seat this feature can be turned on or off. unknown format.
entertainment. See “Bose® AudioPilot®” in AM-FM .
Radio on page 7‑8. The disc is very hot. Try the disc
CD Menu again when the temperature
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: returns to normal.
While on the CD main page, press If equipped, this feature adjusts the
the MENU knob to display the CD pre-defined EQ modes. See “EQ
. The road is very rough. Try the
menu and the following may display: (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM disc again when the road is
Radio on page 7‑8. smoother.
Browse: Select to display the files
or songs on the CD. See “Browse DSP Modes: If equipped with a
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
CD Media” later in this section. Bose® Surround Sound System, this or upside down.
Tone Settings: Select to adjust feature adjusts DSP modes. See . The air is very humid. Try the
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio on disc again later.
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See page 7‑8. . There was a problem while
“Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio Browse CD Media burning the disc.
on page 7‑8.
Use to browse the track list on . The label is caught in the CD
Auto Volume: If equipped, this a CD. player.
feature adjusts the volume based on
the vehicle speed. Select the level

. Maximum number of folders:
If Disc Player Error displays, it could
eight folders with 255 files per
USB Port
be for one of the following reasons:
folder. Playing from a USB
. The player temperature is
too high.
. Maximum of 1,000 files on A USB mass storage device or
.
a disc. Media Transfer Protocol (MTP)
There are load or eject errors.
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW. device can be connected to the
If the CD is not playing correctly, for USB port.
any other reason, try a known Root Directory
The USB ports are in the center
good CD. The root directory is treated as a console under the armrest and in
If any error continues, contact your folder. All files contained directly the center stack storage bin.
dealer. under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory USB MP3 Player and USB Drives
Playing an MP3 CD folders. . The USB MP3 players and USB
To play an MP3 CD, follow the same Empty Folders drives connected must comply
instructions as “Playing an with the USB Mass Storage
Audio CD.” If a root directory or folder is empty Class specification (USB MSC).
or contains only folders, the player
The following guidelines must be advances to the next folder in the
. Hard disk drives are not
met when creating an MP3 disc, file structure that contains a supported.
otherwise the CD might not play: compressed audio file. The empty To play a USB device:
. Sampling rate: 16 kHz, folder(s) are not displayed or . Connect the USB.
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, numbered.
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz. . Press the MEDIA button on the
No Folder faceplate until the connected
. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, device is shown.
When the CD only contains
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
compressed audio files without any
128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
folders or playlists, all files are
and 320 kbps.
under the root folder.
While the USB source is active, use Auto Volume: If equipped, see
. iPod classic® (6th generation)
the icons on the screen to operate “Playing an Audio CD.” . iPod touch® (1st and 2nd
USB function: ® ®
Bose AudioPilot : If equipped, generation)
. t (Seek Previous/Fast this feature can be turned on or off. There may be problems with
Reverse) See “Bose® AudioPilot®” in AM-FM operation and function in the
Radio on page 7‑8. following situations:
. u (Seek Next/Fast Forward) EQ (Equalizer) Settings: . When connecting an iPod on
. j /r (Play/Pause) If equipped, this feature adjusts the which a more recent version of
pre-defined EQ modes. See “EQ the firmware is installed than is
. Z (Shuffle) (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM supported by the infotainment
Radio on page 7‑8. system.
For information on how to use the
screen icons, see “Playing an DSP Modes: If equipped with a . When connecting an iPod on
Audio CD.” Bose® Surround Sound System, this which firmware from other
feature adjusts the DSP modes. providers is installed.
USB Menu See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio
Press the MENU knob to display the on page 7‑8. To connect and control an iPod:
USB menu and the following may 1. Connect one end of the standard
display: Playing from an iPod® iPod USB cable to the iPod's
Browse: Select to display the files This feature supports the following dock connector.
and folders on the USB device. iPod models: 2. Connect the other end to a USB
Tone Settings: Select to adjust
. iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and port in the center console or in
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, 4th generation) the center stack storage bin.
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See . iPod with video (5.0 and 3. Press the MEDIA button to
“Tone Settings” under “Playing an 5.5 generation). select the source.
Audio CD.”
iPod music information displays on Tone Settings: Select to adjust Browse iPod Media
the radio’s display and begins Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Use the following to browse:
playing through the vehicle’s audio Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
system. “Tone Settings” under “Playing an Playlists:
The iPod battery recharges Audio CD.” 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
automatically while the vehicle is on. Auto Volume: If equipped, see and press to view the playlists
When the vehicle is off while an “Playing an Audio CD.” stored on the iPod.
iPod is connected using the iPod Bose® AudioPilot®: If equipped, 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
USB cable, the iPod battery stops this feature can be turned on or off. and press to select a playlist
charging and the iPod automatically See “Bose® AudioPilot®” in AM-FM name to view a list of all songs
turns off. Radio on page 7‑8. in the playlist.
If the iPod is an unsupported model, EQ (Equalizer) Settings: 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
it can still be listened to in the If equipped, this feature adjusts the and press to select the song
vehicle by connecting to the pre-defined EQ modes. See “EQ from the list to begin playback.
auxiliary input jack using a standard (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. Artists:
Radio on page 7‑8.
iPod Menu 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
DSP Modes: If equipped with a and press to view the artists
Press the MENU knob to display the Bose® Surround Sound System, this stored on the iPod.
iPod Menu and the following may feature adjusts the DSP modes.
display: See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
on page 7‑8. and press to select an artist
Browse: Select to display the files name to view a list of all albums
or songs on the iPod. See “Browse by the artist.
iPod Media” later in this section.
and press to select the album
from the list.
4. To begin playback, select a song 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight SD Card Reader
from the album. and press to select an album to
view songs. This vehicle has an SD card reader
Albums: in the center console.
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to select the song Set up any SD card while the
and press to view the albums vehicle is in P (Park).
stored on the iPod. from the list to begin playback.
Songs: 1. Plug the SD card into the reader.
and press to select an album 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Press the MEDIA button to
name to view a list of all songs and press to view a list of all select the SD device.
on the album. songs stored on the iPod. If an SD card has already been
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight connected, but a different source is
and press to select the song and press to select the song currently active, press the MEDIA
from the list to begin playback. from the list to begin playback. screen button repeatedly to cycle
through all of the available audio
Genres: Playing from an iPhone® source screens, until the SD card
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight or iPad® screen is selected.
and press to view the genres This feature supports iPhone 3G, Playing Music from the SD Card
stored on the iPod. iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, and iPad.
An SD card is played the same way
2. Turn the MENU knob to select a Follow the same instructions as a USB device is played. See USB
genre name to view a list of stated earlier for using an iPod. Port on page 7‑16.
artists of that genre.
an artist and press to select to
view albums by that artist.
Auxiliary Jack If an auxiliary device has already Auto Volume: If equipped, see
been connected, but a different “Playing an Audio CD.”
This vehicle has an AUX port in the source is currently active, press the
center console under the armrest Bose® AudioPilot®: If equipped,
MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly this feature can be turned on or off.
and in the center stack storage bin. to scroll through all of the available
Possible auxiliary audio sources See “Bose® AudioPilot®” in AM-FM
audio source screens, until the AUX Radio on page 7‑8.
include: source screen is selected.
. Laptop computer EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
Playing from the AUX Port If equipped, this feature adjusts the
. Audio music player An auxiliary device is played pre-defined EQ modes. See “EQ
This jack is not an audio output. Do through the audio system and (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM
not plug headphones into the controlled through the device itself. Radio on page 7‑8.
auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary DSP Modes: If equipped with a
AUX Menu
devices should be set up while the Bose® Surround Sound System, this
vehicle is in P (Park). Press the MENU knob to display the feature adjusts the DSP modes.
AUX menu and the following may See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable
display: on page 7‑8.
from the auxiliary device to the
auxiliary input jack. Tone Settings: Select to adjust
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
“Tone Settings” under “Playing an
Audio CD.”
Phone duplicate or rarely used entries.

If possible, program speed dial WARNING (Continued)
or other shortcuts.
Bluetooth (Overview) (navigation) system. Taking your
. Review the controls and eyes off the road too long or too
Instructions for using the cell phone operation of the infotainment
may differ between infotainment often could cause a crash
system. resulting in injury or death. Focus
systems. For vehicles with the CUE
infotainment system, see the CUE
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. your attention on driving.
infotainment manual. The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
Bluetooth-capable systems can Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
this section. can use a Bluetooth-capable cell
interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
. If the cell phone has voice phone with a Hands-Free Profile to
dialing capability, learn to use make and receive phone calls. The
. Placement and receipt of calls in that feature to access the infotainment system and voice
a hands-free mode. address book or contact list. See recognition are used to control the
. Sharing of the cell phone’s “Voice Pass-Thru” in this system. The system can be used
address book or contact list with section. while in ON/RUN or ACC/
the vehicle. . See “Storing and Deleting Phone ACCESSORY. The range of the
Numbers” in this section. Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
To minimize driver distraction, (30 ft). Not all phones support all
before driving, and with the vehicle functions and not all phones work
parked: { WARNING with the Bluetooth system. See
. Become familiar with the www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
When using a cell phone, it can
features of the cell phone. information about compatible
Organize the phone book and be distracting to look too long or phones.
contact lists clearly and delete too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment
(Continued)
Bluetooth Controls { (Home Page): Press to go to the Audio System

Use the buttons on the faceplate Home Page. See Home Page on When using the Bluetooth system,
and the steering wheel to operate page 7‑4. sound comes through the vehicle's
the Bluetooth system. PHONE: Press to enter the phone front audio system speakers and
main menu. See Bluetooth overrides the audio system. Use the
Steering Wheel Controls O knob during a call to change the
(Infotainment Controls) on
g (Push to Talk): Press to answer page 7‑23 or Bluetooth (Voice volume level. The system maintains
incoming calls, confirm system Recognition) on page 7‑27 or a minimum volume level.
information, and start voice Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑21.
recognition. Bluetooth Audio Quality
Voice Recognition Turn off the Echo and Noise
c (End Call): Press to end a call,
reject a call, or cancel an operation. The voice recognition system uses cancellation feature on your phone,
Press to mute or unmute the commands to control the system if supported, for the best hands-free
infotainment system. and dial phone numbers. performance.
Noise: The system may not See www.gm.com/bluetooth.
Infotainment System Controls
recognize voice commands if there
For information about how to is too much background noise.
Other Information
navigate the menu system using the The Bluetooth® word mark and
infotainment controls, see Overview When to Speak: A tone sounds to
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
on page 7‑3. indicate that the system is ready for
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
a voice command. Wait for the tone
MENU: Turn to scroll through the by General Motors is under license.
and then speak.
phone menu, including Contact, Other trademarks and trade names
Recent Calls, Keypad, and How to Speak: Speak clearly in a are those of their respective owners.
Bluetooth Devices. Press to select calm and natural voice.
an entry and dial when appropriate.
Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information Pairing a Phone or Device

Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be 1. From the Home Page, turn the
paired to the Bluetooth system. MENU knob to access the
For information about how to PHONE screen button, then
navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving. press the MENU knob to select
infotainment controls, see Overview the PHONE screen button. If a
on page 7‑3. . Pairing only needs to be device has been previously
Switching to Handset or completed once, unless the paired, the main Phone menu
pairing information on the cell will be shown. If no devices
Handsfree Mode phone changes or the cell phone have been paired, Step two can
To switch between handset mode, is deleted from the system. be skipped.
use the OnStar command, . Only one paired cell phone can 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
“transfer call.”
be connected to the Bluetooth to select Manage Phones.
Pairing system at a time.
3. Press the area just above the
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone . If multiple paired cell phones are chrome bar and below the PAIR
must be paired to the Bluetooth within range of the system, the screen button. A four-digit
system and then connected to the system connects to the first Personal Identification Number
vehicle before it can be used. See available paired cell phone in the (PIN) appears on the display.
your cell phone manufacturer's user order that they were newly The PIN is used in Step 5.
guide for Bluetooth functions before paired to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see 4. Start the pairing process on the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth cell phone to be paired to the
phone is not connected, calls can “Connecting to a Different
Phone” after in this section. vehicle. See the cell phone
be made using OnStar Hands-Free manufacturer's user guide for
Calling, if available. SeeOnStar information on this process.
Overview on page 14‑1.
5. Locate the device named “Your Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
Vehicle” in the list on the cell 1. From the Home Page, turn the to select Manage Phones.
phone. Follow the instructions MENU knob, then press to 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
on the cell phone to enter the select the PHONE screen button the phone to be connected.
PIN provided in Step 3. The or press the PHONE button on
system recognizes the new 4. Press the button just below the
the faceplate. CONNECT screen button to
connected phone after the
pairing process is complete. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press connect to the highlighted
to select Manage Phones. device.
6. If the phone prompts to accept
connection or allow phone book 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Phone Menu
download, select always accept the phone to be deleted.
Once a phone is connected and
and allow. The phone book may 4. Press the area just above the selected, the following may display:
not be available if not accepted. chrome bar and below the
DELETE screen button to delete Recent Calls: Turn the MENU
7. Repeat steps 1–6 to pair
the highlighted device. knob to highlight Recent Calls and
additional phones or devices.
press to select.
Listing All Paired and Connected 5. A confirmation screen is
displayed. Press the button just Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to
Phones highlight Contacts and press to
below the DELETE screen
1. To list all paired devices, turn the button to confirm deletion. select.
MENU knob, then press to Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to
select the PHONE screen Connecting to a Different Phone
highlight Keypad and press to
button. 1. From the Home Page, turn the select.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press MENU knob, then press to
Active Call: Turn the MENU knob
to select Manage Phones. select the PHONE screen button
to highlight Active Call and press to
or press the PHONE button on
select and display the active call
the faceplate.
screen.
Manage Phones: Turn the MENU The Recent Calls menu allows you To make a call using the Recent
knob to highlight Manage Phones to access the phone numbers from Calls menu:
and press to select. the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, 1. From the Home Page, turn the
and Missed Calls menus on the cell MENU knob, then press to
Making a Call Using Contacts phone to make a call.
and Recent Calls select the PHONE screen
To make a call using the button.
For cell phones that support the Contacts menu:
Contacts and Recent Calls feature, 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the Bluetooth system can use the 1. Turn the MENU knob, then press Recent Calls and press to
contacts stored on your cell phone to select the PHONE screen select.
to make calls. See your cell phone button, or press the PHONE If necessary, select between
manufacturer’s user guide or button on the faceplate. Missed, Recent, and Sent calls
contact your wireless provider to 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight by turning the MENU knob to
find out if this feature is supported Contacts and press to select. highlight the desired screen
by your phone. button, then pressing the MENU
If the phone prompts to allow phone the letter group and press to knob to select it.
book download during the pairing select. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
process, select Always Accept and the contact or the phone
Allow. The phone book may not be number.
the contact and press to select.
available if not accepted.
5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 4. Press the MENU knob to call the
When a cell phone supports the contact.
the desired number, then press
phone book feature, the Contacts
the MENU knob to call the
and Recent Calls menus are
contact.
automatically available.
The Contacts menu allows you to
access the phone book stored in the
cell phone to make a call.
Making a Call Using the Accepting or Declining a Call Call Waiting

Keypad When an incoming call is received, Call waiting must be supported on
To make a call: the infotainment system mutes and the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. the wireless service carrier to work.
1. Turn the MENU knob, then press
to select the PHONE screen Accepting a Call Accepting a Call Waiting Call
button.
To accept a call, do one of the To accept a call waiting call, do one
2. Turn the MENU knob and press following: of the following:
to select Keypad. . .
Press the area just above the Press the area just above the
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight chrome bar and below the chrome bar and below the
the first digit and press to select. ANSWER screen button. SWITCH screen button.
Continue this process through
the number. To call, press the
. Press g on the steering wheel . Press g on the steering wheel
area just above the chrome bar controls. controls.
and below the CALL screen Declining a Call Declining a Call Waiting Call
button.
To decline a call, do one of the To decline a call waiting call, do one
following: of the following:
. Press the area just above the . Press the area just above the
chrome bar and below the chrome bar and below the
IGNORE screen button. IGNORE screen button.
. Press c on the steering wheel . Press c on the steering wheel
controls or do nothing. controls or do nothing
Ending a Call From the PHONE main menu, turn Pairing Information
the MENU knob to highlight “Active . Up to five cell phones can be
To end a call, do one of the
Call” and press to select. paired to the Bluetooth system.
following:
. Press the area just above the Bluetooth (Voice . The pairing process is disabled
chrome bar and below the END when the vehicle is moving.
screen button.
Recognition) . Pairing only needs to be
. Press c on the steering wheel Using Voice Recognition completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
controls. To use voice recognition, press g phone changes or the cell phone
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency on the steering wheel. Use the is deleted from the system.
commands below for the various
(DTMF) Tones . Only one paired cell phone can
voice features. For additional
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can information, say “Help” while you be connected to the Bluetooth
send numbers during a call. This is are in a voice recognition menu. system at a time.
used when calling a menu-driven . If multiple paired cell phones are
phone system. Pairing
within range of the system, the
1. Press the area just above the A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone system connects to the first
chrome bar and below the must be paired to the Bluetooth available paired cell phone in the
KEYPAD screen button. system and then connected to the order that they were newly
vehicle before it can be used. See paired to the system. To link to a
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight your cell phone manufacturer's user different paired phone, see
the first digit and press to select. guide for Bluetooth functions before “Connecting to a Different
If not initially in the phone pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth Phone” later in this section.
application, from the Home Page, phone is not connected, calls can
turn the MENU knob, then press to be made using OnStar Hands-Free
select the PHONE screen button. Calling, if available. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
Pairing a Phone with “<Phone name> has been 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
successfully paired” after the for which phone to delete.
1. Press g. The system responds pairing process is complete.
“Ready,” followed by a tone. 4. Say the name of the phone to
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair delete.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” additional phones.
Connecting to a Different Phone
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected
with instructions and a four-digit To connect to a different cell phone,
Phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. The system can list all cell phones next available cell phone in the
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is order in which all available cell
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the phones were paired. This may need
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected” to be repeated depending on how
For help with this process, see after that phone name. many cell phones have been
your cell phone manufacturer's connected.
user guide. 1. Press g. The system responds
5. Locate the device named “Your “Ready,” followed by a tone. 1. Press g. The system responds
Vehicle” in the list on the cell 2. Say “Bluetooth.” “Ready,” followed by a tone.
phone. Follow the instructions 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
on the cell phone to enter the 3. Say “List.”
PIN provided in Step 3. After the 3. Say “Change phone.”
Deleting a Paired Phone
PIN is successfully entered, the . If another cell phone is
If the phone name to delete is
system prompts you to provide a found, the response will be
unknown, see “Listing All Paired “<Phone name> is now
name for the paired cell phone.
and Connected Phones.” connected.”
This name will be used to
indicate which phones are 1. Press g. The system responds . If another cell phone is not
paired and connected to the “Ready,” followed by a tone. found, the original phone
vehicle. The system responds remains connected.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Storing and Deleting Phone 3. Say the entire phone number or Using the “Delete” Command
Numbers a group of digits all at once with
no pauses, then follow the 1. Press g. The system responds
The following commands are used directions given by the system to “Ready,” followed by a tone.
to delete and store phone numbers. save a name tag for this number. 2. Say “Delete.”
Store: This command will store a
Using the “Digit Store” Command 3. Say the name tag you want to
phone number, or a group of
If an unwanted number is delete.
numbers as a name tag.
recognized by the system, say Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Digit Store: This command allows
“Correction” at any time to clear the Command
a phone number to be stored as a
last number.
name tag by entering the digits one This command deletes all stored
at a time. To hear all of the digits recognized name tags in the Hands-Free
by the system, say “Verify” at Calling Directory and the
Delete: This command is used to
any time. Destinations Directory.
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press g. The system responds To delete all name tags:
command deletes all stored name “Ready,” followed by a tone.
1. Press g. The system responds
tags in the Hands-Free Calling 2. Say “Digit Store.” “Ready,” followed by a tone.
Directory and the Destinations
Directory. 3. Say each digit, one at a time. 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
After each digit is entered, the
Using the “Store” Command system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone. After
1. Press g. The system responds the last digit has been entered,
“Ready,” followed by a tone. say “Store,” and then follow the
2. Say “Store.” directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
Listing Stored Numbers Using the “Dial” or “Call” After each digit is entered, the
Command system repeats back the digit it
The list command will list all the
heard followed by a tone.
stored numbers and name tags. 1. Press g. The system responds
“Ready,” followed by a tone. If an unwanted number is
Using the “List” Command recognized by the system, say
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” “Correction” at any time to clear the
“Ready,” followed by a tone. 3. Say the entire number without last number.
pausing or say the name tag. To hear all of the numbers
2. Say “Directory.”
Once connected, the person called recognized by the system, say
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” will be heard through the audio “Verify” at any time.
4. Say “List.” speakers.
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency “Ready,” followed by a tone.
Calls can be made using the 1. Press g. The system responds 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
following commands. “Ready,” followed by a tone. 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” After each digit is entered, the
command can be used system repeats back the digit it
3. Say “911.” heard followed by a tone. After
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” the last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
Digit Dial: This command allows a Using the “Digit Dial” Command
phone number to be dialed by Once connected, the person called
The digit dial command allows a will be heard through the audio
entering the digits one at a time.
phone number to be dialed by speakers.
Re-dial: This command is used to entering the digits one at a time.
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
Using the “Re-dial” Command Call Waiting 3. Use the “Dial” or “Call” command
to dial the number of the third
1. Press g. The system responds Call waiting must be supported on
party to be called.
“Ready,” followed by a tone. the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
press g to link all callers
system dials the last number . Press g to answer an incoming
called from the connected cell together.
call when another call is active.
phone. The original call is placed Ending a Call
Once connected, the person called on hold.
will be heard through the audio
Press c to end a call.
. Press g again to return to the
speakers. original call. Transferring a Call
Receiving a Call . To ignore the incoming call, no Audio can be transferred between
action is required. the Bluetooth system and the cell
When an incoming call is received,
phone.
the audio system mutes and a ring . Press c to disconnect the
tone is heard in the vehicle. The cell phone must be paired and
current call and switch to the call
connected with the Bluetooth
. Press g to answer the call. on hold.
system before a call can be
. Press c to ignore a call. Three-Way Calling transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
Three-way calling must be ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press g.
2. Say “Three-way call.”
To Transfer Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell Sending a Number or Name Tag
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone: During a Call
During a call with the audio in the 1. Press g. The system responds 1. Press g. The system responds
vehicle: “Ready,” followed by a tone. “Ready,” followed by a tone.
1. Press g. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” 2. Say “Dial.”
2. Say “Transfer Call.” 3. Say “Voice.” The system 3. Say the number or name tag
responds “OK, accessing to send.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
<phone name>.”
System from a Cell Phone Clearing the System
The cell phone's normal prompt
During a call with the audio on the Unless information is deleted out of
messages will go through their cycle
cell phone, press g. The audio according to the phone's operating the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions. will be retained indefinitely. This
does not transfer to the vehicle, use includes all phone pairing
the audio transfer feature on the cell Dual Tone Multi-Frequency information. For information on how
phone. See your cell phone (DTMF) Tones to delete this information, see
manufacturer's user guide for more “Deleting a Paired Phone.”
The Bluetooth system can send
information. numbers and the numbers stored as
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
Voice pass-thru allows access to the menu-driven phone system.
voice recognition commands on the Account numbers can also be
cell phone. See your cell phone stored for use.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
Trademarks and iPod and iPhone are trademarks of

Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
In Canada: Some deterioration of
service may occur in extreme
License Agreements the U.S. and other countries. northern latitudes. This is beyond
the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
FCC Information Radio.
See Radio Frequency Statement on Explicit Language Notice: Channels
page 13‑21 for more information with frequent explicit language are
regarding Part 15 of the Federal indicated with an “XL” preceding the
Communications Commission (FCC) channel name. Channel blocking is
rules and Industry Canada available for SiriusXM Satellite
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, Radio receivers by notifying
taxes, one time activation fee, and SiriusXM:
other fees may apply. Subscription . USA Customers — Visit
fee is consumer only. All fees
www.siriusxm.com or call
and programming subject to
1-866-635-2349.
change. Subscriptions subject to
. Canadian Customers — Visit
Customer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM® www.xmradio.ca or call
“Made for iPod” and “Made for service only available in the 1-877-209-0079.
iPhone” mean that an electronic 48 contiguous United States and
accessory has been designed to Canada.
connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, General Requirements:

disassemble, reverse engineer, 1. A License Agreement from
hack, manipulate, or otherwise SiriusXM is required for any
make available any technology or product that incorporates
software incorporated in receivers SiriusXM Technology and/or for
compatible with the SiriusXM® use of any of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio System or that marks to be manufactured,
support the SiriusXM website, the distributed, or marketed in the
Online Service or any of its content. SiriusXM service Area.
Furthermore, the AMBER voice
compression software included 2. For products to be distributed,
in this product is protected by marketed, and/or sold in
intellectual property rights including Canada, a separate agreement
patent rights, copyrights, and is required with Canadian
trade secrets of Digital Voice Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
Systems, Inc. SiriusXM Canada).
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base)

Dual Automatic Climate Control For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
System (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
1. Driver and Passenger 6. SYNC (Synchronized

Temperature Controls Temperature)
2. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated
3. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Seats (If Equipped)
4. Air Delivery Mode Control 8. AC (Air Conditioning)
5. OFF (Fan) 9. Defrost

8-2 Climate Controls
10. Rear Window Defogger warm weather. The recirculation passenger settings are adjusted, the
11. Recirculation light will not come on. Press @ to temperatures are unlinked and the
select recirculation; press it again to SYNC indicator turns off.
Automatic Operation select outside air. Manual Operation
The system automatically controls English units can be changed to
the fan speed, air delivery, air z 9 or 9 y (Fan Control):
metric units through the instrument Press the fan control buttons to
conditioning, and recirculation in cluster. See “Settings” under
order to heat or cool the vehicle to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. Press and hold the buttons to adjust
the desired temperature.
OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on speed more quickly. The fan speed
When the indicator light is on or or off. The temperature control and setting displays. Pressing either
AUTO is displayed on the screen, air delivery mode can still be button cancels automatic fan control
the system is in full automatic adjusted. and the fan can be controlled
operation. If the air delivery mode or manually. Press AUTO to return to
fan setting is manually adjusted, the w / x (Driver and Passenger automatic operation. To turn off the
auto indicator turns off and the Temperature Controls): The fan, press OFF.
display will show the selected temperature can be adjusted
settings. separately for the driver and the z N y (Air Delivery Mode
passenger. Press to increase or Control): Press the air delivery
For automatic operation: decrease the temperature. Press mode buttons to change the
1. Press AUTO. and hold to rapidly increase or direction of the airflow. Selecting
decrease the temperature. any of the air delivery modes
2. Set the temperature. Allow the cancels automatic air delivery
system time to stabilize. Then SYNC (Synchronized control and the direction of the
adjust the temperature as Temperature): Press SYNC to link airflow can be controlled manually.
needed for best comfort. all climate zone settings to the Press AUTO to return to automatic
driver settings. The SYNC indicator operation.
To improve fuel efficiency and to
will be lit. Adjust the driver side
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
temperature control to change the
may be automatically selected in
linked temperature. When the
To change the current mode, select A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to Pressing this button cancels
one of the following: turn the air conditioning on or off. automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside to return to automatic operation;
instrument panel outlets. temperature falls below freezing, the recirculation runs automatically as
air conditioner will not run. needed.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
Press AUTO to return to automatic Manual recirculation mode is not
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets. operation and the air conditioner available when in Defrost or Defog
runs as needed. When the indicator modes.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the light is on, the air conditioner runs Auto Defog: The climate control
floor outlets, with some air to the automatically to cool the air inside
windshield and side windows. system may have a sensor to
the vehicle or to dry the air needed automatically detect high humidity
- (Defog): Clears the windows of to defog the windshield faster. inside the vehicle. When high
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the Automatic Air Recirculation: humidity is detected, the climate
windshield, side windows and floor When the AUTO indicator light is control system may adjust to
outlets. Some air may go to the rear on, the air is automatically outside air supply and turn on the
floor outlets. recirculated as needed to help air conditioner. If the climate control
0 (Defrost): Press the 0 button quickly cool the inside of the system does not detect possible
to turn on or off. This clears the vehicle. window fogging, it returns to normal
windshield of fog or frost more @ (Recirculation): Press to operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
quickly. Air is directed to the alternate between recirculating air on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
windshield and side windows, with inside the vehicle or pulling in under Vehicle Personalization on
some air to the rear floor. outside air. The indicator light on the page 5‑43.
button is lit when recirculation mode
is active. This helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle or prevent
outside air and odors from entering.
Rear Window Defogger The upper region of gridlines on the Driver and Passenger Heated
rear window are antenna lines and Seats (If Equipped): Press M or L
= REAR (Rear Window are not intended to heat when the
Defogger): Press to turn the rear to heat the driver or passenger seat.
defogger is activated. See Heated Front Seats on
window defogger on or off.
The heated outside mirrors turn on page 3‑8.
The rear window defogger turns
when the rear window defogger Remote Start Climate Control
off automatically after about
button is on. They help to clear fog Operation: For vehicles with the
10 minutes. If turned on again it
or frost from the surface of the remote vehicle start feature, the
runs for about five minutes before
mirrors. climate control system may run
turning off. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear window defogger Notice: Do not try to clear frost when the vehicle is started remotely.
may stay on continuously. or other material from the inside The system uses the driver's
of the front windshield and rear previous settings to heat or cool the
The rear window defogger can be inside of the vehicle. See Remote
window with a razor blade or
set to automatic operation. See Vehicle Start on page 2‑9.
anything else that is sharp. This
“Climate and Air Quality” under
may damage the rear window The rear window defogger turns on
defogger grid and affect the if it is cold outside.
page 5‑43. When Auto Rear Defog
radio's ability to pick up stations
is selected, the rear window
clearly. The repairs would not be
defogger turns on automatically
covered by the vehicle warranty.
when the interior temperature is cold
and the outside temperature is
about 4°C (40°F) and below. The
auto rear defogger turns off
automatically after about
10 minutes. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear window defogger
may stay on continuously.
Sensors Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel)

The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust the
heating, cooling, and ventilation.
The solar sensor monitors the

solar heat.
The climate control system uses the Climate Control Buttons
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed, 1. Driver and Passenger 5. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
recirculation, and air delivery mode Temperature Controls 6. Defrost
for best comfort. 2. Fan Control 7. Rear Window Defogger
If the sensor is covered, the 3. OFF (Fan)
automatic climate control system 8. Recirculation
may not work properly. 4. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped)
Climate Control Touch Screen adjusted. The air delivery mode can
The fan, air delivery mode, A/C be adjusted on the climate control
mode, and SYNC settings can be status screen.
controlled by pressing CLIMATE on Automatic Operation
the infotainment home screen or the
climate button in the touch screen The system automatically controls
application tray. A selection can the fan speed, air delivery, air
then be made on the front climate conditioning, and recirculation in
control page displayed. See the order to heat or cool the vehicle to
infotainment manual. the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on or
Climate Control Status Screen AUTO is displayed on the touch
Climate Touch Screen Controls screen, the system is in full
1. Outside Air Temperature Display automatic operation. If the air
delivery mode or fan setting is
2. Driver and Passenger manually adjusted, the auto
Temperature Displays indicator turns off and the display
3. Fan Control will show the selected settings. Auto
operation can be turned off
4. SYNC (Synchronized individually for climate settings.
Temperature)
For automatic operation:
5. AC Mode (Air Conditioning)
1. Press AUTO.
6. Climate Control Selection
(Application Tray Button) 2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
7. Air Delivery Mode Control The climate control status screen adjust the temperature as
appears briefly when the climate needed for best comfort.
control buttons on the faceplate are
To improve fuel efficiency and to SYNC (Synchronized Air Delivery Mode Control: Press
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation Temperature): Press SYNC on the the CLIMATE touch screen button to
may be automatically selected in touch screen to link all climate zone select climate control. Press the air
warm weather. The recirculation settings to the driver settings. Adjust delivery mode touch screen button
light will not come on. Press @ to the driver side temperature control to change the direction of the
select recirculation; press it again to to change the linked temperature. airflow. The selected air delivery
select outside air. When the passenger settings are mode button is lit. Pressing any of
adjusted, the SYNC button is the air delivery buttons cancels
English units can be changed to displayed when the temperatures automatic air delivery control and
metric units through the instrument are unlinked. the direction of the airflow can be
cluster. See “Settings” under controlled manually. Press AUTO to
Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. Manual Operation return to automatic operation.
OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on z 9 or 9 y (Fan Control): To change the current mode, select
or off. The temperature control and Press the fan control buttons or the one of the following:
air delivery mode can still be touch screen fan control, to increase
adjusted. or decrease the fan speed. Press Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
and hold the buttons or the touch instrument panel outlets.
w / x (Driver and Passenger screen control to adjust speed more
Temperature Controls): The \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
quickly. The fan speed setting between the instrument panel
temperature can be adjusted displays. Pressing either button
separately for the driver and the outlets and the floor outlets.
cancels automatic fan control and
passenger. Press to increase or the fan can be controlled manually. [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
decrease the temperature. Press Press AUTO to return to automatic floor outlets, with some air to the
and hold to rapidly increase or operation. To turn off the fan and windshield and side windows.
decrease the temperature. climate control system, press and
hold the fan down button or touch
screen fan control until it is off.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of The climate control system may Auto Defog: The climate control
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the have a sensor to detect air pollution. system may have a sensor to
windshield, side windows and floor In auto recirculation control, the Air automatically detect high humidity
outlets. Some air may go to the rear Quality Control system may operate. inside the vehicle. When high
floor outlets. To adjust the sensitivity of the Air humidity is detected, the climate
Quality Control, see “Climate and control system may adjust to
0 (Defrost): Press the 0 button Air Quality” under Vehicle outside air supply and turn on the
to turn on or off. This clears the Personalization on page 5‑43. air conditioner. If the climate control
windshield of fog or frost more system does not detect possible
quickly. Air is directed to the @ (Recirculation): Press to window fogging, it returns to normal
windshield and side windows, with alternate between recirculating air
inside the vehicle or pulling in operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
some air to the rear floor. on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
outside air. The indicator light on the
A/C Mode (Air Conditioning): button is lit when recirculation mode under Vehicle Personalization on
Press the A/C Mode touch screen is active. This helps to quickly cool page 5‑43.
control to turn the automatic air the air inside the vehicle or prevent
conditioning on or off. If the fan Rear Window Defogger
outside air and odors from entering.
is turned off or the outside = REAR (Rear Window
temperature falls below freezing, the Pressing this button cancels Defogger): Press to turn the rear
air conditioner will not run. automatic recirculation. Press AUTO window defogger on or off.
to return to automatic operation;
Press AUTO to return to automatic recirculation runs automatically as The rear window defogger turns
operation and the air conditioner needed. off automatically after about
runs as needed. 10 minutes. If turned on again it
Manual recirculation mode is not runs for about five minutes before
Automatic Air Recirculation: available when in Defrost or Defog
When the AUTO indicator light is turning off. At higher vehicle
modes. speeds, the rear window defogger
on, the air is automatically
recirculated as needed to help may stay on continuously.
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
The rear window defogger can be Notice: Do not try to clear frost Sensors
set to automatic operation. See or other material from the inside
“Climate and Air Quality” under of the front windshield and rear
Vehicle Personalization on window with a razor blade or
page 5‑43. When Auto Rear Defog anything else that is sharp. This
is selected, the rear window may damage the rear window
defogger turns on automatically defogger grid and affect the
when the interior temperature is cold radio's ability to pick up stations
and the outside temperature is clearly. The repairs would not be
about 4°C (40°F) and below. The covered by the vehicle warranty.
auto rear defogger turns off Driver and Passenger Heated
automatically after about
10 minutes. At higher vehicle Seats (If Equipped): Press J or
speeds, the rear window defogger z to heat the driver or passenger
may stay on continuously. seat cushion and seatback. See
Heated Front Seats on page 3‑8. The solar sensor monitors the
The upper gridlines on the rear solar heat.
window are antenna lines and are Remote Start Climate Control
not intended to heat when the Operation: For vehicles with the The climate control system uses
defogger is activated. remote vehicle start feature, the the sensor information to adjust
climate control system may run the temperature, fan speed,
The heated outside mirrors turn on when the vehicle is started remotely. recirculation, and air delivery mode
when the rear window defogger The system uses the driver's for best comfort.
button is on. They help to clear fog previous settings to heat or cool the
or frost from the surface of the If the sensor is covered, the
inside of the vehicle. See Remote automatic climate control system
mirrors. Vehicle Start on page 2‑9. may not work properly.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Air Vents Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,
Adjustable air vents are in the
or leaves from air inlets at the
center and on the side of the
base of the windshield that could
instrument panel.
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
. Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside the
vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non-GM approved hood
Move the slats (2) to change the deflectors can adversely affect
direction of the airflow. the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
Additional air vents are beneath the adding equipment to the outside
windshield and the driver side and of the vehicle.
passenger side door windows.
These are fixed and cannot be
. Do not attach any devices to the
Use the thumbwheels (1) near the air vent slats. This restricts
adjusted.
air vents to open or close off the airflow and may cause damage
airflow. to the air vents.
Maintenance Service During service, all refrigerants

should be reclaimed with proper
This vehicle may have the new equipment. Venting refrigerants
Passenger Compartment environmentally friendly refrigerant, directly to the atmosphere is harmful
Air Filter R1234yf. This refrigerant has a to the environment and may also
significantly reduced global warming create unsafe conditions based on
The filter removes dust, pollen, and impact on the environment, inhalation, combustion, frostbite,
other airborne irritants from outside compared to the traditional or other health-based concerns.
air that is pulled into the vehicle. automotive refrigerant, R-134a. All
The filter should be replaced as part vehicles have a label underhood
of routine scheduled maintenance. that identifies the refrigerant used in
See Maintenance Schedule on the vehicle.
page 11‑3.
The refrigerant system should only
See your dealer regarding be serviced by trained and certified
replacement of the filter. technicians. The air conditioning
evaporator should never be repaired
or replaced by one from a salvage
vehicle. It should only be replaced
by a new evaporator to ensure
proper and safe operation.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Parking Brake (Manual) . . . . . . 9-33
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Operating Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-34
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Ride Control Systems

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Traction Control
Driving Information System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-38
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Cruise Control
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-42
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission
Racing or Other Competitive Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25 Driver Assistance Systems
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Driver Assistance
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Manual Transmission Assistance Systems for
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-28 Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Assistance Systems for
Drive Systems Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Brakes System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Starting and Operating Antilock Brake Active Emergency Braking
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Parking Brake (Electric) . . . . . . 9-30 Side Blind Zone
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-64 distractions.
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-65 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
California Fuel Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-65 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-66 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Filling a Portable Fuel governments have enacted laws driving.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Towing to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
General Towing to the floor.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Driving Characteristics and keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Trailer Towing (With . Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Trailer Towing (With L4 Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
Conversions and Add-Ons . Watch the road. Do not read,
Add-On Electrical take notes, or look up
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 information on phones or other
electronic devices.

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ WARNING between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the Infotainment manual drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
and Infotainment section for more tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
information on using that system, time. Actually doing it is
including pairing and using a cell { WARNING reaction time.
phone
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive Driving that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected.” The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3‑11. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
If the engine ever stops while the If the vehicle seems harder to steer See specific vehicle steering
vehicle is being driven, brake than normal when parking or driving messages under Vehicle Messages
normally but do not pump the slowly, there may be a problem with on page 5‑32.
brakes. Doing so could make the the system. You will still have power See your dealer if there is a
pedal harder to push down. If the steering, but steering will be stiffer problem.
engine stops, there will be some than normal at slow speeds. See
power brake assist but it will be your dealer for service. Curve Tips
used when the brake is applied. .
Electric Power Steering Take curves at a reasonable
Once the power assist is used up, it
speed.
can take longer to stop and the Your vehicle has electric power
brake pedal will be harder to push. steering. It does not have power . Reduce speed before entering a
steering fluid. Regular maintenance curve.
Steering is not required. . Maintain a reasonable steady
If power steering assist is lost due speed through the curve.
Variable Effort Steering
to a system malfunction, the vehicle . Wait until the vehicle is out of
Some vehicles have a steering can be steered, but may require the curve before accelerating
system that varies the amount of increased effort. See your dealer if gently into the straightaway.
effort required to steer the vehicle in there is a problem.
relation to the speed of the vehicle. Steering in Emergencies
If the steering wheel is turned until it
The amount of steering effort reaches the end of its travel and is . There are some situations when
required is less at slower speeds held against that position for an steering around a problem may
to make the vehicle more extended period of time, power be more effective than braking.
maneuverable and easier to park. At steering assist may be reduced.
faster speeds, the steering effort
. Holding both sides of the
increases to provide a sport-like feel Normal use of the power steering steering wheel allows you to turn
to the steering. This provides assist should return when the 180 degrees without removing
maximum control and stability. system cools down. a hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS) 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
allows steering while braking. one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not
Off-Road Recovery pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Turn the steering wheel to go skids are always possible.
straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and steer the
way you want the vehicle to go.
There are three types of skids that The vehicle may straighten out.
correspond to the vehicle's three Be ready for a second skid if it
control systems: occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
rolling. driving according to weather
. Steering or Cornering Skid — conditions. Stopping distance
The vehicle's right wheels can drop too much speed or steering in a can be longer and vehicle
off the edge of a road onto the curve causes tires to slip and control can be affected when
shoulder while driving. Follow lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
these tips: snow, ice, gravel, or other
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
1. Ease off the accelerator and throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
then, if there is nothing in the wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
way, steer the vehicle so that it snow on the road to make a
straddles the edge of the mirrored surface — and slow
pavement. down when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering, For 2.0L Turbo Engine Only: Notice: Low oil levels can
acceleration, or braking, damage the engine. If using the
including reducing vehicle speed
. Keep the level at or near 1 L
(1 qt) above the upper mark that vehicle for competitive driving,
by shifting to a lower gear. Any the engine may use more oil than
sudden changes could cause shows the proper operating
range on the engine oil dipstick. it would with normal use. Check
the tires to slide. the oil level often during
Remember: Antilock brakes help
. A 600 W fan in addition to the competitive driving.
avoid only the braking skid. production option V03.
For vehicles equipped with front
. RON 104 premium fuel must be Brembo brake systems:
Racing or Other used with colder spark plugs. . Performance/racing brake pads
Competitive Driving See your dealer.
are required prior to racing or
Competitive driving may affect the For 3.6L Engine Only: closed track driving. Vehicles
vehicle warranty. See the warranty . Keep the level at or near 0.5 L with option code Y4Q have
book before using the vehicle for (0.5 qt) above the upper mark performance brake pads.
competitive driving. that shows the proper operating . Before racing, replace existing
Notice: Low oil levels can range on the engine oil dipstick. brake fluid with a qualified
damage the engine. If using the . Install an engine oil cooler kit, racing brake fluid from a sealed
vehicle for competitive driving, including engine oil cooler lines container. Brake fluid with a dry
the engine may use more oil than and oil filter adapter. boiling point >279°C (534°F) is
it would with normal use. Check qualified. If racing brake fluid is
. Install a heavy duty fan. This used, replace it with GM
the oil level often during requires electrical changes to
competitive driving. approved brake fluid before
the vehicle. Contact your dealer. driving on public roads. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13.
. Do not use silicone-based fluids.
If racing brake fluid is in the vehicle Hydroplaning

and the age of the brake fluid is { WARNING Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
over a month old or unknown,
Wet brakes can cause crashes. can build up under the vehicle's
replace the brake fluid before
They might not work as well in a tires so they actually ride on the
racing/closed track driving.
quick stop and could cause water. This can happen if the road is
. The rear axle lubricant should be pulling to one side. You could wet enough and you are going fast
replaced with new lubricant. lose control of the vehicle. enough. When the vehicle is
. Additional cooling capacity is hydroplaning, it has little or no
After driving through a large contact with the road.
also required for continuous
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
competitive driving. There is no hard and fast rule about
wash, lightly apply the brake
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
pedal until the brakes work
Driving on Wet Roads normally.
slow down when the road is wet.
Rain and wet roads can reduce Other Rainy Weather Tips
Flowing or rushing water creates
vehicle traction and affect your
strong forces. Driving through Besides slowing down, other wet
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the weather driving tips include:
of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this . Allow extra following distance.
driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
. Pass with caution.
deep‐standing or flowing water.
ignore police warnings and be . Keep windshield wiping
very cautious about trying to drive equipment in good shape.
through flowing water. . Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper
Hill and Mountain Roads
tread depth. See Tires on { WARNING
page 10‑42. Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
. Turn off cruise control.
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for or with the ignition off is
driving in these conditions include: dangerous. The brakes will have
Highway Hypnosis to do all the work of slowing down
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in
Always be alert and pay attention to good shape. and they could get so hot that
your surroundings while driving. they would not work well. You
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, would then have poor braking or
safe place to park the vehicle tires, cooling system, and even none going down a hill.
and rest. transmission. Steering may also be affected
. Shift to a lower gear when going when ignition is off. You could
Other driving tips include:
down steep or long hills. crash. Always have the engine
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
running and the vehicle in gear
. Keep the interior
temperature cool.
{ WARNING when going downhill.
. Keep your eyes moving — scan If you do not shift down, the . Stay in your own lane. Do not
the road ahead and to the sides. brakes could get so hot that they
swing wide or cut across the
would not work well. You would
. Check the rearview mirror and center of the road. Drive at
then have poor braking or even speeds that let you stay in your
vehicle instruments often. none going down a hill. You could own lane.
crash. Shift down to let the engine
. Be alert on top of hills;
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope. something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction. See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive on page 9‑29.
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
no-passing zones) and take Turn off cruise control, on slippery
surface under the tires even more. surfaces.
appropriate action.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves vehicle stability during Blizzard Conditions
Winter Driving hard stops on slippery roads, but Being stuck in snow can be a
Driving on Snow or Ice apply the brakes sooner than when serious situation. Stay with the
on dry pavement. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
Drive carefully when there is snow If possible, use Roadside Service.
or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for See Roadside Service (Mexico) on
road, creating less traction or grip. page 13‑7 or Roadside Service
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑10.
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to To get help and keep everyone in
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy the vehicle safe:
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be when the surrounding roads are . Turn on the hazard warning
treated with salt or sand. clear. Avoid sudden steering flashers.
maneuvers and braking while
Drive with caution, whatever the . Tie a red cloth to an outside
on ice.
condition. Accelerate gently so mirror.
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
If it takes some time for help to

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This
cause exhaust gases to get panel. keeps the battery charged to restart
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little
cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems” in
the Index. Slowly and cautiously spin the
. Clear away snow from around wheels to free the vehicle when
the base of your vehicle, For more information about stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
especially any that is blocking carbon monoxide, see Engine
If stuck too severely for the traction
the exhaust pipe. Exhaust on page 9‑24.
system to free the vehicle, turn the
. Check again from time to traction system off and use the
time to be sure snow does To save fuel, run the engine for only rocking method. See Traction
not collect there. short periods as needed to warm Control System (TCS) on
the vehicle and then shut the engine page 9‑34.
. Open a window about 5 cm off and close the window most of
(2 in) on the side of the the way to save heat. Repeat this
vehicle that is away from the until help arrives but only when you
wind to bring in fresh air. feel really uncomfortable from the
(Continued) cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the

{ WARNING forward and reverse directions { WARNING
causes a rocking motion that could
If the vehicle's tires spin at high free the vehicle. If that does not get Do not load the vehicle any
speed, they can explode, and you the vehicle out after a few tries, it heavier than the Gross
or others could be injured. The might need to be towed out. If the Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle can overheat, causing an vehicle does need to be towed out, (GVWR), or either the
engine compartment fire or other see Towing the Vehicle on maximum front or rear Gross
damage. Spin the wheels as little page 10‑78. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
as possible and avoid going This can cause systems to
above 56 km/h (35 mph). Vehicle Load Limits break and change the way the
It is very important to know how vehicle handles. This could
Rocking the Vehicle to Get much weight the vehicle can cause loss of control and a
it Out carry. This weight is called the crash. Overloading can also
Turn the steering wheel left and vehicle capacity weight and shorten the life of the vehicle.
right to clear the area around the includes the weight of all
front wheels. Turn off any traction occupants, cargo, and all
system. Shift back and forth nonfactory-installed options.
between R (Reverse) and a low Two labels on the vehicle show
forward gear, spinning the wheels how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
properly carry, the Tire and
wheels stop spinning before shifting Loading Information label and
gears. Release the accelerator the Certification label.
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Tire and Loading Information A vehicle-specific Tire and Rating (GAWR) for the front and
Label Loading Information label is rear axle. See “Certification
attached to the vehicle's center Label” later in this section.
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and
Steps for Determining Correct
Loading Information label shows
Load Limit
the number of occupant seating
positions (1), and the maximum 1. Locate the statement “The
vehicle capacity weight (2) in combined weight of
kilograms and pounds. occupants and cargo should
The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
Information label also shows
placard.
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (3) and the 2. Determine the combined
Label Example recommended cold tire inflation weight of the driver and
pressures (4). For more passengers that will be riding
1. Number of Occupant Seating
Positions information on tires and inflation in your vehicle.
see Tires on page 10‑42 and 3. Subtract the combined
2. Maximum Vehicle Capacity Tire Pressure on page 10‑50.
Weight weight of the driver and
There is also important loading passengers from XXX kg or
3. Size of the Original Equipment
Tires information on the Certification XXX lbs.
label. It tells you the Gross
4. Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Inflation Pressure
and the Gross Axle Weight
4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing

the available amount of cargo a trailer, the load from your
and luggage load capacity. trailer will be transferred to
For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle. Consult this
amount equals 1400 lbs and manual to determine how this
there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo
passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity of
the amount of available cargo your vehicle.
and luggage load capacity is See Trailer Towing (With
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) V6 Engine) on page 9‑73 or
= 650 lbs). Trailer Towing (With L4 Engine)
5. Determine the combined on page 9‑74 for important Example 1
weight of luggage and cargo information on towing a trailer, 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
being loaded on the vehicle. towing safety rules, and Example 1 = 453 kg
That weight may not safely trailering tips. (1,000 lbs).
exceed the available cargo
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
and luggage load capacity
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
calculated in Step 4.
(300 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the vehicle's
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar). The label
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and tells the gross weight capacity of
Loading Information label for the vehicle, called the Gross
specific information about the Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
vehicle's capacity weight and The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed If you put things inside the
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the vehicle — like suitcases, tools, WARNING (Continued)
Gross Axle Weight Rating packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
(GAWR) for either the front or else — they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
rear axle. vehicle goes. If you have to stop inside the vehicle so that
And, if there is a heavy load, it or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above
should be spread out. See crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this { WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
section. Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
strike and injure people in a
{ WARNING sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded
heavier than the Gross . Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
Vehicle Weight Rating area of the vehicle. In the
(GVWR), or either the cargo area, put them as
maximum front or rear Gross far forward as possible.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Try to spread the weight
This can cause systems to evenly.
break and change the way the (Continued)
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.

. Do not let the engine labor.
Starting and Never lug the engine in high
Ignition Positions
Operating gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to the
New Vehicle Break-In next lower gear. This rule
applies at all times, not just
Follow these recommended during the break-in period.
guidelines during the first . Check engine oil with every
2 414 km (1,500 mi) of driving this
refueling and add if necessary.
vehicle. Parts have a break-in
Oil and fuel consumption may be
period and performance will be
higher than normal during the
better in the long run.
first 2 414 km (1,500 mi).
For the first 2 414 km (1,500 mi): . New brake linings also need a
. Avoid full throttle starts and break-in period. Avoid making
abrupt stops. hard stops during the first The vehicle has an electronic
. Do not exceed 4000 engine rpm. 322 km (200 mi). This is keyless ignition with pushbutton
recommended every time brake start.
. Avoid driving at any one linings are replaced.
constant speed, fast or slow. Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,
. Avoid downshifting to brake or
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the
slow the vehicle when the
Engine/OFF.
engine speed will exceed
4000 rpm.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Transmission while attempting to start the vehicle.
transmitter must be in the vehicle If the vehicle is not in P (Park), If this does not work, the vehicle
for the system to operate. If the the ignition will return to ACC/ needs service.
pushbutton start is not working, the ACCESSORY and display a Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle may be near a strong radio message in the Driver Information vehicle is moving. This will cause a
antenna signal causing interference Center (DIC). See Transmission loss of power assist in the brake
to the keyless access system. See Messages on page 5‑42. When the and steering systems and disable
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) vehicle is shifted into P (Park), the the airbags.
System Operation on page 2‑3. ignition system will switch to OFF. If the vehicle must be shut off in an
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle emergency:
must be in ON/RUN and the brake Manual Transmission
pedal must be applied. If the vehicle is stationary, the 1. Brake using a firm and steady
ignition will turn OFF, and Retained pressure. Do not pump the
Stopping the Engine/OFF (No brakes repeatedly. This may
Indicator Lights): When the Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory deplete power assist, requiring
vehicle is stopped, press the increased brake pedal force.
ENGINE START/STOP button once Power (RAP) on page 9‑21.
to turn the engine off. The vehicle may have an electric 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
steering column lock. The lock is This can be done while the
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the vehicle is moving. After shifting
ignition will turn off, and Retained activated when the vehicle is
switched to OFF and either front to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain brakes and steer the vehicle to a
active. See Retained Accessory door is opened. A sound may be
heard as the lock actuates or safe location.
Power (RAP) on page 9‑21.
releases. The steering column lock 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
may not release with the wheels to P (Park) with an automatic
turned off center. If this happens, transmission, or Neutral with a
the vehicle may not start. Move the manual transmission. Turn the
steering wheel from left to right ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Set the parking brake. See ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber See Starting the Engine on
Parking Brake (Electric) on Indicator Light): This mode page 9‑19. The ignition will then
page 9‑30 or Parking Brake allows you to use some electrical remain in ON/RUN.
(Manual) on page 9‑33. accessories when the engine is off.
Service Only Mode
With the ignition off, pressing the
{ WARNING button one time without the brake This power mode is available for
service and diagnostics, and to
pedal applied will place the ignition
Turning off the vehicle while system in ACC/ACCESSORY. verify the proper operation of the
moving may cause loss of power malfunction indicator lamp as may
assist in the brake and steering The ignition will switch from ACC/ be required for emission inspection
systems and disable the airbags. ACCESSORY to OFF after purposes. With the vehicle off, and
While driving, only shut the five minutes to prevent battery the brake pedal not applied,
rundown. pressing and holding the button for
vehicle off in an emergency.
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator more than five seconds will place
Light): This mode is for driving and the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, starting. With the ignition off, and The instruments and audio systems
and must be shut off while driving, the brake pedal applied, pressing will operate as they do in ON/RUN,
press and hold the ENGINE START/ the button once will place the but the vehicle will not be able to be
STOP button for longer than ignition system in ON/RUN/START. driven. The engine will not start in
two seconds, or press twice within Once engine cranking begins, Service Only Mode. Push the button
five seconds. release the button. Engine cranking again to turn the vehicle off.
will continue until the engine starts.
Starting the Engine Manual Transmission If the transmitter is not in the

vehicle or something is
Place the transmission in the The shift lever should be in Neutral
interfering with the transmitter,
proper gear. and the parking brake engaged.
the Driver Information Center
Hold the clutch pedal down to the
Automatic Transmission (DIC) will display a message.
floor and start the engine. The
See Remote Keyless Entry
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or vehicle will not start if the clutch
(RKE) System Operation on
N (Neutral). The engine will not start pedal is not all the way down.
page 2‑3 and Key and Lock
in any other position. To restart the Starting Procedure (Keyless Messages on page 5‑36.
vehicle when it is already moving, Access)
use N (Neutral) only. If the battery in the keyless
1. If the vehicle has the keyless access transmitter needs
Notice: Do not try to shift to access system, the transmitter replacing, a DIC message
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. must be in the vehicle. Put your displays. The vehicle can
If you do, you could damage the foot on the brake pedal and still be driven. See “Starting the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) push the ENGINE START/STOP Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
only when the vehicle is stopped. button. When the engine begins Battery” in Remote Keyless
Notice: If you add electrical parts cranking, let go of the button. Entry (RKE) System Operation
or accessories, you could change on page 2‑3.
The idle speed will go down as
the way the engine operates. Any the engine gets warm. Do not
resulting damage would not be race the engine immediately
covered by the vehicle warranty. after starting it. Operate the
See Add-On Electrical Equipment engine and transmission gently
on page 9‑75. to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Notice: Cranking the engine for briefly but then stops again, do
Computer-Controlled Cranking long periods of time, by pressing the same thing. This clears the
System. This feature assists in the START button immediately extra gasoline from the engine.
starting the engine and protects after cranking has ended, can Do not race the engine
components. If the START overheat and damage the immediately after starting it.
button is pressed, and then cranking motor, and drain the Operate the engine and
released when the engine battery. Wait at least 15 seconds transmission gently until the oil
begins cranking, the engine will between each try, to let the warms up and lubricates all
continue cranking for a few cranking motor cool down. moving parts.
seconds or until the vehicle 2. If the engine does not start after
starts. If the engine does not five to 10 seconds, especially in Engine Heater
start and the button is pressed very cold weather (below −18°C
for many seconds, cranking will Vehicles with the engine coolant
or 0°F), it could be flooded with heater can use this option in
be stopped after 15 seconds to too much gasoline. Try pushing
prevent cranking motor damage. cold weather conditions at or
the accelerator pedal all the way below −18°C (0°F) for easier
To prevent gear damage, this to the floor and holding it there
system also prevents cranking if starting and better fuel economy
as you press the START button, during engine warm-up. Plug in the
the engine is already running. for up to a maximum of
Engine cranking can be stopped coolant heater at least four hours
15 seconds. Wait at least before starting your vehicle. An
by pressing the START button a 15 seconds between each try, to
second time. internal thermostat in the plug-end
allow the cranking motor to cool of the cord may exist which will
down. When the engine starts, prevent engine coolant heater
let go of the button and the operation at temperatures above
accelerator. If the vehicle starts −18°C (0°F).
To Use the Engine Coolant 4. Before starting the engine, be Shifting Into Park
Heater sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
(Automatic Transmission)
1. Turn off the engine. away from moving engine parts. Use this procedure to shift into
2. Open the hood and unwrap the If you do not, it could be P (Park):
electrical cord. The cord is damaged.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
clipped to the diagonal brace on Contact your dealer for information set the parking brake.
the passenger side of the engine on how long to use the heater in
compartment. See Parking Brake (Electric) on
your particular area.
page 9‑30 or Parking Brake
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded (Manual) on page 9‑33.
110-volt AC outlet. Retained Accessory
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
Power (RAP)
{ WARNING These accessories can be used
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the lever
Plugging the cord into an after the engine is turned off: all the way toward the front of
ungrounded outlet could cause an the vehicle.
. Audio system (up to 10 minutes
electrical shock. Also, the wrong or driver door is opened). 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
kind of extension cord could . Power windows, sunroof 4. Take the keyless access
overheat and cause a fire. You transmitter with you.
(if equipped), and power outlets
could be seriously injured. Plug (up to 10 minutes or any door is
the cord into a properly grounded opened).
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Leaving the Vehicle with the and then shift into P (Park). To find
Engine Running (Automatic WARNING (Continued) out how, see "Shifting Into Park"
Transmission) listed previously.
If you are towing a trailer, see
Driving Characteristics and If torque lock does occur, the
{ WARNING Towing Tips on page 9‑70. vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
It can be dangerous to leave the the parking pawl pressure, so you
vehicle with the engine running. If you have to leave the vehicle with can shift out of P (Park).
It could overheat and catch fire. the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking brake Shifting out of Park
It is dangerous to get out of the set. After shifting into P (Park), try to
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully move the shift lever without first This vehicle is equipped with an
in P (Park) with the parking brake pushing the button on the shift lever. electronic shift lock release system.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. The shift lock release is designed to
If you can, the shift lever was not prevent movement of the shift lever
Do not leave the vehicle when the fully locked into P (Park). out of P (Park), unless the ignition is
engine is running. If you have left in ON/RUN and the brake pedal is
the engine running, the vehicle Torque Lock (Automatic
Transmission) applied.
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the Torque lock is when the weight of The shift lock release is always
vehicle will not move, even when the vehicle puts too much force on functional except in the case of an
you are on fairly level ground, the parking pawl in the uncharged or low voltage (less than
transmission. This happens when 9 volt) battery.
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). parking on a hill and shifting the If the vehicle has an uncharged
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic transmission into P (Park) is not battery or a battery with low voltage,
Transmission) on page 9‑21. done properly and then it is difficult try charging or jump starting the
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent battery. See Jump Starting on
(Continued) torque lock, set the parking brake page 10‑75.
To shift out of P (Park): Parking Parking over Things

1. Apply the brake pedal. If the vehicle has a manual That Burn
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. transmission, before getting out of
3. Release the parking brake. See
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse) if parking on a downhill
{ WARNING
Parking Brake (Electric) on slope. On a level surface or an Things that can burn could touch
uphill slope, use 1 (First) gear. Apply hot exhaust parts under the
(Manual) on page 9‑33. the parking brake. Turn the wheels vehicle and ignite. Do not park
4. Press the shift lever button. toward the curb for a downhill slope, over papers, leaves, dry grass,
5. Move the shift lever. or away from the curb for an uphill or other things that can burn.
slope. Once the shift lever has been
If unable to shift out of P (Park): placed into gear with the clutch
1. Fully release the shift lever pedal pressed in, turn the ignition to
button. LOCK/OFF, and release the clutch.
2. While holding down the brake If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
pedal, press the shift lever is pulling a trailer, see Driving
button again. Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑70.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the shift lever will not move from
P (Park), consult your dealer or a
professional towing service.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
can cause unconsciousness and be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
if it is suspected that exhaust is Transmission) on page 9‑21 and
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: Engine Exhaust on page 9‑24. If the
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows vehicle has a manual transmission,
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. see Parking on page 9‑23.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired If parking on a hill and pulling a
that may block underbody immediately. trailer, see Driving Characteristics
airflow or tail pipes). and Towing Tips on page 9‑70.
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Automatic { WARNING
from P (Park) with the ignition in ON/
RUN. If you cannot shift out of
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully way into P (Park) as you maintain
in P (Park) with the parking brake brake application. Then press the
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. shift lever button and move the shift
Do not leave the vehicle when the lever into another gear. See Shifting
engine is running. If you have left out of Park on page 9‑22.
the engine running, the vehicle Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
can move suddenly. You or others while the vehicle is moving
could be injured. To be sure the forward could damage the
vehicle will not move, even when transmission. The repairs would
you are on fairly level ground, not be covered by the vehicle
always set the parking brake and warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
move the shift lever to P (Park). after the vehicle is stopped.
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic R (Reverse): Use this gear to
P (Park): This position locks the Transmission) on page 9‑21 and back up.
rear wheels. Use this position when Driving Characteristics and
starting the engine because the At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)
Towing Tips on page 9‑70. can be used to rock the vehicle
vehicle cannot move easily.
back and forth to get out of snow,
Make sure the shift lever is fully in ice, or sand without damaging the
P (Park) before starting the engine. transmission. See If the Vehicle Is
The vehicle has an electronic shift Stuck on page 9‑10.
lock release system. Fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before shifting
N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for Manual Mode
engine does not connect with the normal driving. It provides the best
wheels. To restart when the vehicle fuel economy. If you need more Driver Shift Control (DSC)
is already moving, use N (Neutral) power for passing, and you are: Notice: Driving with the engine at
only. You can also use N (Neutral) . Going less than 55 km/h a high rpm without upshifting
when the vehicle is being towed. (35 mph), push the accelerator while using Driver Shift Control
pedal about halfway down. (DSC), could damage the vehicle.
{ WARNING . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
Always upshift when necessary
more, push the accelerator all while using DSC.
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is the way down.
dangerous. Unless your foot is The transmission will shift down
firmly on the brake pedal, the to a lower gear and have more
vehicle could move very rapidly. power.
You could lose control and hit Downshifting the transmission in
people or objects. Do not shift slippery road conditions could result
into a drive gear while the engine in skidding; see “Skidding” under
is running at high speed. Loss of Control on page 9‑5.
Notice: Spinning the tires or
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or holding the vehicle in one place
N (Neutral) with the engine on a hill using only the
running at high speed may accelerator pedal may damage
damage the transmission. The the transmission. If you are stuck, Vehicles with DSC may either use
repairs would not be covered by do not spin the tires. When the shift lever or the tap shift
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the stopping on a hill, use the brakes controls on the back of the steering
engine is not running at high to hold the vehicle in place. wheel (if equipped) to manually shift
speed when shifting the vehicle. the automatic transmission.
To use DSC using the shift lever: Tap Shift 2. Pull the control toward you to
1. Move the shift lever to the left shift. Pull the left control to
from D (Drive) to M (Manual (−) downshift, and the right
Mode). The transmission will be control to (+) upshift.
in Manual Mode and will hold the 3. To cancel DSC, move the shift
current gear. lever back to D (Drive).
2. Move the shift lever forward to Tap Shift Mode can also be used
upshift or rearward to downshift. temporarily while driving in
3. To cancel DSC, move the shift D (Drive). Pull either the (+) upshift
lever back to D (Drive). or (−) downshift control.
To cancel Tap Shift Mode, hold
the (+) upshift control for
two seconds. If no action is taken,
If equipped, the tap shift controls the vehicle returns to automatic
are on the back of the steering shifting after a brief period of driving
wheel. at a steady speed, or when the
vehicle comes to a stop.
To use DSC using the tap shift
controls: While using the DSC feature, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker
1. Move the shift lever to the left shifting. This can be used for sport
from D (Drive) to M (Manual driving, climbing or descending hills,
Mode). The transmission will be staying in gear longer, downshifting
in Manual Mode and will hold the for more power, or engine braking.
current gear.
The transmission will only allow Manual Transmission 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
shifting into gears appropriate for and let up on the accelerator pedal,
the vehicle speed and engine If the vehicle has a manual then shift into 2 (Second). Then,
revolutions per minute (rpm). The transmission, the shift lever is slowly let up on the clutch pedal
transmission will not automatically located on the center console while accelerating.
shift to the next lower or higher gear between the front seats.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and
if the engine rpm is too high or 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
too low. 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the
If shifting is prevented for any same as 2 (Second).
reason, a DIC message will appear. To stop, let up on the accelerator
See Transmission Messages on pedal and press the brake pedal.
page 5‑42. Just before the vehicle stops, press
When accelerating the vehicle from the clutch pedal and the brake
a stop in snowy and icy conditions, pedal, and shift to Neutral.
it is suggested to shift into second Neutral: Use this position when
gear. A higher gear allows the you start or idle the engine. The
vehicle to gain more traction on shift lever is in Neutral when it is
slippery surfaces. See Driver Mode centered in the shift pattern, not in
Control on page 9‑37. any gear.
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal R (Reverse): To back up, press
and shift into 1 (First). Slowly let up down the clutch pedal, completely
on the clutch pedal while pressing stop the vehicle, and shift into
on the accelerator pedal. R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
After a complete stop, if it is hard to pedal slowly while pressing the
shift into 1 (First), let up on the accelerator pedal.
clutch pedal, then press it back
down and shift into 1 (First).
{ WARNING Drive Systems Brakes

If you skip a gear when you All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake
downshift, you could lose control System (ABS)
Vehicles with this feature always
of the vehicle. You could injure send engine power to all four
yourself or others. Do not shift This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels. It is fully automatic, and System (ABS), an advanced
down more than one gear at a adjusts itself as needed for road
time when you downshift. electronic braking system that helps
conditions. prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
Notice: If you skip more than one
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
gear when you downshift, or if
checks itself. A momentary motor or
you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
downshifting, you could damage
even be noticed that the brake
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
the transmission. Do not skip
gears or race the engine when
downshifting.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑20.
If driving safely on a wet road and it there will not be enough time to Parking Brake (Electric)
becomes necessary to slam on the apply the brakes if that vehicle
brakes and continue braking to suddenly slows or stops. Always
avoid a sudden obstacle, a leave enough room up ahead to
computer senses that the wheels stop, even with ABS.
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the Using ABS
computer will separately work the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
brakes at each wheel. the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS can change the brake pressure ABS work. You might hear the ABS
to each wheel, as required, faster pump or motor operating and feel
than any driver could. This can help the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
the driver steer around the obstacle normal.
while braking hard. Braking in Emergencies Automatic Transmission
As the brakes are applied, the ABS allows the driver to steer and
computer keeps receiving updates brake at the same time. In many
on wheel speed and controls emergencies, steering can help
braking pressure accordingly. more than even the very best
Remember: ABS does not change braking.
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
Manual Transmission
The vehicle may have an Electric EPB Apply If the parking brake status light
Parking Brake (EPB). The switch flashes continuously, then the EPB
The EPB can be applied any time
for the EPB is on the center console is only partially applied or released,
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
for vehicles with a manual or there is a problem with the EPB.
applied by momentarily lifting up on
transmission, or on the left side of A DIC message will be displayed.
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the instrument panel for vehicles If this light flashes continuously,
the parking brake status light will be
with an automatic transmission. The release the EPB, and attempt to
on. While the brake is being applied,
EPB can always be activated, even apply it again. If this light continues
the status light will flash until it is
if the ignition is off. To prevent to flash, do not drive the vehicle.
fully applied. If the light does not
draining the battery, avoid repeated See your dealer.
come on, or remains flashing, you
cycles of the EPB system when the If the parking brake warning light is
need to have the vehicle serviced.
engine is not running. on, the EPB has detected an
Do not drive the vehicle if the
The system has a parking brake parking brake status light is flashing. internal error, or a fault in another
status light and a parking brake See your dealer. See Parking Brake system, and is operating with
warning light. See Parking Brake Light on page 5‑19. reduced functionality. To apply the
Light on page 5‑19 and Service EPB when this light is on, lift up on
If the EPB is applied while the
Electric Parking Brake Light on the EPB switch and hold it in the up
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
page 5‑19. There are also parking position. Full application of the
sound, and a DIC message will be
brake related Driver Information parking brake by the EPB system
displayed. The vehicle will
Center (DIC) messages. See Brake may take a longer period of time
decelerate as long as the switch is
System Messages on page 5‑33. In than normal when this light is on.
held in the up position. Releasing
case of insufficient electrical power, Continue to hold the switch until the
the EPB switch during deceleration
the EPB cannot be applied or parking brake status light remains
will release the parking brake. If the
released. on. If the parking brake warning light
switch is held in the up position until
Before leaving the vehicle, check is on, see your dealer.
the vehicle comes to a stop, the
the parking brake status light to EPB will remain applied.
ensure that the parking brake is
applied.
The vehicle may automatically apply If the parking brake warning light is Automatic EPB Release
the EPB in some situations when on, the EPB has detected an error
The EPB will automatically release if
the vehicle is not moving. This is in another system and is operating
the vehicle is running, placed into
normal, and is done to periodically with reduced functionality. To
gear, and an attempt is made to
check the correct operation of the release the EPB when this light is
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
EPB system. on, push down on the EPB switch
when the EPB is applied, to
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear and hold it in the down position.
preserve parking brake lining life.
wheels should be blocked to EPB release may take a longer
period of time than normal when this The EPB can also be used to
prevent vehicle movement.
light is on. Continue to hold the prevent roll back for vehicles with
EPB Release switch until the parking brake status a manual transmission taking off on
light is off. If the light is on, see your a hill. In a situation where no roll
To release the EPB, place the back is desired, an applied EPB will
dealer.
ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or allow both feet to be used for the
ON/RUN position, apply and hold Notice: Driving with the parking
clutch and accelerator pedals in
the brake pedal, and push down brake on can overheat the brake
preparation for starting the vehicle
momentarily on the EPB switch. system and cause premature
moving in the intended direction.
If you attempt to release the EPB wear or damage to brake system
without the brake pedal applied, a parts. Make sure that the parking In this situation, perform the normal
chime will sound, and a DIC brake is fully released and the clutch and/or accelerator actions
message will be displayed. The brake warning light is off before required to begin moving the
EPB is released when the parking driving. vehicle. There is no need to push
brake status light is off. the switch to release the EPB.
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑70.
Parking Brake (Manual) Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the
driving. stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The
foot up off the parking brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake
If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake
To set the parking brake, hold the
when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the
regular brake pedal down, then
system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates.
push the parking brake pedal down.
a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsation or
If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time is
system warning light will come on. normal and the driver should
If you are towing a trailer and are
See Brake System Warning Light on continue to apply the brake pedal
parking on a hill, see Driving
page 5‑18. as the driving situation dictates.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑70. The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems TCS is on whenever the vehicle
is started. To limit wheel spin,
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist especially in slippery road
(HSA) feature, which may be useful Traction Control conditions, the system should
when the vehicle is stopped on a System (TCS) always be left on. But, TCS can be
grade. This feature is designed to turned off if needed.
prevent the vehicle from rolling, The vehicle has TCS, which limits
either forward or rearward, during wheel spin. This is especially useful
vehicle drive off. After the driver in slippery road conditions. On a
completely stops and holds the rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system
vehicle in a complete standstill on a operates if it senses that one or
grade, HSA will be automatically both of the rear wheels are spinning
activated. During the transition or beginning to lose traction. On an
period between when the driver all—wheel—drive vehicle, the TCS/StabiliTrak Light
releases the brake pedal and starts system will operate if it senses that d flashes to indicate that the TCS is
to accelerate to drive off on a grade, any of the wheels are spinning or active.
HSA holds the braking pressure to beginning to lose traction. When this
ensure that there is no rolling. The happens, the system brakes the If there is a problem detected with
brakes will automatically release spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces TCS, a message may be displayed
when the accelerator pedal is engine power to limit wheel spin. on the Driver Information Center
applied within the two-second (DIC). See Ride Control System
The system may be heard or felt Messages on page 5‑40. When
window. It will not activate if the while it is working, but this is
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing one of these messages is displayed
normal.
downhill, or if the vehicle is facing and d comes on and stays on, the
uphill and in R (Reverse). vehicle is safe to drive but the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on, reset system will not limit wheel spin.
the system: Driving should be adjusted
accordingly. Press and release g
1. Stop the vehicle.
again to turn the system back on.
2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds. It may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck
3. Start the engine. in sand, mud, or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the
If d still comes on and stays on at a
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10. See
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see also Winter Driving on page 9‑9 for
your dealer for service. information on using TCS when
A chime may also sound when the driving in snowy or icy conditions.
light comes on steady. Manual Transmission TCS/
StabiliTrak Button Shown, If cruise control is being used when
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake Automatic Transmission TCS/ TCS activates, cruise control will
or accelerate heavily when TCS is StabiliTrak Button Similar automatically disengage. Press the
off. The vehicle's driveline could cruise control button to reengage
be damaged. when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 9‑39.
Adding non-GM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
TCS Off Light
TCS can be turned off by pressing
and releasing g. When TCS is
turned off, i comes on and the
StabiliTrak® System When one of these messages is

displayed and/or d comes on and
The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced but the system is not operational.
computer controlled system that Driving should be adjusted
assists with directional control of the accordingly.
TCS/StabiliTrak Light
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. If d comes on and stays on, reset
When the stability control system
StabiliTrak activates when the the system:
computer senses a difference activates, d flashes on the
instrument cluster. This also occurs 1. Stop the vehicle.
between the intended path, and the
direction the vehicle is actually when traction control is activated. 2. Turn the engine off and wait
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively A noise may be heard or vibration 15 seconds.
applies braking pressure at any one may be felt in the brake pedal. This
3. Start the engine.
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer is normal. Continue to steer the
the vehicle in the intended direction. vehicle in the intended direction. If d still comes on and stays on at a
If there is a problem detected with speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
StabiliTrak is on automatically your dealer for service.
whenever the vehicle is started. To StabiliTrak, a message is displayed
assist with directional control of the on the Driver Information Center
vehicle, the system should always (DIC). See Ride Control System
be left on. Messages on page 5‑40.
on in the instrument cluster. When to achieve the desired mode

StabiliTrak is turned off, the system characteristics. If the vehicle is
will not assist with directional control equipped with MagneRide™,
of the vehicle or limit wheel spin. selecting the various Driver Modes
Driving should be adjusted adjusts the ride of the vehicle to
accordingly. Press and release g enhance the ride performance for
again to turn both systems back on. the road conditions and the
selected mode.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, cruise control
will automatically disengage. Press
the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
Manual Transmission TCS/ allow. See Cruise Control on
StabiliTrak Button Shown, page 9‑39.
Automatic Transmission TCS/
StabiliTrak Button Similar Driver Mode Control
Driver Mode Control attempts to add
a sportier feel, provide a more
comfortable ride, or assist in
different weather conditions or Manual Transmission Mode
terrain. This system simultaneously Button Shown, Automatic
StabiliTrak Off TCS Off Light changes the software calibration of
Transmission Mode Button Similar
Light various sub-systems. Depending on
the option package, available The Driver Mode Control has three
StabiliTrak and traction control can features, and mode selected, the modes: Tour, Sport, and Snow/Ice.
be turned off if needed by pressing suspension, steering, and Snow/Ice mode is only available on
powertrain will change calibrations automatic transmission vehicles.
and holding g until g and i come
Press the MODE button on the When in Sport mode, the vehicle This feature is not intended for use
center console to make a mode will still shift automatically. The when the vehicle is stuck in sand,
selection. The first press of the transmission may remain in gear mud, ice, snow or gravel. If the
button will show the current mode. longer than it would in the normal vehicle becomes stuck, see If the
Subsequent presses will scroll driving mode based on braking, Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10.
though the available modes. The throttle input, and vehicle lateral
Tour and Sport modes will feel acceleration. The steering will Limited-Slip Rear Axle
similar on a smooth road. Select a change to provide more precise
new setting whenever driving control. If the vehicle has Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
conditions change. MagneRide, the suspension will can give more traction on snow,
change to provide better cornering mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When
Tour Mode performance. traction is low, this feature allows
Use for normal city and highway the drive wheel with the most
driving to provide a smooth, Snow/Ice Mode traction to move the vehicle. The
limited-slip rear axle also gives the
soft ride. Use when more traction is needed
during slippery conditions. The driver enhanced control when
Sport Mode transmission will use 2 (Second) cornering hard or completing a
maneuver, such as a lane change.
Use where road conditions or gear instead of 1 (First) gear when
Limited-slip rear axle fluid should
personal preference demand a more accelerating from a stop. The
vehicle will upshift normally when be changed at intervals listed in
controlled response. Maintenance Schedule on
the vehicle is moving.
When selected, the Sport mode page 11‑3.
indicator will display in the Driver When selected, the Snow/Ice mode
Information Center (DIC). indicator will display in the DIC.
Cruise Control For vehicles with a manual

transmission, the cruise control will
remain active when the gears are
{ WARNING shifted. The cruise is deactivated if
the clutch is depressed for several
Cruise control can be dangerous seconds.
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use If the StabiliTrak® system begins to
the cruise control on winding limit wheel spin while using cruise
roads or in heavy traffic. control, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See
Cruise control can be dangerous StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑36 or
on slippery roads. On such roads, Traction Control System (TCS) on
fast changes in tire traction can page 9‑34. When road conditions
cause excessive wheel slip, and allow the cruise control to be safely J (On/Off): Press to turn the
you could lose control. Do not use used, you can apply the cruise system on and off. A white cruise
cruise control on slippery roads. control again. control indicator appears in the
instrument cluster when cruise is
turned on.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control disengages.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): Setting Cruise Control Once the vehicle speed reaches
Press the control up briefly to If the cruise button is on when not in about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
resume to a previously set speed or use, it could get bumped and go into press +RES up to the first detent
to increase vehicle speed if the cruise when not desired. Keep the briefly on the steering wheel. The
cruise control is already activated. cruise control button off when cruise vehicle returns to the previous set
To increase speed by 1 km/h is not being used. speed.
(1 mph), press +RES up to the first
Increasing Speed While Cruise
detent. To increase speed to the 1. Press J. Control is at a Set Speed
next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the
speedometer, press +RES up to the 2. Get up to the desired speed. If the cruise control system is
second detent. 3. Press and release the SET− already activated:
SET− (Set/Coast): Press the control on the steering wheel. . Press and hold +RES up until
control down briefly to set the speed 4. Remove foot from the the desired speed is reached,
and activate cruise control or to accelerator. then release it.
decrease vehicle speed if the cruise When the cruise control has been . To increase vehicle speed in
control is already activated. To set to the desired speed, the cruise small increments, press +RES
decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), control indicator appears green on up to the first detent. For each
press SET− down to the first detent. the instrument cluster and a cruise press, the vehicle goes about
To decrease speed to the next set speed message appears on the 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.
5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the Head-Up Display (HUD),
speedometer, press SET− down to . To increase vehicle speed in
if equipped. larger increments, press +RES
the second detent.
Resuming a Set Speed up to the second detent. For
* (Cancel): Press to disengage each press, the vehicle speed
cruise control without erasing the If the cruise control is set at a increases to the next 5 km/h
set speed from memory. desired speed and then the brakes (5 mph) mark on the
are applied, the cruise control is speedometer.
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.
The speedometer reading can be The cruise control system may vehicle speed. When going
displayed in either English or metric automatically brake to slow the downhill, the cruise control system
units. See Instrument Cluster on vehicle down. may automatically brake to slow the
page 5‑9. The increment value used The speedometer reading can be vehicle down. Also, you may have
depends on the units displayed. displayed in either English or metric to brake or shift to a lower gear to
units. See Instrument Cluster on keep the vehicle speed down. If the
Reducing Speed While Cruise brake is applied, the cruise control
Control is at a Set Speed page 5‑9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed. disengages.
If the cruise control system is
already activated: Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control
. Press and hold SET− down until Using Cruise Control There are four ways to end cruise
the desired lower speed is Use the accelerator pedal to control:
reached, then release it. increase the vehicle speed. When . Step lightly on the brake pedal
. To decrease the vehicle speed in you take your foot off the pedal, the (manual and automatic
small increments, press SET− vehicle will slow down to the transmissions).
down to the first detent. For previous set cruise speed. . Depress the clutch pedal for
each press, the vehicle goes While pressing the accelerator pedal several seconds or shift to
about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower. to override cruise, briefly applying Neutral (manual transmissions).
. To decrease the vehicle speed in the set switch will result in cruise set
to the current vehicle speed.
. Press *.
larger increments, press SET−
down to the second detent. For Using Cruise Control on Hills . Press J.
each press, the vehicle speed
decreases to the next 5 km/h How well the cruise control will work Erasing Speed Memory
(5 mph) mark on the on hills depends upon the vehicle
The cruise control set speed is
speedometer. speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, erased from memory if J is
you might have to step on the pressed or if the ignition is
accelerator pedal to maintain the turned off.
Adaptive Cruise Control If ACC is controlling your vehicle

speed when the Traction Control { WARNING
For vehicles with Adaptive Cruise System (TCS) activates, the ACC
Control (ACC), it allows the driver to will automatically disengage. See Adaptive Cruise Control will not
select the cruise control set speed Traction Control System (TCS) on detect or brake for children,
and following gap. Read this entire page 9‑34. When road conditions pedestrians, animals, or other
section before using this system. allow ACC to be safely used, the objects.
The following gap is the following ACC can be turned back on. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
time between your vehicle and a
vehicle detected directly ahead in Control when:
your path moving in the same { WARNING . On winding and hilly roads or
direction. If no vehicle is detected in ACC has limited braking ability when the sensors are
your path, ACC works like regular and may not have time to slow blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
cruise control. ACC uses camera The system may not detect a
the vehicle down enough to avoid
and radar sensors. See Radio vehicle ahead. Keep the
a collision with another vehicle
Frequency Statement on entire front of the vehicle
page 13‑21 for information you are following. This can occur clean.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal when vehicles suddenly slow or
stop ahead, or enter your lane.
. Visibility is low, such as in
Communications Commission (FCC) fog, rain, or snow conditions.
rules and Industry Canada Also see “Alerting the Driver” in
this section. Complete attention is Adaptive Cruise Control
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. performance is limited under
always required while driving and
If a vehicle is detected in your path, you should be ready to take these conditions.
ACC can apply acceleration or . On slippery roads where fast
action and apply the brakes. See
limited, moderate braking to changes in tire traction can
Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
maintain the selected following gap. cause excessive wheel slip.
To disengage ACC, apply the brake.
SET– (Set/Coast): Press the Select the set speed desired for
control down briefly to set the speed cruise. This is the vehicle speed
and activate ACC or to decrease when no vehicle is detected in its
vehicle speed if ACC is already path slower than the set speed.
activated. To decrease speed by ACC will not set or resume at a
1 km/h (1 mph), press SET− down to speed less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
the first detent. To decrease speed
to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on To set ACC:
the speedometer, press SET− down
to the second detent.
1. Press ].
* (Cancel): Press to disengage 2. Get up to the desired speed.
ACC without erasing the set speed 3. Press and release the SET–
from memory. control on the steering wheel.
] (On/Off): Press to turn the 3 (Follow Distance Gap): Press 4. Remove foot from the
system on or off.
to select a following gap time (or accelerator.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): distance) setting for ACC of Far,
Press the control up briefly to After ACC is set, it may immediately
Medium, or Near. apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead
resume the previous set speed or to
increase vehicle speed if ACC is Setting Adaptive Cruise Control is detected closer than the selected
already activated. To increase following gap.
If the cruise button is on when not in
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press use, it could get bumped and go into
+RES up to the first detent. To cruise when not desired. Keep the
increase speed to the next 5 km/h cruise control button off when cruise
(5 mph) mark on the speedometer, is not being used.
press +RES up to the second
detent.
Increasing Speed While ACC is at

. To increase vehicle speed in
a Set Speed larger increments, press +RES
up to the second detent. For
If ACC is already activated, do one each press, the vehicle speed
of the following: increases to the next 5 km/h
. Use the accelerator to get to the (5 mph) mark on the
higher speed. Press SET– down. speedometer.
The ACC indicator displays in the
Release the control and the When it is determined that there is
instrument cluster and Head-Up
accelerator pedal. The vehicle no vehicle ahead inside the selected
Display (HUD). When the ACC is
will now cruise at the higher following gap, then the vehicle
active, the indicator will be lit green.
speed. speed will increase to the set speed.
Be mindful of speed limits,
When the accelerator pedal is The speedometer reading can be
surrounding traffic speeds, and
pressed, ACC will not brake displayed in either English or metric
weather conditions when selecting
because it is overridden. units. See Instrument Cluster on
the set speed.
A warning message will appear page 5‑9. The increment value used
Resuming a Set Speed on the Driver Information Center depends on the units displayed.
(DIC) and the Head-Up Display
If the ACC is set at a desired speed Reducing Speed While ACC is at a
(HUD). See Cruise Control
and then the brakes are applied, the Set Speed
Messages on page 5‑34.
ACC is disengaged without erasing
the set speed from memory. . Press and hold +RES up until If ACC is already activated, do one
the desired set speed appears of the following:
To begin using ACC again, press
on the display, then release it. . Use the brake to get to the
+RES up briefly on the steering
wheel. The vehicle returns to the . To increase vehicle speed in desired lower speed. Press
previous set speed. small increments, press +RES SET– down and release the
up to the first detent. For each accelerator pedal. The vehicle
press, the vehicle goes 1 km/h will now cruise at the lower
(1 mph) faster. speed.

. Press and hold SET– down until
Press 3 on the steering wheel to Changing the gap setting
the desired lower speed is automatically changes the alert
adjust the following gap. Each press
reached, then release it. timing sensitivity (Far, Medium,
cycles the gap button through three
. To decrease the vehicle speed in settings: Far, Medium, or Near. or Near) for the Forward Collision
small increments, press SET− Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward
When pressed, the current gap Collision Alert (FCA) System on
down to the first detent. For
setting displays briefly on the page 9‑55.
each press, the vehicle goes
instrument cluster and HUD. The
about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower. Alerting the Driver
gap setting will be maintained until it
. To decrease the vehicle speed in is changed.
larger increments, press SET−
Since each gap setting corresponds
down to the second detent. For
to a following time (Far, Medium,
each press, the vehicle speed
or Near), the following distance will
decreases to the next 5 km/h
vary based on vehicle speed. The
(5 mph) mark on the
faster the vehicle speed, the further
speedometer.
back your vehicle will follow a
The speedometer reading can be vehicle detected ahead. Consider If ACC is engaged, driver action
displayed in either English or metric traffic and weather conditions when may be required when:
units. See Instrument Cluster on selecting the following gap. The
page 5‑9. The increment value used
. ACC cannot apply sufficient
range of selectable gaps may not be
depends on the units displayed. braking because of approaching
appropriate for all drivers and
a vehicle too rapidly.
Selecting the Follow Distance driving conditions.
. A temporary condition prohibits
When a slower moving vehicle is ACC from operating. See
detected ahead within the selected Vehicle Messages on page 5‑32.
following gap, ACC will adjust the . A malfunction is detected in the
vehicle's speed and attempt to
system. See Vehicle Messages
maintain the follow distance gap
on page 5‑32.
selected.
When any of these conditions occur, If this symbol is not displaying, ACC
the collision alert symbol on the will not respond to or brake to WARNING (Continued)
HUD will flash on the windshield. vehicles ahead.
Either eight beeps will sound from vehicle that it has never detected
ACC automatically slows the vehicle moving. This can occur in
the front, or both sides of the Safety down and adjusts vehicle speed to
Alert Seat will pulse five times. See stop-and-go traffic or when a
follow the vehicle in front at the vehicle suddenly appears due to
“Collision/Detection Systems” under selected follow gap. The vehicle
Vehicle Personalization on a vehicle ahead changing lanes.
speed increases or decreases to Your vehicle may not stop and
page 5‑43. follow the vehicle in front of you, but
could cause a crash. Use caution
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3. will not exceed the set speed. It may
when using ACC. Your complete
apply limited braking, if necessary.
Approaching and Following a When braking is active, the brake attention is always required while
Vehicle lamps will come on. The automatic driving and you should be ready
braking may feel or sound different to take action and apply the
than if the brakes were applied brakes.
manually. This is normal.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving ACC Automatically Disengages
Objects ACC may automatically disengage
and the driver will need to manually
The vehicle ahead symbol is in the { WARNING apply the brakes to slow the
vehicle when:
instrument cluster and HUD display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . The sensors are blocked.
The vehicle ahead symbol only may not detect and react to
displays when a vehicle is detected stopped or slow-moving vehicles
. No traffic or other objects are
in your vehicle’s path moving in the being detected.
ahead of you. For example, the
same direction.
system may not brake for a . There is a fault in the system.
(Continued)
The ACC active symbol will not be When the vehicle ahead drives
displayed when ACC is no longer away, press RES+ or the { WARNING
active. accelerator pedal to resume ACC.
If stopped for more than If ACC has stopped the vehicle,
Notification to Resume ACC two minutes or if the driver door is and if ACC is disengaged, turned
ACC will maintain a follow gap opened and the driver seat belt is off, or canceled, the vehicle will
behind a detected vehicle and slow unbuckled, the ACC automatically no longer be held at a stop. The
your vehicle to a stop behind that applies the electric parking brake to vehicle can move. When ACC is
vehicle. hold the vehicle. The electric holding the vehicle at a stop,
parking brake status light will turn always be prepared to manually
If the stopped vehicle ahead has
on. See Parking Brake (Electric) on apply the brakes.
driven away and ACC has not
resumed, the vehicle ahead symbol page 9‑30 or Parking Brake
will flash as a reminder to check (Manual) on page 9‑33. To resume
ACC and release the electric
traffic before proceeding. In
addition, the left and right sides of parking brake, press the accelerator { WARNING
the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three pedal and then RES+.
Leaving the vehicle without
times, or three beeps will sound. placing it in P (Park) can be
See ”Alert Type” and “Go Notifier” in dangerous. Do not leave the
“Collision/Detection Systems” under vehicle while it is being held at a
Vehicle Personalization on stop by ACC. Always place the
page 5‑43. vehicle in P (Park) and turn off
the ignition before leaving the
vehicle.
ACC Override Curves in the Road

If using the accelerator pedal while
{ WARNING
ACC is active, a DIC warning { WARNING On curves, ACC may respond to
message will indicate that automatic a vehicle in another lane, or may
braking will not occur. See Vehicle On curves, ACC may not detect a
vehicle ahead in your lane. You not have time to react to a vehicle
Messages on page 5‑32. ACC will in your lane. You could crash into
resume operation when the could be startled if the vehicle
accelerates up to the set speed, a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
accelerator pedal is not being control of your vehicle. Give extra
pressed. especially when following a
vehicle exiting or entering exit attention in curves and be ready
to use the brakes if necessary.
{ WARNING ramps. You could lose control of
the vehicle or crash. Do not use Select an appropriate speed while
ACC while driving on an entrance driving in curves.
The ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes if your foot is or exit ramp. Always be ready to
resting on the accelerator pedal. use the brakes if necessary. ACC may operate differently in a
You could crash into a vehicle sharp curve. It may reduce the
ahead of you. vehicle speed if the curve is too
sharp.
ACC may occasionally provide an Do Not Use ACC on Hills and

alert and/or braking that is When Towing a Trailer
considered unnecessary. It could
respond to vehicles in different
lanes, signs, guardrails, and other
stationary objects when entering or
exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. The vehicle does not
need service.
When following a vehicle and Other Vehicle Lane Changes
entering a curve, ACC may not
detect the vehicle ahead and
accelerate to the set speed. When Do not use ACC when driving on
this happens the vehicle ahead steep hills or when towing a trailer.
symbol will not appear. ACC will not detect a vehicle in the
lane while driving on steep hills. The
driver will often need to take over
acceleration and braking on steep
hills, especially when towing a
trailer. If the brakes are applied, the
ACC disengages.
ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead
until it is completely in the lane. The
brake may need to be manually
applied.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the
brakes.
Ending ACC Cleaning the Sensing System Driver Assistance

There are three ways to The camera sensor on the back of
disengage ACC: the rearview mirror and the radar
Systems
. Step lightly on the brake pedal. sensors on the front of the vehicle This vehicle may have features that
can become blocked by snow, ice, work together to help avoid crashes
. Press *. dirt, or mud. These areas need to or reduce crash damage while
be cleaned for ACC to operate driving, backing, and parking. Read
. Press ]. properly. this entire section before using
Erasing Speed Memory For cleaning instructions, see these systems.
“Washing the Vehicle” under
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if ] is
Exterior Care on page 10‑81. { WARNING
pressed or if the ignition is System operation may also be Do not rely on the Driver
turned off. limited under snow, heavy rain, Assistance Systems. These
or road spray conditions. systems do not replace the need
for paying attention and driving
safely. You may not hear or feel
alerts or warnings provided by
these systems. Failure to use
proper care when driving may
result in injury, death, or vehicle
damage. See Defensive Driving
on page 9‑3.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Audible or Safety Alert Seat Assistance Systems for
Some driver assistance features Parking or Backing
alert the driver of obstacles by
Under many conditions, these beeping. To change the volume of When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),
systems will not: the warning chime, see “Comfort the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) and
and Convenience” under Vehicle Rear Parking Assist may help the
. Detect children, pedestrians, driver to avoid a crash or to reduce
bicyclists, or animals. Personalization on page 5‑43.
crash damage. Some models may
. Detect vehicles or objects If equipped with the Safety Alert also have the Rear Automatic
outside the area monitored by Seat, the driver seat cushion may Braking and Backing Warning
the system. provide a vibrating pulse alert System, Rear Cross Traffic Alert
instead of beeping. To change this, (RCTA), and/or Front Parking
. Work at all driving speeds. see “Collision/Detection Systems” Assist.
. Warn you or provide you with under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑43. When the vehicle is shifted into
enough time to avoid a crash. R (Reverse), the RVC displays an
. Work under poor visibility or image of the area behind the vehicle
bad weather conditions. in the center stack display. When
the vehicle is shifted out of
. Work if the detection sensor
R (Reverse), the screen returns to
is not cleaned or is covered
the previous content, after a short
by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
delay. To see this screen sooner,
Complete attention is always press one of the radio buttons. If the
required while driving, and you message Service Rear Camera
should be ready to take action System is displayed, the vehicle
and apply the brakes and/or steer may need service.
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Displayed images may be farther or

{ WARNING closer than they appear. The area
displayed is limited and objects that
The RVC system does not display are close to either corner of the
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, bumper or under the bumper do not
animals, or any other object display.
located outside the camera's field
of view, below the bumper, A warning triangle may display on
or under the vehicle. Perceived the RVC screen to show where the
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
distances may be different from
(URPA) has detected an object. This
actual distances. Do not back the
triangle changes from amber to red
vehicle using only the RVC and increases in size the closer the
screen, during longer, higher 1. View Displayed by the Camera object.
speed backing maneuvers,
or where there could be cross On vehicles with the Rear Cross
traffic. Failure to use proper care Traffic Alert (RCTA), a triangle with
before backing may result in an arrow may also display on the
injury, death, or vehicle damage. RVC screen to warn of traffic
coming from either direction. This
Always check behind and around
system detects objects coming from
the vehicle before backing. up to 30 m (98 ft) from the left or
right side behind the vehicle. When
an object is detected, either three
1. View Displayed by the Camera beeps sound from the left or right
side or three Safety Alert Seat
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper pulses occur on the left or right side,
depending on the direction of the
detected vehicle.
Use caution while backing up when pulse two times. When an object is
towing a trailer, as the RCTA WARNING (Continued) very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the
detection zones that extend out vehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the
from the back of the vehicle do not area around the vehicle and vehicle front), five beeps will sound
move further back when a trailer is check all mirrors before moving from the front or rear depending
towed. forward or backing. where the object is detected, or both
With URPA, as the vehicle backs up sides of the Safety Alert Seat will
at speeds of less than 8 km/h pulse five times. Beeps for Front
(5 mph), the sensors on the rear Parking Assist are higher pitched
bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m than for Rear Parking Assist.
(8 ft) behind the vehicle that are Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise
within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off Control (ACC) have the Backing
the ground and below bumper level. Warning System, which is designed
to help avoid backing crashes. The
{ WARNING system can warn of rear objects
when backing up at speeds greater
The parking assist system does than 8 km/h (5 mph).
The instrument cluster parking
not detect children, pedestrians, assist display has bars that show The Backing Warning System will
bicyclists, animals, or objects “distance to object” and object beep once from the rear when a
located below the bumper or that location information for URPA, and potential object threat is first
are too close or too far from the on some vehicles, for the Front detected, or pulse twice on both
vehicle. It is not available at Parking Assist system. As the object sides of the Safety Alert Seat. When
speeds greater than 8 km/h gets closer, more bars light up and the system detects a potential
(5 mph). To prevent injury, death, the bars change color from yellow to imminent crash, beeps will be heard
or vehicle damage, even with amber to red. When an object is first from the rear, or five pulses will be
parking assist, always check the detected in the rear, one beep will felt on both sides of the Safety Alert
(Continued) be heard from the rear, or both Seat. There may also be a brief,
sides of the Safety Alert Seat will sharp application of the brakes.
vehicle is backing too fast to avoid a Pressing the brake pedal after the
{ WARNING crash with a detected object, it may vehicle comes to a stop will release
automatically brake hard to a stop. the Rear Automatic Braking. If the
The Backing Warning System brake pedal is not pressed within
only operates at speeds greater
than 8 km/h (5 mph). It does not { WARNING two seconds after the stop, the
electric parking brake is set. When it
detect children, pedestrians, Rear Automatic Braking may not is safe, pressing the accelerator
bicyclists, animals, or objects avoid many types of backing pedal firmly at any time will override
below the bumper or that are too crashes. Do not wait for the the Rear Automatic Braking.
close or too far from the vehicle. automatic braking to apply. This
In some situations, such as at
higher backing speeds, there may
system is not designed to replace { WARNING
driver braking, but only acts when
not be enough time for the short, the vehicle may not stop in time. There may be instances where
sharp application of the vehicle The system, in some situations or unexpected or undesired
brake system to occur. To prevent environments, may not brake or automatic braking occurs. If this
injury, death, or vehicle damage, may not brake in time to avoid a happens, either press the brake
even with the Backing Warning crash. It does not detect children, pedal or firmly press the
System, always check the area pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, accelerator pedal to release the
around the vehicle and check all or objects below the bumper or brakes from the Rear Automatic
mirrors before backing. that are too close or too far from Braking system. Check the RVC
the vehicle. To prevent injury, screen and check the area
Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise death, or vehicle damage, even around the vehicle before
Control (ACC) also have the Rear with Rear Automatic Braking, proceeding.
Automatic Braking system, which is always check the area around the
designed to help avoid or reduce vehicle before and while backing.
the harm caused by backing
crashes. If the system detects the
Turning the Features On or Off The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) can Assistance Systems for
be turned on or off through the
Settings menu on the infotainment
Driving
system. The parking assist symbols, If equipped, when driving the
guidance lines, and Rear Cross vehicle, Forward Collision Alert
Traffic Alert (RCTA) can also be (FCA), Lane Departure Warning
turned off. To turn the RVC system, (LDW), Side Blind Zone Alert
symbols, guidance lines, or RCTA (SBZA), and/or the Active
on or off: Emergency Braking System can
The X button to the left of the help to avoid a crash or reduce
steering wheel is used to turn on or 1. On the infotainment system,
press the Settings screen crash damage.
off the Front and Rear Parking
Assist, Rear Automatic Braking, and button, or turn the MENU knob
Backing Warning System at the to highlight Settings and Forward Collision Alert
same time. The indicator light next press MENU. (FCA) System
to the button comes on when the 2. Select Rear Camera. The FCA system may help to avoid
features are on and turns off when or reduce the harm caused by
3. Press Rear Camera Display,
the features have been disabled. front-end crashes. FCA provides a
Park Assist Symbols, Guidance
Lines, or Rear Cross Traffic Alert flashing alert on the windshield, and
and then select OFF or ON. beeps or pulses the Safety Alert
Seat when approaching a vehicle
directly ahead too quickly. FCA also
provides a visual alert if following
another vehicle much too closely.
FCA detects vehicles within a FCA can be disabled through

distance of approximately 60 m vehicle personalization. See the { WARNING
(197 ft) and operates at speeds “Auto Collision Preparation” portion
above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the of “Collision/Detection Systems” FCA does not provide a warning
vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control under Vehicle Personalization on to help avoid a crash, unless it
(ACC), it can detect vehicles to page 5‑43. detects a vehicle. FCA may not
distances of approximately 110 m detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
(360 ft) and operates at all speeds. Detecting the Vehicle Ahead sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
See Adaptive Cruise Control on or ice, or if the windshield is
page 9‑42. damaged. It may also not detect a
vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
{ WARNING or in conditions that can limit
visibility such as fog, rain,
FCA is a warning system and or snow, or if the headlamps or
does not apply the brakes. When windshield are not cleaned or in
approaching a slower-moving or FCA warnings will not occur unless proper condition. Keep the
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, the FCA system detects a vehicle windshield, headlamps, and FCA
or when following a vehicle too ahead. The vehicle-ahead indicator sensors clean and in good repair.
closely, FCA may not provide a will display green when a vehicle is
warning with enough time to help detected in front. Vehicles may not
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn be detected on curves, highway exit
ramps, or hills; or due to poor
of pedestrians, animals, signs,
visibility. FCA will not detect another
guardrails, bridges, construction
vehicle ahead until it is completely
barrels, or other objects. Be ready in the driving lane.
to take action and apply the
brakes. For more information, see
Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
Collision Alert Tailgating Alert
With Head-Up Display The vehicle-ahead indicator will

display amber when you are
following a vehicle ahead much too
closely.
Selecting the Alert Timing Without Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the collision alert/following
gap button on the steering wheel to
Without Head-Up Display set the FCA timing to Far, Medium,
When your vehicle approaches Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The
another vehicle too rapidly, the red first button press shows the current
lights, or the collision alert symbol setting on the DIC. Additional button
on the HUD, will flash on the presses will change this setting.
windshield. Either eight beeps will The chosen setting will remain until
sound from the front, or both sides it is changed and will affect the
of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse timing of both the Collision Alert
five times. and the Tailgating Alert features.
The timing of both alerts will
vary based on vehicle speed.
With Adaptive Cruise Control The faster the vehicle speed, the
farther away the alert will occur.
Consider traffic and weather Active Emergency

conditions when selecting the alert
Braking System
{ WARNING
timing. The range of selectable alert
timing may not be appropriate for all If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise IBA may increase vehicle braking
drivers and driving conditions. Control (ACC) it also has the Active in situations when it may not be
Emergency Braking System, necessary. You could block the
Changing the FCA timing setting flow of traffic. If this occurs, take
automatically changes the following which includes Intelligent Brake
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic your foot off the brake pedal and
gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near) then apply the brakes as needed.
for the Adaptive Cruise Control Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
(ACC) feature. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
Automatic Collision
Unnecessary Alerts IBA may activate when the brake Preparation (ACP) System
FCA may provide unnecessary pedal is applied quickly by providing
a boost to braking based on the ACP may help reduce crash
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles
speed of approach and distance to damage by applying the vehicle’s
in other lanes, objects that are not
a vehicle ahead. brake system and has a detection
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
range of approximately 60 m
are normal operation and the Minor brake pedal pulsations or (197 ft). Braking can only occur if a
vehicle does not need service. pedal movement during this time is vehicle is detected ahead. This is
normal and the brake pedal should shown by the FCA vehicle-ahead
Cleaning the System continue to be applied as needed. indicator being lit. See Forward
If the FCA system does not seem to IBA will automatically disengage Collision Alert (FCA) System on
operate properly, cleaning the when the brake pedal is released or page 9‑55.
outside of the windshield in front of brake pedal pressure is quickly
the camera sensor and the front of decreased.
the vehicle may correct the issue.
happens, Automatic Braking will

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) engage the electric parking brake to
hold the vehicle at a stop. A firm
ACP is an emergency crash Complete attention is always press of the accelerator pedal will
preparation feature and is not required while driving, and you release Automatic Braking.
designed to avoid crashes. Do should be ready to take action
not rely on ACP to brake the and apply the brakes and/or steer
vehicle. the vehicle to avoid crashes.
{ WARNING
ACP may not: Automatic Braking may
Brake Preparation automatically brake the vehicle
. Respond to stopped vehicles,
in situations where it may be
pedestrians, or animals. When quickly approaching a vehicle
unnecessary. It could respond
. Detect a vehicle ahead on ahead, Brake Preparation reduces
brake response time by having the to a turning vehicle ahead,
winding or hilly roads. guardrails, signs, and other
brake system prepared for driver
. Detect a stopped or braking to occur more rapidly. non-moving objects. This could
slow-moving vehicle or other be uncomfortable and startling. To
object ahead. Automatic Braking override Automatic Braking, firmly
Automatic Braking applies the press the accelerator pedal, if it is
. Detect a vehicle when
weather limits visibility, such brakes, even if the driver has not safe to do so.
as in fog, rain, or snow. In applied the brakes, in many
these situations, ACP sensor imminent front-end crash situations Automatic Braking can be disabled
performance is limited. to help reduce crash damage. or reduced through vehicle
It may even help avoid some personalization. See the “Auto
(Continued) crashes at very low speeds. Collision Preparation” portion of
Automatic Braking may slow the “Collision/Detection Systems” under
vehicle to a complete stop to try to Vehicle Personalization on
avoid a potential crash. If this page 5‑43.
or 3.5 m (11 ft). This zone starts at

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) each side mirror and goes back
approximately 5 m (16 ft). The height
Using the Automatic Collision lanes may result in injury, death, of the zone is approximately
Preparation System while towing or vehicle damage. Before between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft)
a trailer could cause you to lose making a lane change, always off the ground.
control of the vehicle and crash. check mirrors, glance over your
Turn the system off when towing shoulder, and use the turn Use caution while changing lanes
a trailer. signals. when towing a trailer, as the SBZA
detection zones that extend back
from the side of the vehicle do not
Side Blind Zone move further back when a trailer is
towed.
Alert (SBZA)
If available, the Side Blind Zone How the System Works
Alert system is a lane-changing aid The SBZA symbol lights up in the
that assists drivers with avoiding side mirrors when the system
crashes that occur with vehicles in detects a vehicle in the side blind
the side blind zone (or spot) areas. zone, indicating it may be unsafe
to change lanes. Before making a
{ WARNING lane change, check the SBZA
display, check mirrors, glance over
SBZA does not detect vehicles your shoulder, and use the turn
rapidly approaching outside of the signals.
side blind zones, pedestrians, SBZA Detection Zones
bicyclists, or animals. Failure to The SBZA sensor covers a zone
use proper care when changing of approximately one lane over
(Continued) from both sides of the vehicle,
SBZA displays may come on when SBZA may not operate when the
a passed vehicle remains in or SBZA sensors in the left or right
drops back into the detection zone. corners of the rear bumper are
SBZA can be disabled through covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
vehicle personalization. See or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
“Collision/Detection Systems” cleaning instructions, see "Washing
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror under Vehicle Personalization on the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
Display Display page 5‑43. If SBZA is disabled by page 10‑81. If the DIC still displays
the driver, the SBZA mirror displays the SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
When the vehicle is started, both will not light up. UNAVAILABLE message after
outside mirror SBZA displays will cleaning the rear bumper corners,
briefly come on to indicate the When the System Does Not see your dealer.
system is operating. When the Seem to Work Properly If the SBZA displays do not light up
vehicle is moving forward, the left- when vehicles are in the blind zone
or right-side mirror display will light SBZA may not always alert the
driver to vehicles in the blind zone, and the system is clean, the system
up if a vehicle is detected in that may need service. Take the vehicle
blind zone. If the turn signal is especially in wet conditions. The
system does not need to be to your dealer.
activated and a vehicle is also
detected on the same side, the serviced. The system may light up When SBZA is disabled for any
display will flash as an extra due to guardrails, signs, trees, reason other than the driver turning
warning not to change lanes. shrubs, and other non-moving it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On
objects. This is normal system option will not be available on the
operation; the vehicle does not need personalization menu.
service.
FCC Information lane departure direction. LDW will

not warn if the turn signal is on or if WARNING (Continued)
See Radio Frequency Statement on
a sharp maneuver is made.
page 13‑21 for information departing the lane on the side
regarding Part 15 of the Federal where it has detected a lane
Communications Commission (FCC) { WARNING marker. Even with LDW, always
rules and Industry Canada keep your attention on the road
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. The LDW system is an aid to help
the vehicle stay in the driving and maintain proper vehicle
lane. It does not steer the vehicle. position within the lane, or vehicle
Lane Departure The LDW system may not: damage, injury, or death could
Warning (LDW) occur. Always keep the
. Provide enough time to avoid windshield clean and do not use
LDW may help avoid crashes due to a crash.
unintentional lane departures. It may LDW in bad weather conditions.
provide a warning if the vehicle is
. Detect lane markings under
crossing a lane without using a turn bad weather conditions or if
the windshield is dirty.
How the System Works
signal. LDW uses a camera sensor
to detect the lane markings. It only The LDW camera sensor is on the
. Detect lane markings and will
operates at speeds of 56 km/h windshield ahead of the rearview
not detect road edges.
(35 mph) or greater. mirror.
. Warn that the vehicle is
When the vehicle crosses a crossing a lane marking if the To turn LDW on and off, press @ to
detected lane marking, the LDW system does not detect the the left of the steering wheel. The
indicator will flash and either three lane marking. control indicator will light when LDW
beeps will be sounded from the left is on.
If LDW only detects lane
or right, or three Safety Alert Seat
pulses will occur on the left or right markings on one side of the
side of the seat, depending on the road, it will only warn you when
(Continued)
When the System Does Not If the LDW camera system does not
Seem to Work Properly seem to operate properly, cleaning
the outside of the windshield in front
If the system is on and the vehicle is of the camera sensor may correct
travelling 56 km/h (35 mph) or the issue.
greater, and LDW symbol does not
appear:
When the vehicle is started, the
. The lane markings on the road
{ WARNING
LDW indicator on the instrument
cluster will come on briefly. may not be seen. If the LDW camera sensor is
. The camera sensor may be blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if
If LDW is on, the LDW indicator will the headlamps are not cleaned or
appear green if the system detects blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
properly aimed, or if the
a left or right lane marking while . The windshield may be windshield is dirty or damaged, it
the vehicle is traveling at 56 km/h damaged.
(35 mph) or greater. If the vehicle may not detect the lanes ahead.
. The weather may be limiting
crosses a detected lane marking LDW may not help avoid a crash
without using the turn signal, this visibility. under these conditions. Keep the
indicator will change to amber and This is normal operation; the vehicle headlamps cleaned and properly
flash. In addition, three beeps will does not need service. Clean the aimed and the windshield clean.
sound from the left or right, or the windshield.
Safety Alert Seat will pulse three Lane markings may not be detected LDW warnings may occur due to tar
times on either the left or right side on curves, highway exit ramps, marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
of the seat, depending on the lane or hills; or due to poor visibility. or other road imperfections. This is
departure direction. normal system operation; the
vehicle does not need service.
Fuel Recommended Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is an If the vehicle has a 2.5L L4 engine
important part of the proper or a 3.6L V6 engine, use regular
maintenance of this vehicle. To help unleaded gasoline with a posted
keep the engine clean and maintain octane rating of 87 or higher. If the
optimum vehicle performance, we octane rating is less than 87, an
recommend the use of gasoline audible knocking noise, commonly
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent referred to as spark knock, might be
Gasoline. heard when driving. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
Look for the TOP TIER label on the higher as soon as possible. If heavy
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets knocking is heard when using
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle gasoline rated at 87 octane or
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows higher, the engine needs service.
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that
Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine. The If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4
www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER VIN is at the top left of the engine, use premium unleaded
gasoline is only available in the U.S. instrument panel. See Vehicle gasoline with a posted octane rating
and Canada. Identification Number (VIN) on of 91 or higher. You can also use
page 12‑1. regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but the
Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap vehicle's acceleration could be
can use either unleaded gasoline slightly reduced, and a slight
or ethanol fuel containing up to audible knocking noise, commonly
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 referred to as spark knock, might
(85% Ethanol) on page 9‑66. For be heard. If the octane is less
all other vehicles, use only the than 87, a heavy knocking noise
unleaded gasoline described under might be heard when driving.
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑64.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could
Requirements Countries
damage the engine. If heavy If the vehicle is certified to meet If planning to drive in countries
knocking is heard when using California Emissions Standards, it is outside the U.S. or Canada, the
gasoline rated at 87 octane or designed to operate on fuels that proper fuel might be hard to find.
higher, the engine needs service. meet California specifications. See Check regional auto club or fuel
the underhood emission control retail brand websites for availability
Gasoline Specifications label. If this fuel is not available in in the country where driving. Never
states adopting California Emissions use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
At a minimum, gasoline should Standards, the vehicle will operate methanol, or any other fuel not
meet ASTM specification D 4814. satisfactorily on fuels meeting recommended. Costly repairs
Some gasolines contain an federal specifications, but emission caused by use of improper fuel
octane-enhancing additive called control system performance might would not be covered by the vehicle
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese be affected. The malfunction warranty.
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend indicator lamp could turn on and the
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. Fuel Additives
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
on page 9‑65. page 5‑16. If this occurs, return to To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. in the United States are now
If it is determined that the condition required to contain additives that
is caused by the type of fuel used, help prevent engine and fuel system
repairs might not be covered by the deposits from forming, allowing the
vehicle warranty. emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain gasoline additive recommended by Some gasolines that are
only the minimum amount of General Motors. It is available at not reformulated for low
additive required to meet U.S. your dealer. emissions can contain an
Environmental Protection Agency Gasolines containing oxygenates, octane-enhancing additive called
regulations. To help keep fuel such as ethers and ethanol, and methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
injectors and intake valves clean reformulated gasolines might be tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
and avoid problems due to dirty available in your area. We where you buy gasoline whether the
injectors or valves, look for gasoline recommend that you use these fuel contains MMT. We recommend
that is advertised as TOP TIER gasolines, if they comply with the against the use of such gasolines.
Detergent Gasoline. Look for specifications described earlier. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the TOP TIER label on the fuel However, E85 (85% ethanol) and spark plug life and affect emission
pump to ensure gasoline meets other fuels containing more than control system performance. The
enhanced detergency standards 15% ethanol must not be used in malfunction indicator lamp might
developed by the auto companies. vehicles that were not designed for turn on. If this occurs, return to your
A list of marketers providing TOP those fuels. dealer for service.
TIER Detergent Gasoline can be
found at www.toptiergas.com. Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
designed for fuel that contains
For customers who do not use TOP methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, containing methanol. It can can use either unleaded gasoline
one bottle of GM Fuel System corrode metal parts in the fuel or ethanol fuel containing up to
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel system and also damage plastic 85% ethanol (E85). For all other
tank at every engine oil change, can and rubber parts. That damage vehicles, use only the unleaded
help clean deposits from fuel would not be covered under the gasoline described under
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel vehicle warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 9‑64.
System Treatment PLUS is the only
We encourage the use of E85 in not meet ASTM or CGSB Notice: Some additives are not
vehicles that are designed to use it. specifications can affect driveability compatible with E85 fuel and can
The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” and could cause the malfunction harm the vehicle's fuel system.
fuel, meaning it is made from indicator lamp to come on. As the Do not add anything to E85.
renewable sources such as corn outside temperature approaches Damage caused by additives
and other crops. freezing, ethanol fuel distributors would not be covered by the
Many service stations will not have should supply winter grade ethanol, vehicle warranty.
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump the same as with unleaded Notice: This vehicle was not
available. The U.S. Department of gasoline. designed for fuel that contains
Energy has an alternative fuels The starting characteristics of E85 methanol. Do not use fuel
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ fuel make it unsuitable for use when containing methanol. It can
locator/stations/) that can help you temperatures fall below −18°C corrode metal parts in the fuel
find E85 fuel. Those stations that (0°F). In the range of −18°C (0°F) to system and also damage plastic
do have E85 should have a label 0°C (32°F), it may take more time to and rubber parts. That damage
indicating ethanol content. Do not start the engine. would not be covered under the
use the fuel if the ethanol content is E85 has less energy per liter vehicle warranty.
greater than 85%. (gallon) than gasoline, so you will
At a minimum, E85 should meet need to refill the fuel tank more
ASTM Specification D 5798 or often when using E85 than when
CGSB Specification 3.512. Filling you are using gasoline. See Filling
the tank with fuel mixtures that do the Tank on page 9‑68.
Filling the Tank WARNING (Continued)

The cap is behind a locking fuel
door on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
{ WARNING . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
To open the fuel door, push the
cap is opened too quickly.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the rearward center edge in and release
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is and it will open.
death. more likely in hot weather. To remove the tethered fuel cap,
. To help avoid injuries to you Open the fuel cap slowly and turn it slowly counterclockwise.
and others, read and follow wait for any hiss noise to stop
then unscrew the cap all While refueling, hang the tethered
all the instructions on the fuel fuel cap from the hook on the
pump island. the way
fuel door.
. Turn off the engine when If the fuel cap is not installed
refueling. properly, a message will appear on
. Keep sparks, flames, and the Driver Information Center
smoking materials away display. See Fuel System Messages
from fuel. on page 5‑36.
. Do not leave the fuel pump When reinstalling the cap, turn it
unattended. clockwise until it clicks once,
otherwise the malfunction indicator
. Do not reenter the vehicle
lamp could turn on. See Malfunction
while pumping fuel.
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑16.
. Keep children away from the
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
fuel pump and never let
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
children pump fuel.
few seconds after you have finished
(Continued) pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted malfunction indicator lamp to

surfaces as soon as possible. See light, and could damage the fuel WARNING (Continued)
Exterior Care on page 10‑81. tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it opening of the container
clockwise until it clicks once. Make page 5‑16.
before dispensing fuel, and
sure the cap is fully installed. The keep it in contact with the fill
diagnostic system can determine if Filling a Portable Fuel opening until filling is
the fuel cap has been left off or Container complete.
improperly installed. This would . Fill the container no more
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
{ WARNING than 95% full to allow for
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑16. expansion.
Filling a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle can cause
. Do not smoke, light matches,
{ WARNING fuel vapors that can ignite either or use lighters while
pumping fuel.
by static electricity or other
If a fire starts while you are means. You or others could be . Avoid using cell phones or
refueling, do not remove the badly burned and the vehicle other electronic devices.
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by could be damaged. Always:
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
. Use approved fuel
Leave the area immediately. containers.
. Remove the container from
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
bed before filling.
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer. The . Place the container on the
wrong type of fuel cap might not ground.
fit properly, might cause the (Continued)

. Do not tow a trailer during the
Towing first 2 414 km (1500 mi) to { WARNING
prevent damage to the engine,
General Towing axle, or other parts. When towing a trailer, exhaust
Information gases may collect at the rear of
. Then during the first 800 km
the vehicle and enter if the
Only use towing equipment that has (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
been designed for the vehicle. window is open.
Contact your dealer or trailering do not make starts at full throttle.
dealer for assistance with preparing . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). When towing a trailer:
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read Shift the transmission to a lower . Do not drive with the liftgate,
the entire section before towing a gear if the transmission shifts trunk/hatch, or rear-most
trailer. too often under heavy loads and/ window open.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see or hilly conditions. . Fully open the air outlets on
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑78. . Do not use Adaptive Cruise or under the instrument
For towing the vehicle behind Control when towing. panel.
another vehicle such as a motor
home, see Recreational Vehicle
. The Automatic Collision . Also adjust the climate
Towing on page 10‑78. Preparation System should be control system to a setting
set to Off when towing. See that brings in only outside air.
Active Emergency Braking See “Climate Control System”
Driving Characteristics System on page 9‑58. in the Index.
and Towing Tips
For more information about
Driving with a Trailer Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
When towing a trailer: Exhaust on page 9‑24.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to
trailer towing.
Towing a trailer requires a certain Passing When turning with a trailer, make
amount of experience. The wider turns than normal. Do this
More passing distance is needed
combination you are driving is so the trailer will not strike soft
when towing a trailer. The
longer and not as responsive as the shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
combination will not accelerate
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with or other objects. Avoid jerky or
as quickly and is longer so it is
the handling and braking of the rig sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
necessary to go much farther
before setting out for the open road. advance.
beyond the passed vehicle before
Before starting, check all trailer hitch returning to the lane. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
parts and attachments, safety out, the arrows on the instrument
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, Backing Up cluster will still flash for turns. It is
tires, and mirrors. If the trailer Hold the bottom of the steering important to check occasionally to
has electric brakes, start the wheel with one hand. To move the be sure the trailer bulbs are still
combination moving and then apply trailer to the left, move that hand to working.
the trailer brake controller by hand the left. To move the trailer to the
to be sure the brakes work. Driving on Grades
right, move your hand to the right.
During the trip, check occasionally Always back up slowly and, Reduce speed and shift to a
to be sure that the load is secure if possible, have someone lower gear before starting down a
and the lamps and any trailer guide you. long or steep downgrade. If the
brakes still work. transmission is not shifted down, the
Making Turns brakes might get hot and no longer
Following Distance Notice: Making very sharp turns work well.
Stay at least twice as far behind the while trailering could cause the Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
vehicle ahead as you would when trailer to come in contact with the the transmission to a lower gear if
driving the vehicle without a trailer. vehicle. The vehicle could be the transmission shifts too often
This can help to avoid heavy damaged. Avoid making very under heavy loads and/or hilly
braking and sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. conditions.
When towing at high altitude on 3. Shift into a gear.

steep uphill grades, consider the WARNING (Continued)
4. Release the parking brake.
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal the vehicle and the trailer can be 5. Let up on the brake pedal.
altitudes. If the engine is turned off damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface. 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
immediately after towing at high clear of the chocks.
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to 7. Stop and have someone pick up
If parking the rig on a hill:
engine overheating. To avoid this, and store the chocks.
let the engine run while parked, 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn Maintenance when Trailer
preferably on level ground, with the Towing
automatic transmission in P (Park) the wheels into the curb if facing
for a few minutes before turning the downhill or into traffic if facing The vehicle needs service more
engine off. If the overheat warning uphill. often when pulling a trailer. See
comes on, see Engine Overheating 2. Have someone place chocks Maintenance Schedule on
on page 10‑22. under the trailer wheels. page 11‑3. Things that are
especially important in trailer
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in operation are automatic
place, release the regular brakes transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load. lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then brake system. It is a good idea to
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift inspect these before and during
the trailer attached can be into P (Park). the trip.
dangerous. If something goes
5. Release the brake pedal. Check periodically to see that all
wrong, the rig could start to move. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill
(Continued) 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
Trailer Towing (With Maximum trailer weight is calculated If there are a lot of options,
assuming only the driver is in the equipment, passengers, or cargo in
V6 Engine) tow vehicle and it has all the the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Before pulling a trailer, there are required trailering equipment. The weight the vehicle can carry, which
three important considerations that weight of additional optional will also reduce the trailer weight the
have to do with weight: equipment, passengers, and vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
cargo in the tow vehicle must be the tongue load must be added to
. The weight of the trailer.
subtracted from the maximum trailer the GVW because the vehicle will
. The weight of the trailer tongue. weight. be carrying that weight, too. See
. The total weight on your Ask your dealer for trailering Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11.
vehicle's tires. information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
Weight of the Trailer See Customer Assistance Offices
How heavy can a trailer safely be? (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
It should never weigh more than Customer Assistance Offices
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
can be too heavy. Weight of the Trailer Tongue
It depends on how the rig is used. The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
For example, speed, altitude, road an important weight to measure
grades, outside temperature, and because it affects the total gross
how much the vehicle is used to pull weight of the vehicle. The Gross
a trailer are all important. It can Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
depend on any special equipment curb weight of the vehicle, any The trailer tongue (1) should weigh
on the vehicle, and the amount of cargo carried in it, and the people 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. who will be riding in the vehicle. trailer weight (2).
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section.
After loading the trailer, weigh the Towing Equipment Safety Chains
trailer and then the tongue,
Hitches Always attach chains between the
separately, to see if the weights are
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
proper. If they are not, adjustments Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue of
might be made by moving some See your dealer or a hitch dealer for the trailer to help prevent the tongue
items around in the trailer. assistance. from contacting the road if it
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's . The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
Tires is not intended for hitches. Do Leave enough slack so the rig can
not attach rental hitches or other turn. Never allow safety chains to
Be sure the vehicle's tires are drag on the ground.
inflated to the upper limit for cold bumper-type hitches to it. Use
tires. These numbers can be found only a frame-mounted hitch that Trailer Brakes
on the Tire and Loading Information does not attach to the bumper.
Does the trailer have its own
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on . Will any holes be made in the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
page 9‑11. Make sure not to go over body of the vehicle when the the instructions for the trailer brakes
the GVW limit for the vehicle, trailer hitch is installed? If so, so they are installed, adjusted, and
including the weight of the trailer seal the holes when the hitch is maintained properly.
tongue. removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly Because the vehicle has antilock
Trailer Towing carbon monoxide (CO) from the brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
exhaust can get into the vehicle. brake system. If this is done, both
(With L4 Engine) brake systems will not work well,
See Engine Exhaust on
The vehicle is neither designed nor page 9‑24. or at all.
intended to tow a trailer.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle or cause components to
not work and would not be
covered by the warranty. Always
check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑31 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑31.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Vehicle Care Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Electrical System
Electrical System
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Fuses and Circuit
General Information All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28 Engine Compartment Fuse
California Proposition Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Lock Control Function Instrument Panel Fuse
California Perchlorate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Ignition Transmission Lock Rear Compartment Fuse
Accessories and Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Park Brake and P (Park)
Vehicle Checks Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29 Wheels and Tires
Doing Your Own Wiper Blade Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Windshield Replacement . . . 10-30 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Compartment Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Headlamp Aiming Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Bulb Replacement Tire Terminology and
Automatic Transmission Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Manual Transmission High Intensity Discharge Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16 Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-32 Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-22
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Jump Starting General Information

Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
When It Is Time for New For service and parts needs, visit
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Towing your dealer. You will receive
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-78 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Different Size Tires and Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Genuine GM parts have one of
Uniform Tire Quality Appearance Care these marks:
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Special handling may be necessary. Damage to vehicle components

For additional information, see resulting from modifications or the
65 Warning www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ installation or use of non‐GM
Most motor vehicles, including this perchlorate. certified parts, including control
one, contain and/or emit chemicals module or software modifications, is
known to the State of California to Accessories and not covered under the terms of the
cause cancer and birth defects or vehicle warranty and may affect
other reproductive harm. Engine
Modifications remaining warranty coverage for
exhaust, many parts and systems, Adding non‐dealer accessories or affected parts.
many fluids, and some component making modifications to the vehicle
GM Accessories are designed to
wear by-products contain and/or can affect vehicle performance and
complement and function with other
emit these chemicals. safety, including such things as
systems on the vehicle. See your
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
dealer to accessorize the vehicle
California Perchlorate handling, emissions systems,
using genuine GM Accessories
aerodynamics, durability, and
Materials Requirements electronic systems like antilock
installed by a dealer technician.
Certain types of automotive brakes, traction control, and stability Also, see Adding Equipment to the
applications, such as airbag control. These accessories or Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, modifications could even cause page 3‑31.
and lithium batteries contained in malfunction or damage not covered
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, by the vehicle warranty.
may contain perchlorate materials.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Keep a record with all parts receipts
work, use the proper service and list the mileage and the date of
manual. It tells you much more any service work performed. See
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle Maintenance Records on
Service Work than this manual can. To order the page 11‑16.
proper service manual, see Service Notice: Even small amounts of
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑17.
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
It can be dangerous to work on This vehicle has an airbag system. contaminants to contact the
your vehicle if you do not have Before attempting to do your own fluids, reservoir caps,
the proper knowledge, service service work, see Servicing the or dipsticks.
manual, tools, or parts. Always Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
follow owner manual procedures page 3‑31.
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood To close the hood:

To open the hood: Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on properly. Then,
bring the hood from full open to
within 152 mm (6 in) of the closed
position. Pause, then push the front
center of the hood with a swift, firm
motion to fully close the hood.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

move the secondary hood
release lever toward the right
side of the vehicle.
1. Pull the hood release handle
inside the vehicle. It is on the 3. Lift the hood.
lower left side of the instrument
panel.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.0L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Windshield Washer Fluid 4. Engine Compartment Fuse 7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on Block on page 10‑34. Oil on page 10‑11.
page 10‑23. 5. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of 8. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
2. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. View). See Cooling System on page 10‑16.
See Battery on page 10‑26. page 10‑17. 9. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
3. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and 6. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine See Brakes on page 10‑24 and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling Oil on page 10‑11. Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.
System on page 10‑17.
10-8 Vehicle Care
2.5L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Windshield Washer Fluid 4. Engine Compartment Fuse 7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on Block on page 10‑34. Oil on page 10‑11.
page 10‑23. 5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of 8. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
2. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. View). See Cooling System on page 10‑16.
See Battery on page 10‑26. page 10‑17. 9. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
3. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and 6. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine See Brakes on page 10‑24 and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling Oil on page 10‑11. Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.
System on page 10‑17.
10-10 Vehicle Care
3.6L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-11
1. Windshield Washer Fluid Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil

Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
page 10‑23.
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
2. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
See Battery on page 10‑26. Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
3. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
Pressure Cap. See Cooling your investment: See Engine Compartment Overview
System on page 10‑17. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
4. Engine Compartment Fuse to the proper specification and of
Block on page 10‑34. the proper viscosity grade. See 1. If the engine has been running
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” recently, turn off the engine and
5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of in this section. allow several minutes for the oil
View). See Cooling System on to drain back into the oil pan.
page 10‑17. . Check the engine oil level Checking the oil level too soon
regularly and maintain the after engine shutoff will not
6. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine proper oil level. See “Checking
Oil on page 10‑11. provide an accurate oil level
Engine Oil” and “When to Add reading.
7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Engine Oil” in this section.
Oil on page 10‑11.
8. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
. Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
{ WARNING
page 10‑16. Life System on page 10‑13. The engine oil dipstick handle
9. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. . Always dispose of engine oil may be hot; it could burn you.
See Brakes on page 10‑24 and properly. See “What to Do with Use a towel or glove to touch the
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15. Used Oil” in this section. dipstick handle.
10-12 Vehicle Care
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it be damaged. You should drain This certification mark indicates that
with a paper towel or cloth, then out the excess oil or limit driving the oil has been approved to the
push it back in all the way. of the vehicle and seek a service dexos1 specification.
Remove it again, keeping the tip professional to remove the
down, and check the level. excess amount of oil.
When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
If the oil is below the cross-hatched engine oil fill cap.
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil Add enough oil to put the level
and then recheck the level. See somewhere in the proper operating
Notice: Failure to use the
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in range. Push the dipstick all the way
recommended engine oil or
this section for an explanation of back in when through.
equivalent can result in engine
what kind of oil to use. For engine Selecting the Right Engine Oil damage not covered by the
oil crankcase capacity, see vehicle warranty. Check with your
Capacities and Specifications on Selecting the right engine oil dealer or service provider on
page 12‑2. depends on both the proper oil whether the oil is approved to the
specification and viscosity grade. dexos1 specification.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. See Recommended Fluids and
Oil levels above or below the Lubricants on page 11‑13. Viscosity Grade
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful Specification SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
to the engine. If you find that you grade for the 2.0L L4 engine and
Use and ask for licensed engine the 3.6L V6 engine. SAE 5W-20 is
have an oil level above the oils with the dexos1® approved
operating range, i.e., the engine the best viscosity grade for the
certification mark. Engine oils 2.5L L4 engine. Do not use other
has so much oil that the oil level meeting the requirements for the
gets above the cross-hatched viscosity grade oils such as
vehicle should have the dexos1 SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
area that shows the proper approved certification mark.
operating range, the engine could
Vehicle Care 10-13
Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
area of extreme cold, where the
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
temperature falls below −29°C
elements that can be unhealthy for
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be This vehicle has a computer system
your skin and could even cause
used. An oil of this viscosity grade that indicates when to change the
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
will provide easier cold starting engine oil and filter. This is based
your skin for very long. Clean your
for the engine at extremely low on a combination of factors which
skin and nails with soap and water,
temperatures. When selecting an oil include engine revolutions, engine
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
of the appropriate viscosity grade, temperature, and miles driven.
properly dispose of clothing or rags
always select an oil of the correct Based on driving conditions, the
containing used engine oil. See the
specification. See “Specification” mileage at which an oil change is
manufacturer's warnings about the
earlier in this section for more indicated can vary considerably. For
use and disposal of oil products.
information. the oil life system to work properly,
Used oil can be a threat to the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine the system must be reset every time
environment. If you change your the oil is changed.
Oil Flushes own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the
specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground,
dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or
is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-14 Vehicle Care
When the system has calculated If the system is ever reset 2. Press SEL on the DIC controls
that oil life has been diminished, it accidentally, the oil must be and hold SEL down for a few
indicates that an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) seconds to clear the CHANGE
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE since the last oil change. ENGINE OIL SOON message
OIL SOON message comes on. See Remember to reset the oil life and reset the oil life at 100%.
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑35. system whenever the oil is changed. Be careful not to reset the oil life
Change the oil as soon as possible display accidentally at any time
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System other than after the oil is
It is possible that, if driving under changed. It cannot be reset
the best conditions, the oil life Reset the system whenever the accurately until the next oil
system might indicate that an oil engine oil is changed so that the change.
change is not necessary for up to a system can calculate the next
year. The engine oil and filter must engine oil change. To reset the The oil life system can also be reset
be changed at least once a year system: as follows:
and at this time the system must be 1. Turn the ignition on with the
reset. Your dealer has trained 1. Using the DIC controls on the
right side of the steering wheel, engine off.
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also display REMAINING OIL LIFE 2. Fully press and release the
important to check the oil regularly on the DIC. See Driver accelerator pedal three times
over the course of an oil drain Information Center (DIC) on within five seconds.
interval and keep it at the proper page 5‑26. When remaining
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
level. oil life is low, the CHANGE
SOON message is not on, the
ENGINE OIL SOON message
system is reset.
will appear on the display. See
Engine Oil Messages on The system is reset when the
page 5‑35. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message is off.
Vehicle Care 10-15
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Change the fluid and filter at the Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
message comes back on when the intervals listed in Maintenance A fluid loss in this system could
vehicle is started, the engine oil life Schedule on page 11‑3, and be sure indicate a problem. Have the
system has not been reset. Repeat to use the fluid listed in system inspected and repaired.
the procedure. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13. When to Check and What
Automatic Transmission to Use
Fluid Manual Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid How to Check Manual
It is not necessary to check Transmission Fluid
the transmission fluid level. It is not necessary to check the
A transmission fluid leak is the manual transmission fluid level. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak A transmission fluid leak is the reservoir cap has either a symbol or
occurs, take the vehicle to your only reason for fluid loss. If a leak text specifying the type of brake
dealer and have it repaired as soon occurs, take the vehicle to your fluid. The common brake/clutch fluid
as possible. dealer and have it repaired as soon reservoir is filled with GM approved
The vehicle is not equipped with a as possible. See Recommended DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on
transmission fluid level dipstick. Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑13 the reservoir cap. See Engine
There is a special procedure for for the proper fluid to use. Compartment Overview on
checking and changing the page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
transmission fluid. Because this Hydraulic Clutch
procedure is difficult, this should be For vehicles with a manual
done at the dealer. Contact the transmission, it is not necessary to
dealer for additional information. regularly check brake/clutch fluid
unless there is a leak suspected.
10-16 Vehicle Care
How to Check and Add Fluid When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the air cleaner/
Cleaner/Filter filter:
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the scheduled maintenance intervals.
side of the reservoir. The brake/ See Maintenance Schedule on
hydraulic clutch fluid system should page 11‑3. If you are driving in
be closed and sealed. dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
Do not remove the cap to check filter at each engine oil change.
the fluid level or to top off the fluid How to Inspect the Engine Air
level. Remove the cap only when Cleaner/Filter
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line. To inspect the engine air cleaner/
filter, remove the filter from the
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the 2.0L L4 LTG Engine Shown, 2.5L
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the filter remains covered with dirt, a L4 LCV Engine, and 3.6L V6 LFX
engine compartment on the driver new filter is required. Engine Similar
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on 1. Remove the four screws and lift
page 10‑6 for location. the cover out of the assembly.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
3. Lower the cover and secure with
the four screws.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 for replacement intervals.
Vehicle Care 10-17
Cooling System
{ WARNING
The cooling system allows the
Operating the engine with the air engine to maintain the correct
cleaner/filter off can cause you or working temperature.
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is 2.5L L4 LCV Engine

off, dirt can easily get into the 1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
engine, which could damage it. Pressure Cap
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving. 2. Engine Cooling Fans (Out
2.0L L4 LTG Engine of View)
1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
of View)
10-18 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING
The cooling system in the vehicle is
Heater and radiator hoses, and filled with DEX-COOL engine
other engine parts, can be very coolant. See Maintenance Schedule
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, on page 11‑3 and Recommended
you can be burned. Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑13.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it The following explains the cooling
could lose all coolant. That could system and how to check and add
cause an engine fire, and you coolant when it is low. If there is a
could be burned. Get any leak problem with engine overheating,
3.6L V6 LFX Engine fixed before you drive the vehicle. see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑22.
1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap Notice: Using coolant other than What to Use
2. Engine Cooling Fans (Out DEX‐COOL® can cause premature
of View) engine, heater core, or radiator { WARNING
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing Adding only plain water or some
{ WARNING sooner, at the first maintenance other liquid to the cooling system
An electric engine cooling fan service after each 30,000 miles can be dangerous. Plain water
under the hood can start up even (50 000 km) or 24 months, and other liquids, can boil before
when the engine is not running whichever occurs first. Any the proper coolant mixture will.
repairs would not be covered by The coolant warning system is set
and can cause injury. Keep
the vehicle warranty. Always use for the proper coolant mixture.
hands, clothing, and tools away
DEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolant With plain water or the wrong
from any underhood electric fan. in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-19
Notice: If improper coolant Checking Coolant

WARNING (Continued) mixture, inhibitors, or additives
The vehicle must be on a level
are used in the vehicle cooling
mixture, the engine could get too surface when checking the coolant
system, the engine could
hot but you would not get the level.
overheat and be damaged. Too
overheat warning. The engine much water in the mixture can It is normal to see coolant moving in
could catch fire and you or freeze and crack engine cooling the upper coolant hose return line
others could be burned. Use a parts. The repairs would not be when the engine is running. It is
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable covered by the warranty. Use only also normal to see bubbles entering
water and DEX-COOL coolant. the proper mixture of engine the surge tank through the
coolant for the cooling system. small hose.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean See Recommended Fluids and Check to see if coolant is visible in
drinkable water and DEX-COOL Lubricants on page 11‑13. the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
coolant. This mixture: Never dispose of engine coolant by inside the coolant surge tank is
. Gives freezing protection down putting it in the trash, pouring it on boiling, do not do anything else until
the ground, or into sewers, streams, it cools down.
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature. or bodies of water. Have the coolant If coolant is visible but the coolant
changed by an authorized service level is not at or above the COLD
. Gives boiling protection up to center, familiar with legal
129°C (265°F), engine FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of
requirements regarding used clean drinkable water and
temperature. coolant disposal. This will help DEX-COOL coolant.
. Protects against rust and protect the environment and your
corrosion. health. Be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
. Will not damage aluminum parts.
. Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If no coolant is visible in the coolant

surge tank, add coolant as follows: { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
How to Add Coolant to the Steam and scalding liquids from a could catch fire and you or
Coolant Surge Tank hot cooling system can blow out others could be burned. Use a
and burn you badly. Never turn 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure. the cap when the cooling system, water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Failure to follow this procedure including the surge tank pressure
could cause the engine to cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling Notice: In cold weather, water
overheat and be severely system and surge tank pressure can freeze and crack the engine,
damaged. cap to cool. radiator, heater core and other
If no problem is found, check to see parts. Use the recommended
if coolant is visible in the coolant coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
surge tank. If coolant is visible but { WARNING
the coolant level is not at the bottom
of the fill neck, add a 50/50 mixture Adding only plain water or some { WARNING
of clean, drinkable water and other liquid to the cooling system
DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant can be dangerous. Plain water You can be burned if you spill
surge tank, but be sure the cooling and other liquids, can boil before coolant on hot engine parts.
system, including the coolant surge the proper coolant mixture will. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
tank pressure cap, is cool before The coolant warning system is set and it will burn if the engine parts
you do it. for the proper coolant mixture. are hot enough. Do not spill
With plain water or the wrong coolant on a hot engine.
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-21
2. Keep turning the pressure cap proper DEX-COOL coolant

slowly and remove it. Open the mixture to the surge tank top
surge tank service port cap to chamber until the level reaches
the lower chamber the bottom of the fill neck.
3. Fill the surge tank top chamber 5. Replace the surge tank pressure
with the proper DEX-COOL cap tightly and close the surge
coolant mixture to the bottom of tank service port cap.
the fill neck. The top chamber Notice: If the pressure cap is not
needs to be completely full. Fill tightly installed, coolant loss and
the surge tank bottom chamber possible engine damage may
through the service port to occur. Be sure the cap is properly
approximately half. and tightly secured.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
4. With the coolant surge tank Check the level in the surge tank
pressure cap from the top
pressure cap off and the surge top and bottom chambers when the
chamber when the cooling
tank service port cap open, start cooling system has cooled down.
system, including the coolant
the engine and let it run until you If the coolant is not at the proper
surge tank pressure cap and
can feel the upper radiator hose levels, repeat Steps 1–3 and
upper radiator hose, is no
getting hot. Watch out for the reinstall the pressure cap and close
longer hot.
engine cooling fan. the service port. If the coolant still is
Turn the pressure cap slowly
By this time, the coolant level not at the proper levels when the
counterclockwise. If you hear a
inside the coolant surge tank top system cools down again, see your
hiss, wait for that to stop. This
chamber may be lower. If the dealer.
will allow any pressure still
level is lower, add more of the
left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Engine Overheating If Steam Is Coming from the If No Steam Is Coming from

Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of the engine overheating. If an engine overheat warning is
If the decision is made not to lift the
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
hood when this warning appears, Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
get service help right away. See can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the
Roadside Service (Mexico) on just open the hood. Stay away vehicle:
page 13‑7 or Roadside Service from the engine if you see or hear . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑10. steam coming from it. Just turn it
If the decision is made to lift the off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving.
hood, make sure the vehicle is the vehicle until it cools down. . Idles for long periods in traffic.
parked on a level surface. Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open If the overheat warning is displayed
Then check to see if the engine with no sign of steam:
cooling fan is running. If the engine the hood.
is overheating, the fan should be 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
If you keep driving when the
running. If it is not, do not continue engine is overheated, the liquids 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
to run the engine. Have the vehicle in it can catch fire. You or others temperature and to the highest
serviced. could be badly burned. Stop the fan speed. Open the windows as
Notice: Running the engine engine if it overheats, and get out necessary.
without coolant may cause of the vehicle until the engine 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
damage or a fire. Vehicle damage is cool. idle in N (Neutral) for an
would not be covered by the automatic transmission or
warranty. Neutral for a manual
transmission while stopped.
Vehicle Care 10-23
If it is safe to do so, pull off Washer Fluid Notice

the road, shift to P (Park) or . When using concentrated
N (Neutral) for an automatic What to Use washer fluid, follow the
transmission or Neutral for a When windshield washer fluid is manufacturer instructions for
manual transmission, and let the needed, be sure to read the adding water.
engine idle. manufacturer's instructions before . Do not mix water with
If the overheat warning no longer use. If operating the vehicle in an
ready-to-use washer fluid.
displays, the vehicle can be driven. area where the temperature may
Water can cause the solution
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly fall below freezing, use a fluid that to freeze and damage the
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe has sufficient protection against washer fluid tank and other
vehicle distance from the vehicle in freezing.
parts of the washer system.
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally. Adding Washer Fluid . Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
If the warning continues, pull over, very cold. This allows for
stop, and park the vehicle fluid expansion if freezing
right away. occurs, which could
If there is no sign of steam, idle the damage the tank if it is
engine for three minutes while completely full.
parked. If the warning is still . Do not use engine coolant
displayed, turn off the engine until it Open the cap with the washer (antifreeze) in the windshield
cools down. symbol on it. Add washer fluid washer. It can damage the
until the tank is full. See Engine windshield washer system
Compartment Overview on and paint.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Brake Fluid fixed, since a leak means that Checking Brake Fluid
sooner or later the brakes will
The brake/clutch fluid can be
not work well.
checked without taking off the cap
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. by looking at the brake/clutch fluid
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. reservoir.
If fluid is added when the linings are
The fluid level should be above
worn, there will be too much fluid
MIN. If it is not, have the brake/
when new brake linings are
clutch hydraulic system checked to
The brake/clutch master cylinder installed. Add or remove fluid, as
see if there is a leak.
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake necessary, only when work is done
fluid as indicated on the reservoir on the brake/clutch hydraulic After work is done on the brake/
cap. See Engine Compartment system. clutch hydraulic system, make sure
Overview on page 10‑6 for the the level is above MIN but not over
location of the reservoir. { WARNING the MAX mark.
There are only two reasons why the When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
If too much brake fluid is added, it low level, the brake warning light
brake fluid level in the reservoir
can spill on the engine and burn, comes on. See Brake System
might go down:
if the engine is hot enough. You Warning Light on page 5‑18.
. The brake fluid level goes down or others could be burned, and
because of normal brake lining the vehicle could be damaged. What to Add
wear. When new linings are Add brake fluid only when work is Use only new GM approved DOT 3
installed, the fluid level goes done on the brake/clutch brake fluid from a sealed container.
back up. hydraulic system. See Recommended Fluids and
. A fluid leak in the brake/clutch Lubricants on page 11‑13.
hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake/clutch hydraulic system
10-26 Vehicle Care
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid

. If brake fluid is spilled on the After a power loss, such as
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces, disconnecting the battery or
the cap before removing it. This the paint finish can be removing the maxi fuses in the
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to power distribution fuse block, the
reservoir. spill brake fluid on the following steps must be performed
vehicle. If you do, wash it off to calibrate the electronic throttle
immediately.
{ WARNING control. If this is not done, the
engine will not run properly.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the Battery 1. Turn the ignition on but do not
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the The battery is in the trunk, beneath start the engine.
brakes might not work well. This the trim panel, on the driver
could cause a crash. Always use 2. Leave the ignition on for at least
side of the vehicle. Refer to the three minutes so that the
the proper brake/clutch fluid. replacement number shown on the electronic throttle control will
original battery label when a new cycle and relearn its home
Notice battery is needed. position.
. Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake/clutch
{ WARNING 3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Start and run the engine for at
hydraulic system parts. For Battery posts, terminals, and least 30 seconds.
example, just a few drops of related accessories contain lead
mineral-based oil, such as and lead compounds, chemicals
engine oil, in the brake known to the State of California to
hydraulic system can
cause cancer and reproductive
damage brake hydraulic
harm. Wash hands after handling.
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant

If the vehicle is equipped with
{ WARNING All-Wheel-Drive (AWD), this is an
additional system that needs
Batteries have acid that can burn
lubrication.
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are Transfer Case
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑75 for tips on working When to Check Lubricant
around a battery without It is not necessary to regularly
getting hurt. check the transfer case fluid unless
a leak is suspected or an unusual
noise is heard. A fluid loss could
Infrequent Usage: Remove the indicate a problem. Have it
black, negative (−) cable from the inspected and repaired.
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
1. Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug
10-28 Vehicle Care
To get an accurate reading, the Starter Switch Check 3. For automatic transmission
vehicle should be on a level vehicles, try to start the engine
surface. in each gear. The vehicle
If the level is below the bottom of
{ WARNING should start only in P (Park) or
the fill plug hole, on the transfer When you are doing this N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
case, some lubricant will need to be in any other position, contact
inspection, the vehicle could
added. Add enough lubricant to your dealer for service.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
raise the level to the bottom of the moves, you or others could be For manual transmission
fill plug hole. Use care not to injured. vehicles, put the shift lever in
overtighten the fill plug. Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
What to Use 1. Before starting this check, be the engine. The vehicle should
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule sure there is enough room start only when the clutch pedal
to determine what kind of lubricant around the vehicle. is pushed down all the way to
to use. See Recommended Fluids 2. Firmly apply both the parking the floor. If the vehicle starts
and Lubricants on page 11‑13. brake and the regular brake. when the clutch pedal is not
See Parking Brake (Electric) on pushed all the way down,
page 9‑30 or Parking Brake contact your dealer for service.
(Manual) on page 9‑33.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
injured.
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move.
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
LOCK/OFF only when the shift vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. lever is in P (Park). your foot on the regular brake, set
See Parking Brake (Electric) on . With the key access ignition the parking brake.
(Manual) on page 9‑33. system, the ignition key should . To check the parking brake's
come out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine
Be ready to apply the regular See Ignition Positions on running and the transmission in
brake immediately if the vehicle page 9‑16. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
begins to move.
Contact your dealer if service is pressure from the regular brake
required. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
10-30 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park) 4. Remove the wiper blade.
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to Allowing the wiper blade arm to
P (Park). Then release the touch the windshield when no
parking brake followed by the wiper blade is installed could
regular brake. damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
Contact your dealer if service is be covered by the vehicle
required. warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the
Wiper Blade Replacement windshield.
Windshield wiper blades should be 5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
inspected for wear and cracking. blade replacement.
See Maintenance Schedule on 2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
page 11‑3. of the wiper blade where the Windshield Replacement
wiper arm attaches.
Replacement blades come in The windshield is part of the HUD
different types and are removed in 3. With the latch open, pull the
system. If the vehicle has to have
different ways. For proper type wiper blade down toward the
the windshield replaced, get one
and length, see Maintenance windshield far enough to release
that is designed for HUD or the
Replacement Parts on page 11‑15. it from the J-hooked end of the
HUD image may look out of focus.
wiper arm.
To replace the windshield wiper
blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10‑33. { WARNING
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure The high intensity discharge
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact lighting system operates at a very
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components,
Halogen Bulbs you could be seriously injured.
Have your dealer or a qualified
{ WARNING technician service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you After an HID headlamp bulb has
drop or scratch the bulb. You or been replaced, the beam might be a
others could be injured. Be sure slightly different shade than it was
to read and follow the instructions originally. This is normal.
on the bulb package.
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Back-Up Lamps 4. Install the new bulb in the bulb

socket.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning
clockwise.
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Assembly
1. Bulb Socket
1. Back-Up Bulb Socket
2. Bulb
2. Back-Up Lamp Assembly
3. Lamp Assembly
To replace one of these bulbs:
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Reach under the rear fascia and Lamp Assembly
locate the back-up lamp 1. Push the lamp assembly (3)
assembly. toward the center of the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket (1) by 2. Pull the lamp assembly down to
turning counterclockwise and remove.
pulling straight out of the lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
assembly (2). counterclockwise to remove it
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. from the lamp assembly (3).
Vehicle Care 10-33
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of Electrical System Headlamp Wiring
the bulb socket (1).
An electrical overload may cause
5. Push the replacement bulb Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
straight into the bulb socket and some cases to remain off. Have the
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
Overload headlamp wiring checked right away
install it into the lamp assembly. The vehicle has fuses and circuit if the lamps go on and off or
6. Push the lamp assembly back breakers to protect against an remain off.
into position until the release tab electrical system overload.
Windshield Wipers
locks into place. When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to
Replacement Bulbs and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools
Bulb and will then restart.
Exterior Lamp normal or the problem is fixed. This
Number
greatly reduces the chance of circuit Although the circuit is protected
Back-Up Lamp 921 overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload
(W16W) electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may
License Plate Lamp W5W LL Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage.
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow
For replacement bulbs not listed from the windshield before using the
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers.
here, contact your dealer. of the identical size and rating.
If the overload is caused by an
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed.
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
Breakers Fuse Block shown.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are The underhood fuse block is on the Notice: Spilling liquid on any
protected from short circuits by a passenger side of the engine electrical component on the
combination of fuses and circuit compartment. vehicle may damage it. Always
breakers. This greatly reduces the keep the covers on any electrical
chance of damage caused by component.
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible. Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑34, Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑37, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑40.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Number Usage
1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Body Control
Module 6
5 Not Used
6 Driver Power Seat
7 Not Used
*8 Headlamp Washer
Relay
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Passenger
Power Seat
14 Body Control
Module 5
10-36 Vehicle Care
Number Usage Number Usage Number Usage

15 Passive Entry/ *29 AFS AHL/ 41 Fuel Heater
Passive Start Pedestrian
*42 AIR Solenoid Relay
Protection
16 Not Used
43 Washer
30 Passenger Window
*17 Headlamp Washer
Switch 44 Rear Washer Relay
18 Not Used
31 Body Control 45 Front Washer Relay
19 Antilock Brake Module 7 46 Not Used
System Pump
32 Sunroof 47 Instrument Panel
20 Antilock Brake
33 Front Wiper Body Ignition
System Valve
34 AOS Display/MIL 48 Fuel System
*21 AIR Pump
Ignition Control Module
22 Not Used Ignition
35 Rear Electrical
23 Wiper Control Relay Center Ignition 49 Heated Steering
Wheel
24 Wiper Speed Relay 36 Spare PT Fuse
*50 Steering
25 Engine Control 37 Oxygen Sensor
Column Lock
Module Relay
38 Ignition Coils/
*51 Coolant Pump
*26 AIR Pump Relay Injectors
*52 Coolant Pump
27 Spare/Heated 39 Ignition Coils/
Relay
Seat 2 Injectors/Spare
53 Air Conditioning
28 Body Control 40 Engine Control
Compressor Clutch
Module 1/Spare Module
Vehicle Care 10-37
Number Usage Number Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

*54 AIR Solenoid *65 Right High Intensity Block
Discharge The instrument panel fuse block is
55 Transmission
Headlamp in the end of the driver side of the
Control Module/
Spare 66 Headlamp High instrument panel.
Left/Right
*56 Headlamp Low
Relay 67 Horn
57 Headlamp high 68 Horn Relay
Relay
69 Cooling Fan
58 Starter
70 Aero Shutter
59 Starter Relay
71 Transmission
60 Run/Crank Relay Control Module
Ignition
*61 Vacuum Pump
Relay 72 Engine Control
Module Ignition
62 Air Conditioning
Control Relay *73 Brake To access the fuses, remove the
Vacuum Pump end panel by gently prying with a
*63 Adaptive Headlamp plastic tool near each clip, beginning
Leveling 74 Not Used at the point shown.
*64 Left High Intensity
Discharge * Optional
Headlamp
10-38 Vehicle Care
To install the end cover, insert the

tabs on the back of the cover into
the slots in the instrument panel at
the points shown. Align the clips
with the slots in the instrument
panel, and press the cover into
place.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Vehicle Care 10-39

1 Not Used 14 Radio/Heater, 28 Front Heater,
Ventilation, and Air Ventilation, and Air
2 Data Link
Conditioning Conditioning Blower
Connector
16 Not Used 29 Power Steering
3 Not Used
Column
17 Accessory Power
4 Not Used
Outlet 1 30 Not Used
5 Heater, Ventilation,
18 Accessory Power
and Air Conditioning Circuit Usage
Outlet 2
Control Breakers
19 Steering Wheel
6 Electric Steering CB7 Not Used
Controls
Column Lock
20 Not Used CB26 Not Used
8 Battery
21 Not Used
9 Heated Steering Relays Usage
Wheel 22 Logistics Shunt 2
K10 RAP/Accessory
10 Not Used 23 Not Used
K605 Logistics
11 Logistics Shunt 1 24 Not Used
K609 Not Used
12 SDM/AOS 25 Not Used
13 Cluster/HUD/ICS/ 27 RAP Relay
Steering Wheel
Controls
10-40 Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse

Block
The rear compartment fuse block is

behind a cover on the driver side of
the rear compartment.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-41

1 Not Used 14 Electric Parking 29 Not Used
Brake
2 Left Window 30 Semi-Active
15 Not Used Damping System
3 Body Control
Module 8 16 Trunk Release 31 Transfer Case
Control Module
4 Not Used 17 Run Relay
32 Theft Module/
5 Passive Entry 18 Logistics Relay
Universal Garage
Passive Start
19 Logistics Fuse Door Opener/Rain
Battery 1
Sensor
20 Rear Window
6 Body Control
Defogger Relay 33 UPA
Module 4
21 Mirror Window 34 Radio/DVD
7 Heated Mirrors
Module
35 Not Used
8 Amplifier
22 Not Used
36 Trailer
9 Rear Window
23 Canister Vent
Defogger 37 Fuel Pump/Fuel
24 Body Control System Control
10 Not Used
Module 2 Module
11 Trailer Connector
25 Rear Vision Camera 38 Not Used
12 OnStar (If
26 Not Used 39 Not Used
Equipped)
27 SBZA/LDW/EOCM 40 Not Used
13 Right Window
28 Trailer/Sunshade 41 Not Used
10-42 Vehicle Care
Number Usage Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued)

42 Memory Seat
Module Tires . Overloading the tires can
43 Body Control Every new GM vehicle has cause overheating as a
Module 3 high-quality tires made by a result of too much flexing.
44 Not Used leading tire manufacturer. See There could be a blowout
the warranty manual for and a serious crash. See
45 Battery Regulated information regarding the tire Vehicle Load Limits on
Voltage Control warranty and where to get page 9‑11.
46 Engine Control service. For additional . Underinflated tires pose
Module Battery information refer to the tire the same danger as
47 Not Used manufacturer. overloaded tires. The
48 Not Used resulting crash could
{ WARNING cause serious injury.
49 Trailer Module
. Poorly maintained and Check all tires frequently
improperly used tires are to maintain the
dangerous. recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be
(Continued) checked when the tires
are cold.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-43
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
. Overinflated tires are more . Improperly repaired tires all-season tires. These tires are
designed to provide good overall
likely to be cut, punctured, can cause a crash. Only
performance on most road surfaces
or broken by a sudden the dealer or an and weather conditions. Original
impact— such as when authorized tire service equipment tires designed to GM's
hitting a pothole. Keep center should repair, specific tire performance criteria
tires at the recommended replace, dismount, and have a TPC specification code
pressure. mount the tires. molded onto the sidewall. Original
equipment all-season tires can be
. Worn or old tires can . Do not spin the tires in
identified by the last two characters
cause a crash. If the tread excess of 56 km/h of this TPC code, which will
is badly worn, (35 mph) on slippery be “MS.”
replace them. surfaces such as snow,
Consider installing winter tires on
. Replace any tires that mud, ice, etc. Excessive
the vehicle if frequent driving on
have been damaged by spinning may cause the snow or ice-covered roads is
impacts with potholes, tires to explode. expected. All-season tires provide
curbs, etc. adequate performance for most
See Tire Pressure for winter driving conditions, but they
(Continued) may not offer the same level of
High-Speed Operation on
traction or performance as winter
page 10‑51 for inflation pressure
tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
adjustment for high-speed See Winter Tires on page 10‑44.
driving.
10-44 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of the
Winter Tires same size, load range, and { WARNING
This vehicle was not, originally, speed rating as the original
equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires. If the low tire warning light
tires are designed for increased displays on the instrument
Winter tires with the same speed
traction on snow and ice-covered cluster, the handling capabilities
rating as the original equipment tires
roads. Consider installing winter will be reduced during severe
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
tires on the vehicle if frequent maneuvers. Driving too fast could
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
driving on snow or ice-covered cause loss of control and you or
tires with a lower speed rating are
roads is expected. See your dealer others could be injured. Do not
chosen, never exceed the tire's
for details regarding winter tire drive over 90 km/h (55 mph) when
maximum speed capability.
availability and proper tire selection. the low tire warning light is
Also, see Buying New Tires on displayed. Drive cautiously and
page 10‑59. Run-Flat Tires
check the tire pressures as soon
With winter tires, there may be This vehicle, when new, may have as possible.
decreased dry road traction, had run-flat tires. There is no spare
increased road noise, and shorter tire, no tire changing equipment,
and no place to store a tire in the Run-flat tires can be driven on with
tread life. After changing to winter
vehicle. no air pressure. There is no need to
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
stop on the side of the road to
handling and braking. The vehicle also has a Tire change the tire. Continue driving;
If using winter tires: Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) however, do not drive too far or too
that indicates a loss of tire pressure fast. Driving on the tire may not be
. Use tires of the same brand and in any of the tires.
tread type on all four wheel possible if there is permanent
positions. damage. To prevent permanent
damage, keep speed below 80 km/h
(50 mph). With a light load the
vehicle can be driven up to 100 km
(60 mi); with a moderate load 80 km
Vehicle Care 10-45
(50 mi); and a heavy load 45 km normal driving conditions. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
(25 mi). As soon as possible, your dealer for wheel or sensor
contact the nearest authorized GM replacement. Useful information about a tire is
or run-flat servicing facility for molded into its sidewall. The
Notice: Using liquid sealants can
inspection and repair or damage the tire valves and tire examples show a typical
replacement. pressure monitor sensors in the passenger tire sidewall.
When driving on a deflated run-flat run-flat tires. This damage is not
tire, avoid potholes and other road covered by the vehicle warranty.
hazards that could damage the tire Do not use liquid sealants in
and/or wheel beyond repair. When a run-flat tires.
tire has been damaged, or driven
any distance while deflated, check Summer Tires
with an authorized run-flat tire
service center to determine whether This vehicle may come with high
the tire can be repaired or should be performance summer tires. These
replaced. To maintain the run-flat tires have a special tread and
feature, all replacement tires must compound that are optimized for
be run-flat tires. maximum dry and wet road
performance. This special tread
To locate the nearest GM or run-flat and compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
servicing facility, call Customer performance in cold climates, and
Assistance.
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
on ice and snow. We recommend combination of letters and
The valve stems on run-flat tires installing winter tires on the
numbers used to define a
have sensors that are part of the vehicle if frequent driving in cold
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height,
TPMS. See Tire Pressure Monitor
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type,
System on page 10‑52. These
sensors contain batteries that are Winter Tires on page 10‑44. and service description. See the
designed to last for 10 years under “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
10-46 Vehicle Care
(2) TPC Spec (Tire DOT Tire Date of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
Performance Criteria Manufacture: The last four of cord and number of plies in
Specification): Original digits of the TIN indicate the the sidewall and under the tread.
equipment tires designed to tire manufactured date. The first (6) Uniform Tire Quality
GM's specific tire performance two digits represent the week Grading (UTQG): Tire
criteria have a TPC specification (01-52) and the last two digits, manufacturers are required to
code molded onto the sidewall. the year. For example, the third grade tires based on three
GM's TPC specifications meet week of the year 2010 would performance factors: treadwear,
or exceed all federal safety have a four-digit DOT date traction, and temperature
guidelines. of 0310. resistance. For more information
(3) DOT (Department of (4) Tire Identification Number see Uniform Tire Quality
Transportation): The (TIN): The letters and numbers Grading on page 10‑62.
Department of Transportation following the DOT code are (7) Maximum Cold Inflation
(DOT) code indicates that the Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load
the tire is in compliance with (TIN). The TIN shows the that can be carried and the
the U.S. Department of manufacturer and plant code, maximum pressure needed to
Transportation Motor Vehicle tire size, and date the tire was support that load.
Safety Standards. manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Tire Designations (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
Tire Size height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
The following is an example of a For example, if the tire size
typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
tire size. item 3 of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
(4) Construction Code: A letter outward on each square inch of
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
of ply construction in the tire. expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
The letter R means radial ply or psi (pounds per square inch).
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply Accessory Weight: The
The United States version of a combined weight of optional
metric tire sizing system. The construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply accessories. Some examples
letter P as the first character in of optional accessories are
the tire size means a passenger construction.
automatic transmission, power
vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air
and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These conditioning.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width.
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
10-48 Vehicle Care
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
cords between the plies and the and coolant, but without Rating for the rear axle. See
tread. Cords may be made from passengers and cargo. Vehicle Load Limits on
steel or other reinforcing DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑11.
materials. into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire,
steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward
cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle.
the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure.
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
alternate angles less than tire used on light duty trucks and
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, some multipurpose passenger
the tread. vehicles.
production plant, brand, and
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. Load Index: An assigned
amount of air pressure in a tire, number ranging from 1 to 279
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load
or psi (pounds per square inch) carrying capacity of a tire.
before a tire has built up heat on page 9‑11.
from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
on page 10‑50. Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and page 9‑11.
molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the
Vehicle Care 10-49
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Sidewall: The portion of a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall Speed Rating: An
pressure for that tire. of the tire. alphanumeric code assigned to
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A a tire indicating the maximum
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and speed at which a tire can
weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and operate.
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. Traction: The friction between
production options weight. Recommended Inflation the tire and the road surface.
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended Tread: The portion of a tire that
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown comes into contact with
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire the road.
Limits on page 9‑11. Pressure on page 10‑50 and
Vehicle Load Limits on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Occupant Distribution : bands, sometimes called wear
Designated seating positions. page 9‑11.
bars, that show across the tread
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of on page 10‑59.
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
10-50 Vehicle Care
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label . Premature or

Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a irregular wear.
information system that vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling.
provides consumers with capacity weight and the
ratings for a tire's traction, original equipment tire size
. Reduced fuel economy.
temperature, and treadwear. and recommended inflation Overinflated tires, or tires that
Ratings are determined by pressure. See “Tire and Loading have too much air, can
tire manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle result in:
government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑11. . Unusual wear.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure . Poor handling.
Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount
. Rough ride.
page 10‑62. of air pressure to operate . Needless damage from
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The effectively. road hazards.
number of designated seating Notice: Neither tire
positions multiplied by The Tire and Loading
underinflation nor Information label on the
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated overinflation is good. vehicle indicates the original
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Limits on page 9‑11. equipment tires and the correct
that do not have enough air, cold tire inflation pressures. The
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in: recommended pressure is the
Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and minimum air pressure needed to
due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could support the vehicle's maximum
weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity.
cargo weight.
Vehicle Care 10-51
For additional information has not been driven for at least Tire Pressure for
regarding how much weight three hours or no more than High-Speed Operation
the vehicle can carry, and an 1.6 km (1 mi).
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Remove the valve cap from the { WARNING
tire valve stem. Press the tire
Load Limits on page 9‑11. How gauge firmly onto the valve to Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
the vehicle is loaded affects get the pressure measurement. (100 mph) or higher, puts an
vehicle handling and ride If the cold tire inflation pressure additional strain on tires.
comfort. Never load the vehicle matches the recommended Sustained high-speed driving
with more weight than it was pressure on the Tire and causes excessive heat buildup
designed to carry. and can cause sudden tire failure.
Loading Information label, no
You could have a crash and you
When to Check further adjustment is necessary. or others could be killed. Some
Check the tires once a month If the inflation pressure is low, high-speed rated tires require
or more. add air until the recommended inflation pressure adjustment for
pressure is reached. If the high-speed operation. When
How to Check inflation pressure in high, press speed limits and road conditions
Use a good quality pocket-type on the metal stem in the center are such that a vehicle can be
gauge to check the tire of the tire valve to release air. driven at high speeds, make sure
pressure. Proper tire inflation Re‐check the tire pressure with the tires are rated for high-speed
cannot be determined by looking the tire gauge. operation, in excellent condition,
at the tire. Check the tire and set to the correct cold tire
Return the valve caps on the inflation pressure for the
inflation pressure when the tires valve stems to keep out dirt and vehicle load.
are cold, meaning the vehicle moisture and prevent leaks.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Vehicles with P225/45R17 and the air pressure in your tires and significantly under-inflated tire
225/40R18 92V size tires require transmit tire pressure readings to a causes the tire to overheat and can
inflation pressure adjustment when receiver located in the vehicle. lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
driving the vehicle at speeds of Each tire, including the spare also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set (if provided), should be checked tread life, and may affect the
the cold inflation pressure to monthly when cold and inflated to vehicle's handling and stopping
280 kPa (41 psi). the inflation pressure recommended ability.
Vehicles with 225/40RF18 88W and by the vehicle manufacturer on the Please note that the TPMS is
255/35RF18 90W size tires require vehicle placard or tire inflation not a substitute for proper tire
inflation pressure adjustment when pressure label. (If your vehicle has maintenance, and it is the driver's
driving the vehicle at speeds of tires of a different size than the size responsibility to maintain correct tire
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set indicated on the vehicle placard or pressure, even if under-inflation has
the cold inflation pressure to tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger
300 kPa (44 psi). should determine the proper tire illumination of the TPMS low tire
Return the tires to the inflation pressure for those tires.) pressure telltale.
recommended cold tire inflation As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been
pressure when high-speed driving vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the
on page 9‑11 and Tire Pressure on (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly.
page 10‑50. pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitor under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
System Accordingly, when the low tire
approximately one minute and then
pressure telltale illuminates, you
The Tire Pressure Monitor System remain continuously illuminated.
should stop and check your tires as
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor This sequence will continue upon
soon as possible, and inflate them
technology to check tire pressure subsequent vehicle start-ups as
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor long as the malfunction exists.
Vehicle Care 10-53
When the malfunction indicator is Federal Communications

illuminated, the system may not be Commission (FCC) Rules and
able to detect or signal low tire with Industry Canada
pressure as intended. TPMS Standards
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation See Radio Frequency Statement on
of replacement or alternate tires or page 13‑21 for information
When a low tire pressure condition
wheels on the vehicle that prevent regarding Part 15 of the Federal
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the TPMS from functioning properly. Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light
Always check the TPMS malfunction Rules and with Industry Canada
on the instrument cluster. If the
telltale after replacing one or more Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
warning light comes on, stop as
tires or wheels on your vehicle to soon as possible and inflate the
ensure that the replacement or Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
alternate tires and wheels allow the Operation shown on the Tire and Loading
TPMS to continue to function Information label. See Vehicle Load
properly. This vehicle may have a Tire
Limits on page 9‑11.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
See Tire Pressure Monitor The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in
Operation on page 10‑53. driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC). The low
mounted onto each tire and wheel tire pressure warning light and the
assembly, excluding the spare tire DIC warning message come on at
and wheel assembly. The TPMS each ignition cycle until the tires
sensors monitor the air pressure in are inflated to the correct inflation
the tires and transmits the tire pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure readings to a receiver pressure levels can be viewed.
located in the vehicle.
10-54 Vehicle Care
For additional information and The TPMS can warn about a low TPMS Malfunction Light and
details about the DIC operation and tire pressure condition but it Message
displays see Driver Information does not replace normal tire
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26. maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly
on page 10‑56, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors
The low tire pressure warning light are missing or inoperable. When the
may come on in cool weather when page 10‑57 and Tires on
page 10‑42. system detects a malfunction, the
the vehicle is first started, and then low tire warning light flashes for
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This Notice: Tire sealant materials are about one minute and then stays on
could be an early indicator that the not all the same. A non-approved for the remainder of the ignition
air pressure is getting low and tire sealant could damage the cycle. A DIC warning message also
needs to be inflated to the proper TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor displays. The malfunction light and
pressure. damage caused by using an DIC warning message come on at
A Tire and Loading Information incorrect tire sealant is not each ignition cycle until the problem
label, attached to your vehicle, covered by the vehicle is corrected. Some of the conditions
shows the size of the original warranty. Always use only the that can cause these to come
equipment tires and the correct GM-approved tire sealant on are:
inflation pressure for the tires when available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been
they are cold. See Vehicle Load replaced with the spare tire. The
Limits on page 9‑11, for an example Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits spare tire does not have a
of the Tire and Loading Information use a GM approved liquid tire TPMS sensor. The malfunction
label and its location. Also see Tire sealant. Using non-approved tire light and DIC message should
Pressure on page 10‑50. sealants could damage the TPMS go off after the road tire is
sensors. See Tire Sealant and replaced and the sensor
Compressor Kit on page 10‑67 for matching process is performed
information regarding the inflator kit successfully. See “TPMS Sensor
materials and instructions. Matching Process” later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-55

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was not done or being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
not completed successfully wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
after rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool.
successfully completing the properly it cannot detect or signal a
sensor matching process. See There are two minutes to match
low tire condition. See your dealer the first tire/wheel position, and
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
Process" later in this section. five minutes overall to match all
light and DIC message comes on four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stays on. longer, the matching process stops
missing or damaged. The and must be restarted.
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
message should go off when the Process The TPMS sensor matching
TPMS sensors are installed and process is:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new 2. Place the vehicle power mode in
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the ON/RUN/START. See Ignition
. Replacement tires or wheels do vehicle’s tires or replacing one or Positions on page 9‑16.
not match the original equipment more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process 3. Make sure the Tire Pressure info
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
should also be performed after display option is turned on. The
other than those recommended
replacing a spare tire with a road info displays on the DIC can be
could prevent the TPMS from
tire containing the TPMS sensor. turned on and off through the
functioning properly. See Buying
The malfunction light and the DIC Settings menu. See Driver
New Tires on page 10‑59.
message should go off at the next Information Center (DIC) on
ignition cycle. The sensors are page 5‑26.
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
10-56 Vehicle Care
4. Use the five-way DIC control on 8. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
the right side of the steering front tire, and repeat the
wheel to scroll to the Tire procedure in Step 7. We recommend that the tires,
Pressure screen under the including the spare tire, if the
9. Proceed to the passenger side
DIC info page. See Driver rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
Information Center (DIC) on procedure in Step 7. for signs of wear or damage at
page 5‑26. least once a month.
10. Proceed to the driver side rear
5. Press and hold the SEL button tire, and repeat the procedure Replace the tire if:
located in the center of the in Step 7. The horn sounds
five-way DIC control. . The indicators at three or
two times to indicate the
The horn sounds twice to signal sensor identification code has
more places around the tire
the receiver is in relearn mode been matched to the driver can be seen.
and the TIRE LEARNING side rear tire, and the TPMS . There is cord or fabric
ACTIVE message displays on sensor matching process is showing through the tire's
the DIC screen. no longer active. The TIRE rubber.
6. Start with the driver side LEARNING ACTIVE message
on the DIC display screen . The tread or sidewall is
front tire.
goes off. cracked, cut, or snagged
7. Place the relearn tool against deep enough to show cord or
the tire sidewall, near the valve 11. Press STOP to turn the
ignition off. fabric.
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor. 12. Set all four tires to the . The tire has a bump, bulge,
A horn chirp confirms that the recommended air pressure or split.
sensor identification code has level as indicated on the Tire
been matched to this tire and and Loading Information label.
wheel position.
Vehicle Care 10-57

. The tire has a puncture, cut, Anytime unusual wear is
or other damage that cannot noticed, rotate the tires as soon
be repaired well because of as possible, check for proper
the size or location of the tire inflation pressure, and check
damage. for damaged tires or wheels.
If the unusual wear continues
Tire Rotation after the rotation, check the
If the vehicle has non-directional wheel alignment. See When It Is
tires, they should be rotated Time for New Tires on
every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. See page 10‑59 and Wheel
Maintenance Schedule on Replacement on page 10‑63.
page 11‑3. Directional tires should not be Use this rotation pattern if the
Tires are rotated to achieve a rotated. Each tire and wheel vehicle has different size tires
uniform wear for all tires. The should be used only in the on the front and rear and they
first rotation is the most position it is in. Directional tires are non-directional.
important. will have an arrow on the tire Different tire sizes should not be
indicating the proper direction of rotated front to rear.
rotation or will have “left” or
“right” molded on the sidewall.
10-58 Vehicle Care
Adjust the front and rear tires to

the recommended inflation { WARNING
pressure on the Tire and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Loading Information label after parts to which it is fastened, can
the tires have been rotated. See make wheel nuts become loose
Tire Pressure on page 10‑50 after time. The wheel could come
and Vehicle Load Limits on off and cause an accident. When
page 9‑11. changing a wheel, remove any
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor rust or dirt from places where the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Monitor Operation on
towel can be used; however, use
Use this rotation pattern when page 10‑53.
a scraper or wire brush later to
rotating tires of the same size Check that all wheel nuts are remove all rust or dirt.
installed on all four wheel properly tightened. See “Wheel
positions. Nut Torque” under Capacities Lightly coat the center of the
If the vehicle has a compact and Specifications on wheel hub with wheel bearing
spare tire, do not include it in the page 12‑2. grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation. tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
Vehicle Care 10-59
When It Is Time for New The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be
This also applies to the spare tire, free of grease, gasoline, or other
Tires if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate
Factors such as maintenance, never used. Multiple factors rubber.
temperatures, driving speeds, including temperatures, loading Parking for an extended period can
vehicle loading, and road conditions conditions, and inflation pressure cause flat spots on the tires that
affect the wear rate of the tires. maintenance affect how fast aging may result in vibrations while
takes place. GM recommends driving. When storing a vehicle for
that tires, including the spare if at least a month, remove the tires or
equipped, be replaced after six raise the vehicle to reduce the
years, regardless of tread wear. weight from the tires.
The tire manufacturer date is the
last four digits of the DOT Tire
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires
molded into one side of the tire GM has developed and matched
sidewall. The first two digits specific tires for the vehicle.
represent the week (01–52) and The original equipment tires
the last two digits, the year. For installed were designed to
example, the third week of the year
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
meet General Motors Tire
date of 0310. Performance Criteria
Treadwear indicators are one way to Specification (TPC Spec)
tell when it is time for new tires. Vehicle Storage system rating. When
Treadwear indicators appear when Tires age when stored normally replacement tires are needed,
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) mounted on a parked vehicle. Park GM strongly recommends
or less of tread remaining. See Tire a vehicle that will be stored for at buying tires with the same TPC
Inspection on page 10‑56 and Tire least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Rotation on page 10‑57. Spec rating.
area away from direct sunlight to
10-60 Vehicle Care
GM's exclusive TPC Spec GM recommends replacing maximum speed capability when
system considers over a worn tires in complete sets of using winter tires with a lower
dozen critical specifications that four. Uniform tread depth on all speed rating.
impact the overall performance tires will help to maintain the
of the vehicle, including brake performance of the vehicle. { WARNING
system performance, ride and Braking and handling
handling, traction control, and performance may be adversely Tires could explode during
tire pressure monitoring affected if all the tires are not improper service. Attempting
performance. GM's TPC Spec replaced at the same time. to mount or dismount a tire
number is molded onto the tire's If proper rotation and could cause injury or death.
sidewall near the tire size. If the maintenance have been done, Only your dealer or authorized
tires have an all-season tread all four tires should wear out at tire service center should
design, the TPC Spec number about the same time. See Tire mount or dismount the tires.
will be followed by MS for mud Rotation on page 10‑57 for
and snow. See Tire Sidewall information on proper tire
Labeling on page 10‑45, for
additional information.
rotation. However, if it is
necessary to replace only one
{ WARNING
axle set of worn tires, place the Mixing tires of different sizes
new tires on the rear axle. (other than those originally
installed on the vehicle), brands,
Winter tires with the same speed or types may cause loss of
rating as the original equipment control of the vehicle, resulting in
tires may not be available for H, a crash or other vehicle damage.
V, W, and ZR speed rated tires. Use the correct size, brand, and
Never exceed the winter tire's type of tire on all four wheels.
Vehicle Care 10-61
The Tire and Loading

{ WARNING Information label indicates the { WARNING
Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits there may not be an acceptable
rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9‑11, for the label level of performance and safety
after many miles of driving. location and more information if tires not recommended for
A tire and/or wheel could fail about the Tire and Loading those wheels are selected. This
suddenly and cause a crash. Information label. increases the chance of a crash
Use only radial-ply tires with and serious injury. Only use GM
the wheels on the vehicle. Different Size Tires and specific wheel and tire systems
Wheels developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
If the vehicle tires must be If wheels or tires are installed that GM certified technician.
replaced with a tire that does not are a different size than the original
have a TPC Spec number, make equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking, See Buying New Tires on
sure they are the same size, page 10‑59 and Accessories and
ride and handling characteristics,
load range, speed rating, and stability, and resistance to rollover Modifications on page 10‑3.
construction (radial) as the may be affected. If the vehicle has
original tires. electronic systems such as antilock
Vehicles that have a tire brakes, rollover airbags, traction
pressure monitoring system control, electronic stability control,
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
could give an inaccurate
of these systems can also be
low-pressure warning if non-TPC affected.
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑53.
10-62 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of For example, a tire graded
Grading 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), 150 would wear one and
or to some limited-production one-half (1½) times as well on
Quality grades can be found tires. the government course as a tire
where applicable on the tire graded 100. The relative
sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars performance of tires depends
and maximum section width. For upon the actual conditions of
example: and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they their use, however, and may
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal depart significantly from the
Temperature A safety requirements and norm due to variations in
additional General Motors Tire driving habits, service practices
The following information relates and differences in road
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards. characteristics and climate.
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must Traction – AA, A, B, C
(NHTSA), which grades tires Conform to Federal Safety The traction grades, from
by treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
temperature performance. This These Grades. and C. Those grades represent
applies only to vehicles sold in the tire's ability to stop on wet
the United States. The grades Treadwear
pavement as measured under
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a controlled conditions on
most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on specified government test
Uniform Tire Quality Grading the wear rate of the tire when surfaces of asphalt and
(UTQG) system does not apply tested under controlled concrete. A tire marked C may
to deep tread, winter tires, conditions on a specified have poor traction performance.
compact spare tires, tires with government test course. Warning: The traction grade
Vehicle Care 10-63
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of road, the tires and wheels might
straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory need to be rebalanced. See your
tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum dealer for proper diagnosis.
acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is Wheel Replacement
characteristics. established for a tire that is Replace any wheel that is bent,
properly inflated and not cracked, or badly rusted or
Temperature – A, B, C corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
overloaded. Excessive speed,
The temperature grades are underinflation, or excessive loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
A (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in wheel nuts should be replaced.
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
to the generation of heat and its Some aluminum wheels can be
buildup and possible tire failure. repaired. See your dealer if any of
ability to dissipate heat when these conditions exist.
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
conditions on a specified indoor Your dealer will know the kind of
Balance wheel that is needed.
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned Each new wheel should have the
and balanced at the factory to same load-carrying capacity,
material of the tire to degenerate provide the longest tire life and best
and reduce tire life, and diameter, width, offset and be
overall performance. Adjustments to mounted the same way as the one it
excessive temperature can wheel alignment and tire balancing replaces.
lead to sudden tire failure. The will not be necessary on a regular
grade C corresponds to a level basis. However, check the Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
of performance which all alignment if there is unusual tire nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
passenger car tires must meet wear or if the vehicle is pulling to System (TPMS) sensors with new
under the Federal Motor Safety one side or the other. If the vehicle GM original equipment parts.
Standard No. 109. Grades B and vibrates when driving on a smooth
10-64 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING { WARNING

Using the wrong replacement Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel the parts to which it is tightened wheel nuts can cause
nuts can be dangerous. It could fastened, can make wheel the wheel to become loose and
affect the braking and handling of nuts become loose after a even come off. This could lead to
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, time. The wheel could come a crash. Be sure to use the
and cause loss of control, causing off and cause a crash. When correct wheel nuts. If you have to
a crash. Always use the correct changing a wheel, remove any replace them, be sure to get new
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel rust or dirt from places where GM original equipment
nuts for replacement. the wheel attaches to the wheel nuts.
vehicle. In an emergency, a
Notice: The wrong wheel can cloth or a paper towel can be Notice: Improperly tightened
also cause problems with bearing used, however, use a scraper wheel nuts can lead to brake
life, brake cooling, speedometer or wire brush to remove all pulsation and rotor damage. To
or odometer calibration, rust or dirt. avoid expensive brake repairs,
headlamp aim, bumper height, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
vehicle ground clearance, and tire the proper sequence and to the
clearance to the body and proper torque specification.
chassis. { WARNING
Never use oil or grease on studs
or the threads of the wheel nuts.
The wheel nuts might come loose
and the wheel could fall off,
causing a crash.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Used Replacement Wheels Notice: If the vehicle is

WARNING (Continued) equipped with a tire size other
{ WARNING the brakes, suspension, or other
than 225/40R18, 225/40RF18,
255/35RF18, 225/35R19, or
Replacing a wheel with a used vehicle parts. The area damaged 255/30R19, use tire chains only
one is dangerous. How it has by the tire chains could cause where legal and only when
been used or how far it has been loss of control and a crash. necessary. Use low profile chains
driven may be unknown. It could Use another type of traction that add no more than 12 mm
fail suddenly and cause a crash. device only if its manufacturer thickness to the tire tread and
When replacing wheels, use a recommends it for the vehicle's inner sidewall. Use chains that
new GM original equipment tire size combination and are the proper size for the tires.
wheel. road conditions. Follow that Install them on the tires of the
manufacturer's instructions. rear axle. Do not use chains on
To avoid vehicle damage, drive the tires of the front axle. Tighten
Tire Chains slow and readjust or remove the them as tightly as possible with
traction device if it contacts the the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain
{ WARNING vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install manufacturer's instructions. If the
If the vehicle has 225/40R18, them on the rear tires. chains contact the vehicle, stop
225/40RF18, 255/35RF18, and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it
225/35R19, or 255/30R19 size
stops. Driving too fast or
tires, do not use tire chains.
spinning the wheels with chains
There is not enough clearance. on will damage the vehicle.
Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to
(Continued)
10-66 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blow out

while driving, especially if the tires { WARNING
If the vehicle has run-flat tires, there are maintained properly. See Tires
is no need to stop on the side of the on page 10‑42. If air goes out of a Driving on a flat tire will cause
road to change a flat tire. See tire, it is much more likely to leak permanent damage to the tire.
Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑44. out slowly. But if there is ever a Re-inflating a tire after it has
blowout, here are a few tips about been driven on while severely
{ WARNING what to expect and what to do: underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Special tools and procedures are If a front tire fails, the flat tire
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
required to service a run-flat tire. that has been driven on while
toward that side. Take your foot off
If these special tools and severely underinflated or flat.
the accelerator pedal and grip the
procedures are not used, injury or steering wheel firmly. Steer to Have your dealer or an authorized
vehicle damage may occur. maintain lane position, and then tire service center repair or
Always be sure the proper tools gently brake to a stop, well off the replace the flat tire as soon as
and procedures, as described in road, if possible. possible.
the service manual, are used.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as { WARNING
used in a skid. Stop pressing the
accelerator pedal and steer to Lifting a vehicle and getting
straighten the vehicle. It may be under it to do maintenance or
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake repairs is dangerous without the
to a stop, well off the road, appropriate safety equipment and
if possible. training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-67
4. Turn off the ignition.

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
5. Inspect the flat tire.
changing a flat tire. If it is used for If this vehicle has a tire sealant kit It can cause unconsciousness
anything else, you or others could and the tire has been separated and even death. Never run the
be badly injured or killed if the from the wheel, has damaged engine in an enclosed area that
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack sidewalls, or has a puncture larger has no fresh air ventilation. For
is provided with the vehicle, only than 6 mm (0.25 in), the tire is too more information, see Engine
use it for changing a flat tire. severely damaged for the tire Exhaust on page 9‑24.
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. If the tire has a puncture
If this vehicle does not have run-flat
less than 6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread
tires and a tire goes flat, avoid
further tire and wheel damage by
area of the tire, see Tire Sealant { WARNING
and Compressor Kit on page 10‑67.
driving slowly to a level place, well Overinflating a tire could cause
off the road, if possible. Turn on the the tire to rupture and you or
hazard warning flashers. See Tire Sealant and others could be injured. Be sure
Hazard Warning Flashers on Compressor Kit to read and follow the tire sealant
page 6‑6. and compressor kit instructions
1. Turn on the hazard warning { WARNING and inflate the tire to its
flashers. recommended pressure. Do not
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended
2. Set the parking brake firmly. area with poor ventilation is pressure.
3. Put an automatic transmission in dangerous. Engine exhaust may
P (Park) or a manual enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
transmission in 1 (First) or contains carbon monoxide (CO)
R (Reverse). which cannot be seen or smelled.
(Continued)
10-68 Vehicle Care
The tire sealant and compressor The kit includes:

{ WARNING can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
Storing the tire sealant and the tread area of the tire. It can
compressor kit or other also be used to inflate an
equipment in the passenger underinflated tire.
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or If the tire has been separated from
collision, loose equipment could the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
strike someone. Store the tire
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
sealant and compressor kit to be
original location. effective. See Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
If this vehicle has a tire sealant Service (U.S. and Canada) on
and compressor kit, there may not page 13‑10.
be a spare tire or tire changing Read and follow all of the tire
equipment, and on some vehicles sealant and compressor kit
there may not be a place to store instructions.
a tire.
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or

Air Only)
Vehicle Care 10-69
2. On/Off Button Replacement sealant canisters are

3. Pressure Gauge available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
4. Pressure Deflation Button Sealant Canister” following.
5. Tire Sealant Canister There is only enough sealant to seal
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
7. Air Only Hose (Black) assembly must be replaced. See
8. Power Plug “Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
9. Canister Release Button (Under
Sealant/Air Hose) Using the Tire Sealant
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Read and follow the safe handling Punctured Tire
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister. Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or

Air Only)
2. On/Off Button
10-70 Vehicle Care
3. Pressure Gauge Do not remove any objects that 6. Plug the power plug (8) into the
4. Pressure Deflation Button have penetrated the tire. accessory power outlet in the
1. Remove the tire sealant and vehicle. Unplug all items from
5. Tire Sealant Canister other accessory power outlets.
compressor kit from its storage
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) location. See Storing the Tire See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
7. Air Only Hose (Black) Sealant and Compressor Kit on If the vehicle has an accessory
page 10‑75. power outlet, do not use the
8. Power Plug cigarette lighter.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)
9. Canister Release Button (Under and the power plug (8). If the vehicle only has a cigarette
Sealant/Air Hose) lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
When using the tire sealant and Do not pinch the power plug
compressor kit during cold Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground cord in the door or window.
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes. so the hose will reach it. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
This will help to inflate the tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap must be running while using the
faster. from the flat tire by turning it air compressor.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire counterclockwise. 8. Press and turn the selector
and wheel damage by driving slowly 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6) switch (1) counterclockwise to
to a level place. Turn on the hazard onto the tire valve stem. Turn it the Sealant + Air position.
warning flashers. See Hazard clockwise until it is tight.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑6.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑66 for other important
safety warnings.
Vehicle Care 10-71
9. Press the on/off button (2) to The pressure gauge (3) may The tire is not sealed and will
turn the tire sealant and read higher than the actual tire continue to leak air until the
compressor kit on. pressure while the compressor vehicle is driven and the
The compressor will inject is on. Turn the compressor off sealant is distributed in the tire,
sealant and air into the tire. to get an accurate pressure therefore, Steps 12–18 must
reading. The compressor may be done immediately after
The pressure gauge (3) will be turned on/off until the Step 11.
initially show a high pressure correct pressure is reached.
while the compressor pushes the Be careful while handling the
sealant into the tire. Once the Notice: If the recommended tire sealant and compressor kit
sealant is completely dispersed pressure cannot be reached after as it could be warm after
into the tire, the pressure will approximately 25 minutes, the usage.
quickly drop and start to rise vehicle should not be driven 12. Unplug the power plug (8) from
again as the tire inflates with farther. The tire is too severely the accessory power outlet in
air only. damaged and the tire sealant and the vehicle.
compressor kit cannot inflate the
10. Inflate the tire to the tire. Remove the power plug from 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)
recommended inflation the accessory power outlet and counterclockwise to remove it
pressure using the pressure unscrew the inflating hose from from the tire valve stem.
gauge (3). The recommended the tire valve. See Roadside 14. Replace the tire valve
inflation pressure can be found Service (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or stem cap.
on the Tire and Loading Roadside Service (U.S. and
Information label. See Tire Canada) on page 13‑10. 15. Replace the sealant/air hose
Pressure on page 10‑50. (6), and the power plug (8)
11. Press the on/off button (2) to back in their original location.
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
10-72 Vehicle Care
19. Stop at a safe location and 21. Dispose of the used sealant
check the tire pressure. Refer canister (5) and sealant/air
to Steps 1–11 under “Using the hose (6) assembly at a local
Tire Sealant and Compressor dealer or in accordance with
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a local state codes and practices.
Tire (Not Punctured).” 22. Replace with a new canister
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate If the tire pressure has fallen assembly available from your
to the recommended inflation more than 68 kPa (10 psi) dealer.
pressure, remove the below the recommended 23. After temporarily sealing the
maximum speed label from the inflation pressure, stop driving tire using the tire sealant and
sealant canister (5) and place it the vehicle. The tire is too compressor kit, take the
in a highly visible location. Do severely damaged and the tire vehicle to an authorized dealer
not exceed the speed on this sealant cannot seal the tire. within 161 km (100 mi) of
label until the damaged tire is See Roadside Service (Mexico) driving to have the tire repaired
repaired or replaced. on page 13‑7 or Roadside or replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its Service (U.S. and Canada) on
original storage location in the page 13‑10. Using the Tire Sealant and
vehicle. If the tire pressure has not Compressor Kit without
18. Immediately drive the vehicle dropped more than 68 kPa Sealant to Inflate a Tire
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the (10 psi) from the recommended (Not Punctured)
sealant in the tire. inflation pressure, inflate the To use the air compressor to inflate
tire to the recommended a tire with air only and not sealant:
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-73
3. Pressure Gauge 3. Place the kit on the ground.

4. Pressure Deflation Button Make sure the tire valve stem is
5. Tire Sealant Canister positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
7. Air Only Hose (Black) from the flat tire by turning it
8. Power Plug counterclockwise.
9. Canister Release Button (Under 5. Attach the air only hose (7) onto
Sealant/Air Hose) the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly 6. Plug the power plug (8) into the
to a level place. Turn on the hazard accessory power outlet in the
warning flashers. See Hazard vehicle. Unplug all items from
Warning Flashers on page 6‑6. other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑66 for other important If the vehicle has an accessory
safety warnings. power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle only has a cigarette
location. See Storing the Tire lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Sealant and Compressor Kit on Do not pinch the power plug
page 10‑75. cord in the door or window.
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or 2. Unwrap the air only hose (7) and
Air Only) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
the power plug (8). must be running while using the
2. On/Off Button air compressor.
10-74 Vehicle Care
8. Press and turn the selector If you inflate the tire higher 14. Replace the air only hose (7)
switch (1) clockwise to the Air than the recommended and the power plug (8) and
Only position. pressure you can adjust the cord back in its original
9. Press the on/off button (2) to excess pressure by pressing location.
turn the compressor on. the pressure deflation 15. Place the equipment in the
button (4) until the proper original storage location in the
The compressor will inflate the pressure reading is reached.
tire with air only. vehicle.
This option is only functional
10. Inflate the tire to the when using the air only
recommended inflation hose (7).
pressure using the pressure 11. Press the on/off button (2) to
gauge (3). The recommended turn the tire sealant and
inflation pressure can be found compressor kit off.
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire Be careful while handling the
Pressure on page 10‑50. tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
The pressure gauge (3) may usage.
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor 12. Unplug the power plug (8) from
is on. Turn the compressor off the accessory power outlet in
to get an accurate reading. The the vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
compressor may be turned on/ 13. Disconnect the air only hose has an accessory adapter located in
off until the correct pressure is (7) from the tire valve stem, by a compartment on the bottom of its
reached. turning it counterclockwise, and housing that may be used to inflate
replace the tire valve stem cap. air mattresses, balls, etc.
Vehicle Care 10-75
Removal and Installation of the Jump Starting

Sealant Canister
For more information about the
To remove the sealant canister: vehicle battery, see Battery on
1. Unwrap the sealant hose. page 10‑26.
2. Press the canister release If the battery has run down, try to
button (9). use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
Be sure to use the following steps to
4. Replace with a new canister do it safely.
which is available from your
dealer. { WARNING
5. Push the new canister into 3. Remove the strap.
place. Batteries can hurt you. They can
4. Remove the tire sealant and
be dangerous because:
compressor kit.
Storing the Tire Sealant To store the tire sealant and
. They contain acid that can
and Compressor Kit burn you.
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
To access the tire sealant and
. They contain gas that can
compressor kit: explode or ignite.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
. They contain enough
page 2‑14. electricity to burn you.
2. Lift the cover. If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
10-76 Vehicle Care
Notice: Ignoring these steps The jump start positive post (1) and 3. Set the parking brake firmly and
could result in costly damage to negative post (2) are on the battery put the shift lever in P (Park)
the vehicle that would not be of the vehicle providing the jump with an automatic transmission,
covered by the warranty. start. or Neutral with a manual
Trying to start the vehicle by The jump start positive post (3) and transmission. See Shifting Into
pushing or pulling it will not the negative grounding point (4) for Park (Automatic Transmission)
work, and it could damage the the discharged battery are on the on page 9‑21 with an automatic
vehicle. passenger side of the vehicle. transmission, or Parking on
page 9‑23 with a manual
The positive jump start connection transmission.
for the discharged battery is under a
red cover. Remove the cover to Notice: If any accessories are left
expose the terminal. on or plugged in during the jump
starting procedure, they could be
1. Check the other vehicle. It must damaged. The repairs would not
have a 12-volt battery with a be covered by the vehicle
negative ground system. warranty. Whenever possible,
Notice: Only use a vehicle that turn off or unplug all accessories
has a 12-volt system with a on either vehicle when jump
negative ground for jump starting the vehicle.
starting. If the other vehicle does 4. Set the ignition to OFF. Turn off
not have a 12-volt system with a all lights and accessories in both
1. Good Battery Positive Post negative ground, both vehicles vehicles, except the hazard
can be damaged. warning flashers if needed.
2. Good Battery Negative Post
2. Position the two vehicles so that
3. Discharged Battery Positive Post
they are not touching.
4. Discharged Battery Negative
Grounding Point
Vehicle Care 10-77
6. Connect the other end of the

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that battery.
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present. 7. Connect one end of the black
clothing and tools away from any negative (–) cable to the
Battery fluid contains acid that negative (–) terminal of the good
underhood electric fan. can burn you. Do not get it on battery.
you. If you accidentally get it in
8. Connect the other end of the
your eyes or on your skin, flush
black negative (–) cable to the
{ WARNING the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
negative (–) grounding point for
the discharged battery.
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode. 9. Start the engine in the vehicle
People have been hurt doing this, with the good battery and run
and some have been blinded. { WARNING the engine at idle speed for at
Use a flashlight if you need more least four minutes.
Fans or other moving engine
light. parts can injure you badly. Keep 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
Be sure the battery has enough your hands away from moving the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
water. You do not need to add parts once the engine is running.
probably needs service.
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery 5. Connect one end of the red
has filler caps, be sure the right positive (+) cable to the
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, positive (+) terminal on the
(Continued) discharged battery.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are Towing Notice: Improper use of the tow
connected or removed in the eye can cause vehicle damage.
wrong order, electrical shorting Use caution and low speeds to
may occur and damage the Towing the Vehicle prevent damage to the vehicle.
vehicle. The repairs would not be Notice: Incorrectly towing a Carefully open the cover in the front
covered by the vehicle warranty. disabled vehicle may cause or rear fascia by using the small
Always connect and remove the damage. The damage would not notch that conceals the tow eye
jumper cables in the correct be covered by the vehicle socket.
order, making sure that the warranty. Do not lash or hook to
cables do not touch each other or the chassis components Install the tow eye into the socket by
other metal. including the front and rear turning it clockwise until it stops.
subframes, suspension control When the tow eye is removed,
Jumper Cable Removal reinstall the cover with the notch in
arms and links during towing and
Reverse the sequence exactly when recovery of a disabled vehicle or the original position.
removing the jumper cables. to secure the vehicle to a flatbed To tow the vehicle behind another
car carrier. Use the proper nylon vehicle for recreational purposes,
strap harnesses around the tires such as behind a motor home, see
to secure the flatbed car carrier. “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed section.
car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck
could damage the vehicle. Recreational Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a Towing
professional towing service if the Recreational vehicle towing means
disabled vehicle must be towed. towing the vehicle behind another
Use the tow eye for towing a vehicle – such as behind a
disabled vehicle or loading it onto a motorhome. The two most common
flatbed car carrier. types of recreational vehicle towing
Vehicle Care 10-79
are known as dinghy towing and

. Is the vehicle ready to be
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towed? Just as preparing the
towing the vehicle with all four vehicle for a long trip, make sure
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing the vehicle is prepared to be
is towing the vehicle with two towed.
wheels on the ground and two Dinghy Towing
wheels up on a device known as a
dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
. What is the towing capacity
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
of the towing vehicle? Be
with all four wheels on the
sure to read the tow
ground, the drivetrain
vehicle manufacturer's
components could be damaged.
recommendations.
The repairs would not be covered
. What is the distance that will be by the vehicle warranty. Do not
traveled? Some vehicles have tow the vehicle with all four
restrictions on how far and how wheels on the ground.
long they can tow.
The vehicle was not designed to be
. Is the proper towing equipment towed with all four wheels on the
going to be used? See your ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle
dealer or trailering professional must be towed, a dolly or a trailer
for additional advice and should be used. If an all-wheel-drive
equipment recommendations. vehicle must be towed, a trailer
should be used. See “Dolly Towing”
following for more information.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing 4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for an

(Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) automatic transmission or in
1 (First) for a manual
transmission.
5. Securely attach the vehicle
being towed to the dolly.
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the
Vehicles) ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will
Use the following procedure to dolly
damage drivetrain components.
tow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle from
Do not tow an all-wheel-drive
the rear:
vehicle with any of its wheels on
1. Attach the dolly to the tow the ground.
vehicle following the dolly
All-wheel-drive vehicles can only be
manufacturer's instructions.
towed with all four wheels on a
2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly. trailer.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Electric) on
(Manual) on page 9‑33.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Appearance Care Follow all manufacturer Finish Care

directions regarding correct
Application of aftermarket clearcoat
product usage, necessary safety
Exterior Care precautions, and appropriate
sealant/wax materials is not
recommended. If painted surfaces
Locks disposal of any vehicle care
are damaged, see your dealer to
product.
Locks are lubricated at the factory. have the damage assessed and
Use a de-icing agent only when Notice: Avoid using repaired. Foreign materials such as
absolutely necessary, and have the high-pressure washes closer calcium chloride and other salts, ice
locks greased after using. See than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
Recommended Fluids and of the vehicle. Use of power sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
Lubricants. washers exceeding 8,274 kPa industrial chimneys, etc., can
(1,200 psi) can result in damage damage the vehicle's finish if they
Washing the Vehicle or removal of paint and decals. remain on painted surfaces. Wash
To preserve the vehicle's finish, Rinse the vehicle well, before the vehicle as soon as possible.
wash it often and out of direct washing and after, to remove all If necessary, use non-abrasive
sunlight. cleaning agents completely. If they cleaners that are marked safe for
are allowed to dry on the surface, painted surfaces to remove foreign
Notice: Do not use matter.
they could stain.
petroleum-based, acidic,
or abrasive cleaning agents as Dry the finish with a soft, clean Occasional hand waxing or mild
they can damage the vehicle's chamois or an all-cotton towel to polishing should be done to remove
paint, metal, or plastic parts. avoid surface scratches and water residue from the paint finish. See
If damage occurs, it would not be spotting. your dealer for approved cleaning
covered by the vehicle's warranty. products.
Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Do not apply waxes or polishes to The bright metal moldings on the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, vehicle are aluminum. To prevent Lenses and Emblems
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint damage always follow these
as damage can occur. cleaning instructions: Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
Notice: Machine compounding . Be sure the molding is cool to to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
or aggressive polishing on a the touch before applying any emblems. Follow instructions under
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish cleaning solution. "Washing the Vehicle" in this
may damage it. Use only . Use a cleaning solution section.
non-abrasive waxes and polishes approved for aluminum. Some
that are made for a basecoat/ Windshield and Wiper Blades
cleaners are highly acidic or
clearcoat paint finish on the contain alkaline substances and Clean the outside of the windshield
vehicle. can damage the moldings. with glass cleaner.
To keep the paint finish looking . Always dilute a concentrated Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
new, keep the vehicle garaged or cleaner according to the cloth or paper towel soaked with
covered whenever possible. manufacturer’s instructions. windshield washer fluid or a mild
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal .
detergent. Wash the windshield
Do not use chrome cleaners. thoroughly when cleaning the
Moldings
. Do not use cleaners that are not blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
Notice: Failure to clean and intended for automotive use. a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
protect the bright metal moldings treatments may cause wiper
can result in a hazy white finish
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the
vehicle after washing to protect streaking.
or pitting. This damage would not
be covered by the vehicle and extend the molding finish. Replace the wiper blades if they
warranty. are worn or damaged. Damage can
be caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
snow, and ice.
Vehicle Care 10-83
Weatherstrips Wheels and Trim — Aluminum automatic car wash that uses
or Chrome silicone carbide tire cleaning
Apply silicone grease on
brushes. Damage could occur
weatherstrips to make them last Use a soft, clean cloth with mild and the repairs would not be
longer, seal better, and not stick or soap and water to clean the wheels. covered by the vehicle warranty.
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips After rinsing thoroughly with clean
once a year. Black marks from water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Steering, Suspension, and
rubber material on painted surfaces A wax may then be applied. Chassis Components
can be removed by rubbing with a
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Visually inspect the front and rear
clean cloth. See Recommended
chrome trim may be damaged if suspension and steering system for
Fluids and Lubricants on
the vehicle is not washed after damaged, loose, or missing parts or
page 11‑13.
driving on roads that have been signs of wear. Inspect the power
Tires sprayed with magnesium, steering for proper hook-up, binding,
calcium, or sodium chloride. leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to These chlorides are used on
clean the tires. check constant velocity joints,
roads for conditions such as ice rubber boots, and axle seals for
Notice: Using petroleum-based and dust. Always wash the leaks.
tire dressing products on the chrome with soap and water after
vehicle may damage the paint exposure. Body Component Lubrication
finish and/or tires. When applying Notice: To avoid surface damage, Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
a tire dressing, always wipe off do not use strong soaps, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
any overspray from all painted chemicals, abrasive polishes, steel fuel door hinge unless the
surfaces on the vehicle. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners components are plastic. Applying
that contain acid on aluminum or silicone grease on weatherstrips
chrome-plated wheels. Use only with a clean cloth will make them
approved cleaners. Also, never last longer, seal better, and not stick
drive a vehicle with aluminum or or squeak.
chrome-plated wheels through an
10-84 Vehicle Care
Underbody Maintenance corrosion. Larger areas of finish hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
damage can be corrected in your repellent from all interior surfaces or
Use plain water to flush dirt and
dealer's body and paint shop. permanent damage may result.
debris from the vehicle's underbody.
Your dealer or an underbody car Chemical Paint Spotting Your dealer may have products for
washing system can do this. If not cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
removed, rust and corrosion can Airborne pollutants can fall upon specifically designed for the
develop. and attack painted vehicle surfaces surfaces being cleaned to prevent
causing blotchy, ring-shaped permanent damage. Apply all
Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular cleaners directly to the cleaning
dark spots etched into the paint cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
If the vehicle is damaged and
surface. on any switches or controls.
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body Cleaners should be removed
repair shop applies anti-corrosion Interior Care quickly. Never allow cleaners to
material to parts repaired or To prevent dirt particle abrasions, remain on the surface being
replaced to restore corrosion regularly clean the vehicle's interior. cleaned for extended periods
protection. Immediately remove any soils. Note of time.
Original manufacturer replacement that newspapers or dark garments Cleaners may contain solvents that
parts will provide the corrosion that can transfer color to home can become concentrated in the
protection while maintaining the furnishings can also permanently interior. Before using cleaners, read
vehicle warranty. transfer color to the vehicle's and adhere to all safety instructions
interior. on the label. While cleaning the
Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove interior, maintain adequate
Quickly repair minor chips and dust from knobs and crevices on the ventilation by opening the doors and
scratches with touch-up materials instrument cluster. Using a mild windows.
available from your dealer to avoid soap solution, immediately remove
Vehicle Care 10-85
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass Coated Moldings

the interior using the following
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Coated moldings should be cleaned.
cleaners or techniques:
dampened with water. Wipe droplets . When lightly soiled, wipe with a
. Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be dampened with water.
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water. . When heavily soiled, use warm
. Never use a brush with stiff
soapy water.
bristles. Notice: To prevent scratching,
. Never rub any surface never use abrasive cleaners on Fabric/Carpet/Suede
aggressively or with excessive automotive glass. Abrasive
Start by vacuuming the surface
pressure. cleaners or aggressive cleaning
using a soft brush attachment. If a
may damage the rear window
. Do not use laundry detergents rotating brush attachment is being
defogger.
or dishwashing soaps with used during vacuuming, only use it
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, Notice: Cleaning the windshield on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
use approximately 20 drops with water during the first three to gently remove as much of the soil
per 3.78 L (1 gal) of water. six months of ownership will as possible using one of the
A concentrated soap solution will reduce tendency to fog. following techniques:
leave a residue that creates Speaker Covers . Gently blot liquids with a paper
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not towel. Continue blotting until no
use solutions that contain strong Vacuum around a speaker cover more soil can be removed.
or caustic soap. gently, so that the speaker will not
be damaged. Clean spots with just . For solid soils, remove as much
. Do not heavily saturate the water and mild soap. as possible prior to vacuuming.
upholstery when cleaning.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners
containing solvents.
10-86 Vehicle Care
To clean: If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to

1. Saturate a clean lint-free removed, it may be necessary to clean. Never use window cleaners
colorfast cloth with water or use a commercial upholstery or solvents. Periodically hand wash
club soda. Microfiber cloth is cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small the microfiber cloth separately,
recommended to prevent lint hidden area for colorfastness before using mild soap. Do not use bleach
transfer to the fabric or carpet. using a commercial upholstery or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring and air dry before next use.
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
gently wringing until water does Notice: Do not attach a device
fabric or carpet. with a suction cup to the display.
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
Following the cleaning process, a This may cause damage and
3. Start on the outside edge of the paper towel can be used to blot would not be covered by the
soil and gently rub toward the excess moisture. warranty.
center. Fold the cleaning cloth
to a clean area frequently to Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,
prevent forcing the soil in to the and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, and Other Plastic
fabric. Radio Displays Surfaces
4. Continue gently rubbing the For vehicles with high gloss Use a soft microfiber cloth
soiled area until there is no surfaces or vehicle displays, use a dampened with water to remove
longer any color transfer from microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. dust and loose dirt. For a more
the soil to the cleaning cloth. Before wiping the surface with the thorough cleaning, use a soft
5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle microfiber cloth dampened with a
removed, use a mild soap brush to remove dirt that could mild soap solution.
solution followed only by club scratch the surface. Then use the
soda or plain water.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Notice: Soaking or saturating Notice: Use of air fresheners may Care of Safety Belts
leather, especially perforated cause permanent damage to
Keep belts clean and dry.
leather, as well as other interior plastics and painted surfaces.
surfaces, may cause permanent If an air freshener comes in
damage. Wipe excess moisture contact with any plastic or { WARNING
from these surfaces after painted surface in the vehicle,
cleaning and allow them to dry blot immediately and clean with a Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
naturally. Never use heat, steam, soft cloth dampened with a mild It may severely weaken them. In
spot lifters, or spot removers. Do soap solution. Damage caused by a crash, they might not be able to
not use cleaners that contain air fresheners would not be provide adequate protection.
silicone or wax-based products. covered by the vehicle warranty. Clean safety belts only with mild
Cleaners containing these soap and lukewarm water.
solvents can permanently change Cargo Cover and
the appearance and feel of leather Convenience Net
or soft trim and are not Wash with warm water and mild
recommended. detergent. Do not use chlorine
Do not use cleaners that increase bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
gloss, especially on the instrument then dry completely.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield
under certain conditions.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the
proper floor mat usage. Floor Mats
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the pedals. that GM certified floor mats be
Interference with the pedals can purchased. Non-GM floor mats
cause unintended acceleration may not fit properly and may
and/or increased stopping interfere with the pedals. Always
distance which can cause a crash check that the floor mats do not
and injury. Make sure the floor interfere with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
pedals. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
. Do not place anything on top of mat to unlock the retainers and
the driver side floor mat. remove.
. Use only a single floor mat on 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
the driver side. mat retainer openings over the
. Do not place one floor mat on carpet retainers and snap into
top of another. position.
The driver side floor mat is held in 3. Make sure the floor mat is
place by button-type retainers. properly secured in place.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and Recommended Fluids,

Lubricants, and Parts
General Information
Maintenance Recommended Fluids and Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Replacement the required maintenance for the
General Information Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 vehicle. Follow this schedule to
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 help protect against major repair
Maintenance Records expenses resulting from neglect or
Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16 inadequate maintenance. It may
Maintenance also help to maintain the value of
Cadillac Premium Care the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 responsibility of the owner to have
all required maintenance performed.
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Your dealer has trained technicians
who can perform required
Special Application Services maintenance using genuine
Special Application replacement parts. They have
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 up‐to‐date tools and equipment
for fast and accurate diagnostics.
Additional Maintenance Many dealers have extended
and Care evening and Saturday hours,
Additional Maintenance courtesy transportation, and online
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 scheduling to assist with service
needs.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Your dealer recognizes the Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
importance of providing vehicles, maintenance needs vary. . Used for high speed or
competitively priced maintenance There may need to be more competitive driving.
and repair services. With trained frequent checks and services. The
technicians, the dealer is the place Additional Required Services ‐
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery
for routine maintenance such as oil Normal are for vehicles that: service.
changes and tire rotations and . Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
additional maintenance items like within recommended limits on Maintenance Schedule Additional
tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper the Tire and Loading Information Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
blades. label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Notice: Damage caused by on page 9‑11. { WARNING
improper maintenance can lead to . Are driven on reasonable road
costly repairs and may not be Performing maintenance work can
surfaces within legal driving be dangerous and can cause
covered by the vehicle warranty. limits.
Maintenance intervals, checks, serious injury. Perform
inspections, recommended fluids, . Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the
and lubricants are important to Recommended Fuel on required information, proper tools,
keep the vehicle in good working page 9‑64. and equipment are available.
condition. Refer to the information in the If they are not, see your dealer to
The Tire Rotation and Required Maintenance Schedule Additional have a trained technician do the
Services are the responsibility of the Required Services ‐ Normal chart. work. See Doing Your Own
vehicle owner. It is recommended to Service Work on page 10‑4.
The Additional Required Services ‐
have your dealer perform these Severe are for vehicles that are:
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
keep the vehicle in good working in hot weather.
condition, improves fuel economy, . Mainly driven in hilly or
and reduces vehicle emissions. mountainous terrain.

. Engine air cleaner filter
Cadillac Premium replacement. Maintenance
Care Maintenance . Passenger compartment air filter Schedule
Your vehicle comes with the replacement.
Owner Checks and Services
Cadillac Premium Care . Multi‐point vehicle inspection
Maintenance. It is a maintenance (MPVI) performed by a qualified At Each Fuel Stop
program that covers select technician. . Check the engine oil level. See
maintenance services during the Engine Oil on page 10‑11.
first 4 years or 80 000 km Cadillac requires that all Cadillac
(50,000 mi), whichever comes first. Premium Care Maintenance Once a Month
services be performed by a Cadillac
Cadillac Premium Care authorized service dealer.
. Check the tire inflation
Maintenance covers routine pressures. See Tire Pressure on
maintenance services, when page 10‑50.
scheduled in accordance with the . Inspect the tires for wear. See
owner manual, including: Tire Inspection on page 10‑56.
. Oil changes based on the . Check the windshield washer
vehicle's oil life monitor system. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
. Tire rotation every 12 000 km page 10‑23.
(7,500 mi).
Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

. Visually inspect windshield wiper
Services Every 12 000 km/ blades for wear, cracking,
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL or contamination. See Exterior
SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi Care on page 10‑81. Replace
engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended worn or damaged wiper blades.
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven for the vehicle, and perform the See Wiper Blade Replacement
under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire on page 10‑30.
engine oil life system might not Rotation on page 10‑57.
indicate the need for vehicle service
. Check tire inflation pressures.
for more than a year. The engine oil
. Check engine oil level and oil See Tire Pressure on
and filter must be changed at least life percentage. If needed, page 10‑50.
once a year and the oil life system change engine oil and filter, and . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
must be reset. Your trained dealer reset oil life system. See Engine
Inspection on page 10‑56.
technician can perform this work. Oil on page 10‑11 and Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑13. . Visually check for fluid leaks.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle . Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
. Check engine coolant level. See
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Engine Coolant on page 10‑18. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
last service. Reset the oil life page 10‑16.
. Check windshield washer fluid
system when the oil is changed. . Inspect brake system.
level. See Washer Fluid on
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑23.
page 10‑13.

. Visually inspect steering, . Check starter switch. See Starter . Check accelerator pedal for
suspension, and chassis Switch Check on page 10‑28. damage, high effort, or binding.
components for damaged, loose, . Check automatic transmission Replace if needed.
or missing parts or signs of shift lock control function. See . Visually inspect gas strut for
wear. See Exterior Care on Automatic Transmission Shift signs of wear, cracks, or other
page 10‑81. Lock Control Function Check on damage. Check the hold open
. Check restraint system page 10‑29. ability of the strut. See your
components. See Safety System . Check ignition transmission lock. dealer if service is required.
Check on page 3‑18. See Ignition Transmission Lock . Check tire sealant expiration
. Visually inspect fuel system for Check on page 10‑29. date, if equipped. See Tire
damage or leaks. . Check parking brake and Sealant and Compressor Kit on
. Visually inspect exhaust system automatic transmission park page 10‑67.
and nearby heat shields for mechanism. See Park Brake and . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
loose or damaged parts. P (Park) Mechanism Check on if equipped. See Sunroof on
. Lubricate body components. See page 10‑29. page 2‑23.
Exterior Care on page 10‑81.
Additional Required Services
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m /1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m /2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m /3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m /3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m /4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m /5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m /6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m /6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m /7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m /8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m /9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m /9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m /1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m /1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m /1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m /1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m /1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m /1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m /11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Except 2.0L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@
2.0L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@
Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited
slip differential.
@ @ @
Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required comes first. comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services - Normal (4) Do not directly power wash the excessive cracking, or damage;
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High replace, if needed.
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer comes first.
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 10‑17.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve works properly,
if the vehicle has one. Replace as
needed.
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@ @ @
Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited
slip differential.
@ @ @
Except 2.0L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@
2.0L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services - Severe (4) Do not directly power wash the
Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the Vehicles Only: Lubricate
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer chassis components every
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will 5 000 km/3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
performed once a year.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 10‑17.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. Inspect for fraying,
routing, and condition. Check that excessive cracking, or damage;
the purge valve works properly, replace, if needed.
if the vehicle has one. Replace as
needed. (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. It is recommended the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
that your dealer perform these the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
services — their trained dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
technicians know your vehicle best. corrosion-free.
Fluids
Your dealer can also perform a Belts
thorough assessment with a Proper fluid levels and approved
multi-point inspection to recommend . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
when your vehicle may need squeak or show signs of and components. See
attention. The following list is cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
intended to explain the services and . Trained dealer technicians have Lubricants on page 11‑13 for GM
conditions to look for that may access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
indicate services are required. to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicle’s interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10‑84 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi-point inspection, the tires can save money, fuel, and page 10‑81.
your dealer can check the lamps can reduce the risk of tire failure.
and note any concerns. . Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
Wheel Alignment Windshield Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle . Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper if needed. replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑11.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Canada 88863462).
Manual Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
Rear Axle (Non-Limited Slip Gear DEXRON MTF 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88863089).
Differential)
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Axle (Limited Slip Differential) DEXRON LS Gear 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88862624, in
Canada 88862625).
Rear Axle (All-Wheel Drive) Gear DEXRON MTF 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88863089).
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 20857930 A3178C
Engine Oil Filter
2.0L L4 Engine 12640445 PF64
2.5L L4 Engine 12640445 PF64
3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13356916 CF185
Spark Plugs
2.0L L4 Engine 12626906 41-116
2.5L L4 Engine 12627160 41-115
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22905714 —
Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in) 25882578 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed
Reading
2 NOTES
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the load floor under
the spare tire cover in the trunk, has
the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System– Engine
2.0L L4 Engine 7.6 L 8.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L L4 Engine RWD 4.7 L 5.0 qt
2.0L L4 Engine AWD 5.7 L 6.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Fuel Tank 62.5 L 16.5 gal
Transfer Case – AWD 0.8 L 0.8 qt
Rear Axle (with limited slip) 1.0 L 1.0 qt
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
6-Speed Automatic 6.0 L 6.4 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.0L L4 Engine X Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
Manual
2.5L L4 Engine A Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
3.6L V6 Engine 3 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.0L and 2.5L L4 Engines
3.6L V6 Engine
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Service OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-21 If the matter has already been
Roadside Service (U.S. and Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service or
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21 parts manager, contact the owner of
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency your dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Cadillac, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Cadillac Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-458-8006. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-888-446-2000. with the new vehicle. However, BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to can file with the Better Business Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: to enforce your rights.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available out-of-court program administered
from the vehicle registration or by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left of Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
be required to resort to this informal
. Vehicle delivery date and dispute resolution program prior to limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
participation in a no-charge or write to:
mediation/arbitration program. Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance
designed so that the entire dispute Procedure
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
decision, should be completed in very important to your dealer and
approximately 70 days. We believe General Motors.
our impartial program offers Normally, any problem with the
advantages over courts in most transaction, sale, or usage of the
jurisdictions because it is informal, vehicle must be handled by your
quick, and free of charge. dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that despite STEP THREE Customer Assistance

the good intentions of all parties
involved, sometimes a
If your case is not resolved in a Offices (U.S. and Canada)
reasonable amount of time by your
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General Cadillac encourages customers to
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance call the toll-free number for
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the assistance. However, if a customer
the normal means, we suggest the following information: wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
following steps: the letter should be addressed to:
. Name
STEP ONE United States and Puerto Rico
. Address
Explain your case to your dealer Cadillac Customer Assistance
. Phone number Center
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year Cadillac Motor Car Division
manager, depending on your case. . Brand P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification www.Cadillac.com
necessary information. They are Number (VIN)
interested in your continual 1-800-458-8006
satisfaction.
. Mileage 1-800-833-2622 (For Text
. Delivery date Telephone devices (TTYs))
STEP TWO Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112
. Description of the problem
If you are not satisfied, please From U.S. Virgin Islands:
. Dealership name
contact the general manager or your
dealership owner to ask for their 1-800-496-9994
. Dealership address
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the See Customer Assistance Offices
right people at General Motors for (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
support, if needed. Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Canada All e-mail inquiries to the Customer El Salvador

Assistance Center (CAC) should be
General Motors of Canada Limited 800-6273
sent to: cac.cadillac@gm.com.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care
Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Mexico Honduras
1908 Colonel Sam Drive 800-0122-6101
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 From Mexico City
www.gm.ca 5329-0816 Customer Assistance for
1-888-446-2000 From Other Mexico Locations Text Telephone (TTY)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Users (U.S. and Canada)
Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0816
Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112 United States and Canada To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
Overseas 1-866-466-8195 and who use Text Telephones
Please contact the local General (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
Costa Rica
Motors Business Unit. available at its Customer Assistance
00-800-052-1005 Center. Any TTY user can
Customer Assistance communicate with Cadillac by
Guatemala dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users
Offices (Mexico) 1-800-999-5252 in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
To contact the Customer Assistance
Center (CAC), use the phone Panama
numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-0001
Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to Dominican Republic
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-888-751-5301
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
Online Owner Center D (Preferred Dealer Cadillac Owner Centre

Information): Select a preferred (Canada) cadillacowner.ca
Online Owner Experience dealer and view dealer location,
(U.S.) my.cadillac.com Take a trip to the Cadillac Owner
maps, phone numbers, and hours. Centre:
The Cadillac online owner J (Warranty Tracking . Chat live with online help
experience is a one-stop resource Information): Track the vehicle’s
that allows interaction with Cadillac representatives.
warranty information.
and keeps important vehicle-specific . Use the Vehicle Tools section.
information in one place. J (Recall Information): View
active recalls or search by Vehicle . Access third party enthusiast
Membership Benefits Identification Number (VIN). See sites and social media networks.
E (Vehicle Information): Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . Locate owner resources such as
Download owner manuals and view on page 12‑1. lease-end, financing, and
vehicle-specific how-to videos. H (Other Account Information): warranty information.
G (Maintenance Information): View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite . Retrieve favorite articles,
View maintenance schedules, radio, and OnStar account quizzes, tips, and multimedia
required alerts, OnStar onboard information. galleries organized into the
vehicle diagnostic information, and F (Live Chat Support): Chat live Features and Auto Care
schedule service appointments. with online help representatives. Sections.
I (Service History): View Visit my.cadillac.com to register your . Download owner manuals.
printable dealer-recorded service vehicle. . Find Cadillac-recommended
records and self-recorded service maintenance services.
records.
GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also limitations described in the following

has a Mobility Program. Call pages. Program coverage varies by
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for country.
(U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call Roadside Assistance is available
1-800-263-3830. 24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.
Roadside Service
This program expires two years
(Mexico) from the date of the invoice for the
As a new owner, your vehicle is vehicle, regardless of vehicle
automatically enrolled in the mileage and changes in vehicle
Roadside Assistance program. The ownership.
This program is available to services are available at no cost
qualified applicants for cost For more information about the
under the terms and conditions of renewal of this program at the end
reimbursement of eligible the program. The Roadside
aftermarket adaptive equipment of its term, contact the Cadillac
Assistance program is not part of, Customer Assistance Center at
required for the vehicle, such as or included, in the coverage
hand controls or a wheelchair/ 01-800-466-0805.
provided by the new vehicle limited
scooter lift for the vehicle. warranty. Services Provided
For more information on the limited Roadside Assistance provides . Flat Tire Change: If unable to
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or assistance to the driver and change a flat tire, Roadside
call the GM Mobility Assistance passengers while driving the vehicle Assistance will provide towing
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text within your city of residence or on service to the nearest authorized
Telephone (TTY) users, call any passable road in Mexico, the Cadillac dealership. It is the
1-800-833-9935. United States, and Canada. owner's responsibility for the
Services are subject to the repair or replacement of the tire.
This service is limited to the

. Emergency Towing: Tow to the If the vehicle cannot be received
transfer of the vehicle to the nearest dealer for warranty by the nearest Cadillac dealer
repair facility. service if the vehicle cannot be due to scheduling conflicts, the
driven. vehicle will be taken to a safe
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the If the vehicle is involved in an place where it will remain for up
vehicle to get to the nearest accident during the commission to 48 hours until it can be taken
service station. of a crime, administrative to the dealer. If the storage costs
violation, or breach of traffic exceed the amount authorized,
. Lock-Out Service: Service to regulations, Roadside the owner is responsible to pay
unlock the vehicle if you are Assistance will not provide the difference at the time of
locked out. service. When the vehicle is not service. Contact Roadside
. Battery Jump Start: Service to accessible to be towed, all Assistance for more information
jump start a dead battery. maneuvers required to access it on authorized amounts.
will be at the owner's expense. . *Trip Interruption: This service
. *Emergency Messages:
Transmission of urgent phone If the vehicle is in another city is provided if you are prevented
messages. outside of your residence, from further usage of your
Roadside Assistance is limited vehicle while traveling and it is
. *Emergency Calls: Call for
to moving the vehicle to the not possible for the nearest
emergency services. Cadillac dealership to repair the
nearest dealer. If you would like
. *Dealership Location the vehicle moved to a different vehicle the same day, requiring
Assistance: Information dealer, you will be asked to the vehicle to stay at the
regarding addresses and cover the difference in cost at dealership for a night or more.
telephone numbers for Cadillac the time of the move. If this happens, in addition to the
dealers. previously listed services and
prior to confirmation by the
dealership, you are entitled to
choose one of the following
alternatives, within the limits of
existing Roadside Assistance Assistance, depending on Canada are at the owner's expense
program guidelines. If the costs availability at the chosen and will be reimbursed by Roadside
exceed the amount authorized destination. Restrictions apply Assistance.
for these services, you must pay based on vehicle specifications.
the difference at the time of Services Not Included in Roadside
If you are on the road, taxi Assistance
service. service to the nearest bus
Roadside Assistance station or airport will be Roadside Assistance does not
cover or reimburse services for the
will coordinate hotel provided.
accommodations for all vehicle following:
. *Complimentary
travelers for up to two nights. Transportation for Vehicle
. Events caused by fraud or bad
A rental car will be provided for Pick Up: Transportation to pick faith by the driver.
up to two days and the vehicle up your vehicle after repairs are . Vehicle immobilization situations
must be returned to its original complete. Once the dealer has due to a major force or
destination, excluding vehicles reported that the vehicle has unforeseen circumstances,
with a carrying capacity greater been repaired, Roadside such as natural phenomena
than 3.5 tons. Assistance will provide bus or of an extraordinary nature,
Complimentary Transportation: If commercial airline one-way earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,
you prefer to continue your trip service (subject to availability) and other cyclonic storms.
to the intended destination or for the person designated by you . Vehicle immobilization situations
return to your place of to collect your vehicle at the arising from car accidents
residence, and the trip requires dealership's location if you or caused by the driver of the
more than eight hours driving on the designated person are not in vehicle or third parties. This
the road, transportation for the the same town or city as the means any occurrence that
driver and passengers by first dealership. causes physical injury to the
class bus or coach commercial *These services are not provided occupants and/or the vehicle
airline will be provided to a for U.S. or Canada residents. All caused by external forces.
location chosen by Roadside services provided in the U.S. and

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, Routine vehicle repair costs are Cadillac reserves the right to make
armed forces or police actions not covered by the Roadside any changes or discontinue the
which prevent timely delivery of Assistance program. For more Roadside Assistance program at
assistance services. information, see your new vehicle any time without notification.
. Food service, beverages, warranty.
telephone calls, or other extra Contacting Roadside Assistance Roadside Service (U.S.
costs. Accommodation costs and Canada)
apply only to Mexico per the Roadside Assistance services are
terms and conditions of the of no cost to you and available U.S.: 1-800-224-1400.
Roadside Assistance program. 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Canada: 1-800-882-1112.
Costs are only incurred in situations
. Any damage to the vehicle that exceed the limits of the Text Telephone (TTY) Users
without intent, derived from the program, some of which are listed (U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438.
services provided. previously in this section. Service is available 24 hours a day,
. Cost of towing a trailer when To contact Roadside Assistance by 365 days a year.
choosing a Cadillac dealer that phone, use the following numbers:
is nearest to the temporary Calling for Service
storage facility for the disabled Mexico When calling Roadside Service,
vehicle. 01-800-466-0805 have the following information
. Cost of all maneuvers required ready:
United States
to access the vehicle when it is . Your name, home address, and
not available to be towed. 1-866-466-8906 home telephone number.
. Cost of fuel provided. Canada . Telephone number of your
1-800-268-6800 location.
E-mail
. Location of the vehicle.
asistencia.cadillac@gm.com
. Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle claims are made too often, or the
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
Identification Number (VIN), and same type of claim is made many change a flat tire with a spare
delivery date of the vehicle. times. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
. Description of the problem. must be in good condition and
Cadillac Owner Privileges™ properly inflated. It is your
Coverage . Emergency Fuel Delivery: responsibility for the repair or
Delivery of enough fuel for the replacement of the tire if it is not
Services are provided up to 6 years/
vehicle to get to the nearest covered by the warranty.
110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichever
comes first. service station. . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Lock-Out Service: Service to jump start a dead battery.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock the vehicle if you are . Trip Interruption Benefits
person driving the vehicle without locked out. A remote unlock may and Service: If your trip is
permission from the owner is not be available if you have OnStar. interrupted due to a warranty
covered. For security reasons, the driver failure, incidental expenses may
must present identification be reimbursed during the
Roadside Service is not a part of the before this service is given. 6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi)
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
. Emergency Tow from a Public Powertrain warranty period.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Road or Highway: Tow to the Items considered are hotel,
Canada Limited reserve the right to
nearest Cadillac dealer for meals, and rental car.
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at warranty service, or if the vehicle
any time without notification. was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
Cadillac and General Motors of when the vehicle is stuck in the
Canada Limited reserve the right to sand, mud, or snow.
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
Cadillac Technician Roadside Services Not Included in

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service (U.S. Only) Roadside Service Service: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside . Impound towing caused by copy of the repair orders are
Service is more than an auto club or violation of any laws. required. Once authorization has
towing service. It provides every . Legal fines. been received, the Roadside
Cadillac owner in the United States Service advisor will help you
with the advantage of contacting a . Mounting, dismounting, make arrangements and explain
Cadillac advisor and, where or changing of snow tires, how to receive payment.
available, a Cadillac trained dealer chains, or other traction devices.
technician who can provide on-site
. Alternative Service: If
. Towing or services for vehicles
service. assistance cannot be provided
driven on a non-public road or right away, the Roadside Service
A dealer technician will travel to highway. advisor may give you permission
your location within a 30-mile to get local emergency road
Services Specific to
radius of a participating Cadillac service. You will receive
dealership. If beyond this radius, we Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
payment, up to $100, after
will arrange to have your car towed . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement sending the original receipt to
to the nearest Cadillac dealership. is approximately $5 Canadian. Roadside Service. Mechanical
Each technician travels with a Diesel fuel delivery may be failures may be covered,
specially equipped service vehicle restricted. Propane and other however any cost for parts and
complete with the necessary fuels are not provided through labor for repairs not covered by
Cadillac parts and tools required to this service. the warranty are the owner
handle most roadside repairs. responsibility.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments (U.S. and Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
Canada) Canada) completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by
service, contact your dealer and experience, we and our participating providing several transportation
request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the
scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can offer
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the one of the following:
of your transportation needs, your Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service
inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybrid-specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy
into the service department the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide
immediately, keep driving it until it Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your
can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption
unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes
safety related. If it is, please call warranty repairs are required. one-way or round-trip shuttle service
your dealership, let them know this, within reasonable time and distance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area.
and ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited
If your dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet
the vehicle for service, you are entitled “Limited Warranty and
urged to do so as early in the work Owner Assistance Information”
day as possible to allow for furnished with each new vehicle
same-day repair. provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right
Reimbursement and must be supported by original to unilaterally modify, change,
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign or discontinue Courtesy
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to
transportation is used instead of and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim
your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and
expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include conditions described herein at its
original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements, sole discretion.
to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card,
GM for shuttle service. In addition, etc. You are responsible for fuel Collision Damage Repair
usage charges and may also be
for U.S. customers, should you
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
(U.S. and Canada)
arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental If the vehicle is involved in a
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the collision and it is damaged, have the
repair. damage repaired by a qualified
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs technician using the proper
It may not be possible to provide a
and be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
receipts. See your dealer for parts. Poorly performed collision
Additional Program repairs diminish the vehicle resale
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel Information value, and safety performance can
or other transportation costs. be compromised in subsequent
All program options, such as shuttle collisions.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts
Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or Genuine GM Collision parts are
about availability. All Courtesy new parts made with the same
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept materials and construction methods
administered by appropriate dealer as the parts with which the vehicle
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel. was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle for damage repairs by using
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable Genuine GM Original Equipment
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
related failures are not covered by Insuring the Vehicle Genuine Manufacturer replacement
that warranty. parts. Read the lease carefully, as
Protect your investment in the GM you may be charged at the end of
Aftermarket collision parts are also vehicle with comprehensive and
available. These are made by the lease for poor quality repairs.
collision insurance coverage. There
companies other than GM and may are significant differences in the
not have been tested for the vehicle. quality of coverage afforded by
As a result, these parts may fit
If a Crash Occurs
. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember,
Number (VIN). recycled parts will not be covered by
If there has been an injury, call . Insurance company and policy the GM vehicle warranty.
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all number. Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the but you must live with the repair.
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle. Depending on your policy limits,
puts you in danger, or you are your insurance company may
Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using
instructed to move it by a police
that uses quality replacement parts. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
officer.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this the repair professional, and insist on
Give only the necessary information section. Genuine GM parts. Remember,
to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What if the vehicle is leased, you may be
in the crash.
Will You See after an Airbag obligated to have the vehicle
For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3‑25. repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Roadside Service (Mexico) on even if your insurance coverage
page 13‑7 or Roadside Service Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost.
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑10. Repair Process
If another party's insurance
Gather the following information: In the event that the vehicle requires company is paying for the repairs,
.
damage repairs, GM recommends you are not obligated to accept a
Driver name, address, and that you take an active role in its
telephone number. repair valuation based on that
repair. If you have a pre-determined insurance company's collision policy
. Driver license number. repair facility of choice, take the repair limits, as you have no
. Owner name, address, and vehicle there, or have it towed there. contractual limits with that company.
telephone number. Specify to the facility that any In such cases, you can have control
required replacement collision parts of the repair and parts choices as
. Vehicle license plate number. be original equipment parts, either long as the cost stays within
. Vehicle make, model, and new Genuine GM parts or recycled reasonable limits.
model year.
Service Publications Owner Information Current and Past Models

Ordering Information Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
Service Manuals to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle. The ORDER TOLL FREE:
and repair information on the Owner Manual includes the 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
steering, body, etc. For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Manual.
Service Bulletins give additional Or write to:
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
needed to knowledgeably service Attention: Customer Service
General Motors cars and trucks. shipping fees.
47911 Halyard Drive
Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner Plymouth, MI 48170
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only.
service of the vehicle. Prices are subject to change without
RETAIL SELL PRICE: notice and without incurring
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and obligation. Allow ample time for
shipping fees. delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Call Transport Canada at
a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or event data recorder (EDR). The
Transport Canada) in a situation like
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to
this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write: bag deployment or hitting a road
about the vehicle’s performance and
Cadillac Customer Assistance how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in
Center vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s
Cadillac Motor Car Division monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is
P.O. Box 33169 transmission performance, to designed to record data related to
Detroit, MI 48232-5169 monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time,
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000, typically 30 seconds or less. The
or write: crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your
General Motors of Canada Limited technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating;
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Some modules may also store data
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
such as rate of fuel consumption or passenger safety belts were
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
retain personal preferences, such as . How far (if at all) the driver was
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
These data can help provide a GM will not access this data or OnStar®
better understanding of the share it with others except: with the
circumstances in which crashes and consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar® and has an active
recorded by your vehicle only if a consent of the lessee; in response subscription, additional data may be
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no to an official request by police or collected through the OnStar
data are recorded by the EDR under similar government office; as part of system. This includes information
normal driving conditions and no GM's defense of litigation through about the vehicle’s operation; about
personal data (e.g., name, gender, the discovery process; or, as collisions involving the vehicle; the
age, and crash location) are required by law. Data that GM use of the vehicle and its features;
recorded. However, other parties, collects or receives may also be and, in certain situations, the
such as law enforcement, could used for GM research needs or may location and approximate GPS
combine the EDR data with the type be made available to others for speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is OnStar Terms and Conditions and
routinely acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a Privacy Statement on the OnStar
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. website.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Infotainment System Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with a Statement
navigation system as part of the This vehicle has systems that
infotainment system, use of the operate on a radio frequency that
system may result in the storage of comply with Part 15 of the Federal
destinations, addresses, telephone Communications Commission (FCC)
numbers, and other trip information. rules and with Industry Canada
See the infotainment manual for Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Radio Frequency 1. The device may not cause
Identification (RFID) harmful interference.
RFID technology is used in some 2. The device must accept any
vehicles for functions such as tire interference received, including
pressure monitoring and ignition interference that may cause
system security, as well as in undesired operation of the
connection with conveniences such device.
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Changes or modifications to any of
transmitters for remote door locking/ these systems by other than an
unlocking and starting, and authorized service facility could void
in-vehicle transmitters for garage authorization to use this equipment.
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
2 NOTES
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency OnStar Services equipped with automatic door locks,
button > to get a priority and can help police locate the
connection to an Emergency vehicle if it is stolen.
Emergency
Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
OnStar navigation requires the
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
Directions and Connections
respond to an AMBER Alert. even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
. Get crisis assistance and Press > to connect to an
evacuation routes. Press Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
personnel. The Advisor is also
The OnStar mapping database is
trained to offer critical assistance in
continuously updated. For coverage
emergency situations before first
maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
responders arrive.
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Security Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar provides services like Stolen 1. Press Q to connect to a live
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition Advisor.
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped with these 2. Request directions.
services. OnStar can unlock the 3. Directions are downloaded to the
vehicle doors remotely, if it is vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands Repeat Other Navigation Services

During a Planned Route 1. Press =. System responds:
Available from OnStar
Cancel Route “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from
1. Press =. System responds: 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say with the last direction given, then
Navigation or screen-based
“Cancel route.” System responds with “OnStar ready,”
navigation system. When ready, the
responds: “Do you want to then a tone.
directions will be downloaded to the
cancel directions?” 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice vehicle.
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: commands.
Destination Download: Press Q,
“OK, request completed, thank Get My Destination then request the Advisor to
you, goodbye.” download directions to the
1. Press =. System responds:
Route Preview navigation system in the vehicle.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
After the call ends, press the “Go”
1. Press =. System responds: 2. Say “Get my destination.” button on the navigation screen to
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. System responds with address begin driving directions.
2. Say “Route preview.” System and the distance to the
Destinations can also be
responds with the next three destination, then responds with
downloaded on the go. For
maneuvers. “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
information about eNav, Destination
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice Download, and coverage maps
commands. commands. see www.onstar.com (U.S.),
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
14-4 OnStar
Connections 2. Say “Call.” The system responds 3. Say the entire number without
“Please say the name or number pausing. System responds:
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows to call.” “Please say the name tag.”
calls to be made and received from
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be 3. Say “911” without pausing. The 4. Pick a name tag. System
controlled from a cell phone through system responds “911.” responds: “About to store <name
the OnStar RemoteLink mobile 4. Say “Call.” The system responds tag>. Does that sound OK?”
app. For coverage maps, see “OK, dialing 911.” 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
www.onstar.com (U.S.), again. System responds: “OK,
www.onstar.ca (Canada). Retrieve My Number storing <name tag>.”
Hands-Free Calling 1. Press =. System responds: Place a Call Using a Stored
“OnStar ready.” Number
1. Press =. System responds:
2. Say “My number.” System
“OnStar ready.”
responds: “Your OnStar 1. Press =. System responds:
2. Say “Call.” System responds: Hands-Free Calling number is.” “OnStar ready.”
“Please say the name or number 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
to call.” End a Call responds: “OK, calling
3. Say the entire number without Press =. System responds: “Call <name tag>.”
pausing, including a “1” and the ended.” Verify Minutes and Expiration
area code. System responds:
“OK calling.” Store a Name Tag for Speed Press = and say “Minutes” then
Dialing “Verify” to check how many minutes
Calling 911 Emergency
1. Press =. System responds: remain and their expiration date.
1. Press =. The system responds “OnStar ready.”
“OnStar Ready,” followed by
a tone. 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the number you
would like to store.”
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Mobile App OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

Download the OnStar RemoteLink Information Automatic Crash Response,
mobile app to select Apple, Android Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
and Blackberry devices to check Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
pressure; to start the vehicle (if Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
equipped) or unlock it; or to connect eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
RemoteLink information and account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
compatibility, see www.onstar.com receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada). ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
Diagnostics vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
information. conditions:
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
perform a vehicle check every Reactivation for Subsequent . In the U.S. see www.onstar.com
month. It will check the engine, Owners (U.S.) or call 1.888.4.ONSTAR.
transmission, antilock brakes, and (1.888.466.7827).
major vehicle systems. It also Press Q and follow the prompts to . In Canada see www.onstar.ca
checks the tire pressures, if the speak to an Advisor as soon as (Canada) or call
vehicle is equipped with the Tire possible after acquiring the vehicle. 1.888.4.ONSTAR.
Pressure Monitoring System. If a The Advisor will update vehicle (1.888.466.7827).
diagnostics check is needed records and will explain the OnStar
between e-mails, press Q, and an
service offers and options available. . Press Q to speak with an
Advisor can run a check. Advisor.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar services require a vehicle service such as hills, tall buildings, TTY Users
electrical system, wireless service, tunnels, weather, electrical system
OnStar has the ability to
and GPS satellite technologies to be design and architecture of the
communicate to the deaf,
available and operating for features vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
to function properly. These systems crash, or wireless phone network
customers while in the vehicle. The
may not operate if the battery is congestion or jamming.
available dealer-installed TTY
discharged or disconnected. See Radio Frequency Statement on system can provide in-vehicle
OnStar service cannot work unless page 13‑21 for information access to all of the OnStar services,
your vehicle is in a place where regarding Part 15 of the Federal except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar has an agreement with a Communications Commission (FCC) Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
wireless service provider for service rules and Industry Canada
in that area, and the wireless Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
service provider has coverage, (Canada)
network capacity, reception, and Services for People with
Disabilities The website provides access to
technology compatible with OnStar account information, allows
service. Service involving location Advisors provide services to help management of the OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot subscribers with physical disabilities subscription, and viewing of videos
work unless GPS signals are and medical conditions. of each service. Get subscription
available, unobstructed, and plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
compatible with the OnStar Press Q for help with: Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
hardware. OnStar service may not . Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
work if the OnStar equipment is not attendant to pump gas. page. The website navigation and
properly installed or it has not been services provided may vary by
properly maintained. If equipment or
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
country.
software is added, connected, that meets accessibility needs.
or modified, OnStar service may not . Providing directions to the
work. Other problems beyond the closest hospital or pharmacy in
control of OnStar may prevent urgent situations.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle. after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. open area.
Global Positioning
Warranty System (GPS) Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be . Obstruction of the GPS can Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New occur in a large city with tall antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The buildings; in parking garages; and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle around airports; in tunnels, reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty underpasses, or parking send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. garages; or in an area with very Unable to Connect to OnStar
dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
Languages not available, the OnStar system
The vehicle can be programmed to should still operate to call If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in English, French or OnStar. However, OnStar could or the cellular network has reached
have difficulty identifying the maximum capacity, this message
Spanish. Press Q and ask an
Advisor. Advisors can speak exact location. may come on. Press Q to try the
English, French or Spanish. call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.
14-8 OnStar
Vehicle and Power Issues cannot be assured. Third parties THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
may unlawfully intercept or access “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY
OnStar services require a vehicle
transmissions and private OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
electrical system, wireless service,
communications without consent. IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
and GPS satellite technologies to be
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
available and operating for features OnStar - libcurl and unzip OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
to function properly. These systems acknowledgments FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
may not operate if the battery is
Certain OnStar components include AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
discharged or disconnected.
libcurl and unzip software. Below THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
Add-on Electrical Equipment are the notices and licenses EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
associated with this software: OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
The OnStar system is integrated LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
into the electrical architecture of the libcurl: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
vehicle. Do not add any electrical WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
equipment. See Add-On Electrical COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
NOTICE CONTRACT, TORT OR
Equipment on page 9‑75. Added OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
electrical equipment may interfere Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
with the operation of the OnStar Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
system and cause it to not operate. All rights reserved. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
Privacy THE SOFTWARE.
Permission to use, copy, modify,
The complete OnStar Privacy and distribute this software for any Except as contained in this notice,
Statement may be found at purpose with or without fee is the name of a copyright holder
www.onstar.com (U.S.), hereby granted, provided that the shall not be used in advertising or
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). above copyright notice and this otherwise to promote the sale, use
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless permission notice appear in all or other dealings in this Software
communications are cautioned that copies. without prior written authorization of
the privacy of any information sent the copyright holder.
via wireless cellular communications
OnStar 14-9
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, 2. Redistributions in binary form

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, (compiled executables) must
the Info-ZIP copyright and license. Rich Wales, Mike White reproduce the above copyright
The definitive version of this This software is provided “as is,” notice, definition, disclaimer,
document should be available without warranty of any kind, and this list of conditions in
at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event documentation and/or other
license.html indefinitely. shall Info-ZIP or its contributors be materials provided with the
held liable for any direct, indirect, distribution. The sole exception
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. to this condition is redistribution
All rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or of a standard UnZipSFX binary
For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software. (including SFXWiz) as part of a
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as self-extracting archive; that is
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to permitted without inclusion of
use this software for any purpose, this license, as long as the
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications, normal SFX banner has not
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it been removed from the binary or
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, freely, subject to the following disabled.
Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions:
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions.
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
14-10 OnStar
3. Altered versions–including, but 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use

not limited to, ports to new the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
operating systems, existing ports “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
with new graphical interfaces, “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and dynamic, shared, or static and “MacZip” for its own source
library versions–must be plainly and binary releases.
marked as such and must not be
misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered
versions also must not be
misrepresented as being
Info-ZIP releases–including, but
not limited to, labeling of the
altered versions with the names
“Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited
to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP.
Such altered versions are
further prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System Alert

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-60
Accessories and
How Does an Airbag All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-29
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Passenger Sensing Antenna
Active Emergency
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Braking System . . . . . . . . 1-20, 9-58
What Makes an Airbag Antilock Brake
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-42
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Adaptive Forward
What Will You See after an Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Appearance Care
Adaptive Forward Lighting
When Should an Airbag Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-21 Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Airbags Assistance Systems for
Additional Information
Adding Equipment to the Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Assistance Systems for
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-14 Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing Airbag-Equipped CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Alarm Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Brake C
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-18
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
California
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Perchlorate Materials
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30, 9-33
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Shift Lock Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Capacities and
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Braking System
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Active Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Carbon Monoxide
B Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Exterior Lighting Battery Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Card Reader
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cargo
Voltage and Charging High Intensity Discharge
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cautions, Danger, and
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-30 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-32
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23, 7-27 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
INDEX i-3
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-15 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Check Competitive Driving, Racing Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4, 13-5
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Text Telephone (TTY)
Ignition Compressor Kit, Tire Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-29 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Customer Information
Child Restraints Connections Service Publications
Infants and Young OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Satisfaction
Lower Anchors and Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41 Coolant
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 D
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-50 Engine Temperature Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Danger, Warnings, and
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Engine Temperature Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cleaning Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Daytime Running
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Climate Control Systems Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5 Courtesy Transportation Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Diagnostics
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
i-4 INDEX
Door Driving (cont'd) Engine

Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Check and Service Engine
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Dual Automatic Climate Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . . 3-11 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4 Coolant Temperature
Drive Systems E Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-29 E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 Coolant Temperature
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-50 Electrical Equipment, Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Driver Information Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Electrical System Cooling System Messages . . .5-35
Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Engine Compartment Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Driving Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Fuses and Circuit Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Characteristics and Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Instrument Panel Fuse Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-24 Rear Compartment Fuse Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
INDEX i-5
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 G

Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-4 E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Exterior Lighting Battery Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Gasoline
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Gauges
F Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Engine Coolant
Features Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-65
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Filter, Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-23
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-6 Requirements, California . . . . .9-65
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Warning Lights and
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Fuses
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Fluid Engine Compartment
General Information
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-15 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Fuses and Circuit
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Instrument Panel Fuse
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Forward Collision Alert Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
GM Mobility Reimbursement
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Rear Compartment Fuse
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Front Seats Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
i-6 INDEX
H Heater Infants and Young Children,

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-6
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-51 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8 Instrument Panel
Headlamps
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Adaptive Forward
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
How to Wear Safety Belts J
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Jack
Daytime Running
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
High Intensity Discharge I
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 K
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Ignition Transmission Lock Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-4 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Keyless Entry
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated Indicator Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
INDEX i-7
L LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Lights (cont'd)

Light Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-13
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-45
Adaptive Forward Lighting Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lamps
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Service Electric Parking
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-4
Lighting StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Traction Control System
Exterior Lamps Off
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Exterior Lighting Battery
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Lights Locks
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-16
Antilock Brake System Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Lane Departure
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Engine Coolant Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Lane Departure Warning
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-23
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 for Children (LATCH
LATCH System
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Replacing Parts after a
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-4 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-20 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
i-8 INDEX
M Messages (cont'd) N
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Maintenance Navigation
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Maintenance Schedule New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Recommended Fluids
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 O
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16 Object Detection System
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Off-Road
Mirrors
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Automatic Dimming
Messages Oil
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Battery Voltage and Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35 OnStar®
Monitor System, Tire
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 OnStar® Additional
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Object Detection System . . . . .5-38 OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
INDEX i-9
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Passenger Airbag Status Privacy

OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Radio Frequency
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Passenger Compartment Air Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21
Ordering Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Program
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-17 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-27 Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13
Outlets Perchlorate Materials Proposition 65 Warning,
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Personalization
Overview, Infotainment Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 R
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Phone Racing or Other Competitive
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23, 7-27 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
P Port Radio Frequency
Park USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-21
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Power Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Radios
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30, 9-33 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Brake and P (Park) Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Rear Axle
Parking Brake Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Pregnancy, Using Safety Rear Seat
Parking or Backing Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
i-10 INDEX
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Reporting Safety Defects S

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Recommended U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64 Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts
Recommended Fluids and Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Retained Accessory
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Records Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Ride Control Systems
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18
Recreational Vehicle Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-38
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-17
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Safety Defects Reporting
Reimbursement Program, Roads
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roadside Service . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-10
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Roof
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-33 Running the Vehicle While
Seats
Replacing LATCH System Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Replacing Safety Belt
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
INDEX i-11
Seats (cont'd) Service Electric Parking Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3 Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Shift Lock Control Function Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Securing Child Check, Automatic Storage Areas
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-50 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security Shifting Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Side Blind Zone Storing the Tire Sealant
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Signals, Turn and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Accessories and Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 System
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Active Emergency Braking . . . .9-58
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16 StabiliTrak Forward Collision
Maintenance, General OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21, 7-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Publications Ordering Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Systems
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Starting the Vehicle
Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
i-12 INDEX
T Tires (cont'd) Transmission

Terminology and Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-5
Uniform Tire Quality Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-18
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Wheel Alignment and Tire Transportation Program,
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-4
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Tires
When It Is Time for New Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Turn and Lane-Change
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Towing
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-70 U
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Uniform Tire Quality
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-53
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-78 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-49
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73, 9-74 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Traction Updates
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-52
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-34 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Control System (TCS)/ USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Run-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Sealant and
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-38
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Sealant and Compressor
Trailer
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73, 9-74
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
INDEX i-13
V W Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Vehicle Warning
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Winter
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-62
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Identification Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-30
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Wheels
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Alignment and Tire
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-20 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Vehicle Care When It Is Time for New
Storing the Tire Sealant Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-75 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-39
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
i-14 INDEX
2 NOTES

2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cadillac ATS Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 10/5/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart H : Flammable

In Brief Steering Wheel Rear Vision

Power Door Locks Trunk Windows

To adjust the seat:

See Lumbar Adjustment on Memory Features Second Row Seats

If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and

Press M /J or L /z to heat the Head Restraint Safety Belts

To adjust the steering wheel:

INT: Move the lever up to INT for Climate Controls

1. Driver and Passenger 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

Vehicle Features Favorites SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls

c : Press to decline an incoming y or z : Press the five-way Cruise Control

*: Press to disengage cruise SEL: Press to open a menu or

Active Emergency Power Outlets Universal Remote System

Read the instructions completely Express Open/Express Close:

Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors Windows

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

5. Press the START/STOP button. To start the vehicle: Battery Replacement

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Remote Vehicle Start

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

This feature can also be Press v { to activate the safety Doors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Trunk Lock Release If the vehicle is ever without power,

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Emergency Trunk Release The emergency trunk release Vehicle Security

Notice: Do not use the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors Exterior Automatic Dimming

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

The vehicle aerodynamics are Express-Down/Up Windows

2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-23

2-24 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Dirt and debris may collect on the

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety Belt Use During Adding Equipment to the